WO2007088896A1 - Method for producing conductive film, light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel - Google Patents

Method for producing conductive film, light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007088896A1
WO2007088896A1 PCT/JP2007/051613 JP2007051613W WO2007088896A1 WO 2007088896 A1 WO2007088896 A1 WO 2007088896A1 JP 2007051613 W JP2007051613 W JP 2007051613W WO 2007088896 A1 WO2007088896 A1 WO 2007088896A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
silver
film
layer
electromagnetic wave
shielding film
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2007/051613
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hirotomo Sasaki
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corporation filed Critical Fujifilm Corporation
Publication of WO2007088896A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007088896A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K9/00Screening of apparatus or components against electric or magnetic fields
    • H05K9/0073Shielding materials
    • H05K9/0094Shielding materials being light-transmitting, e.g. transparent, translucent
    • H05K9/0096Shielding materials being light-transmitting, e.g. transparent, translucent for television displays, e.g. plasma display panel

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the front surface of a display such as a CRT (cathode ray tube), a PDP (plasma display panel), a liquid crystal, an ELP (electric aperture luminescence panel (also referred to as EL)), or a FED (field emission display).
  • a display such as a CRT (cathode ray tube), a PDP (plasma display panel), a liquid crystal, an ELP (electric aperture luminescence panel (also referred to as EL)), or a FED (field emission display).
  • the present invention relates to an electromagnetic shield that shields electromagnetic waves generated from a microwave oven, electronic equipment, printed wiring board, etc., and in particular, a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film having translucency, and an optical filter provided with the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film And plasma display panels.
  • the above-mentioned countermeasure against EMI requires the ability to shield electromagnetic waves.
  • a method of making the casing a metal body or a high conductor, a method of inserting a metal plate between the circuit board and the circuit board, and a method of covering the cable with a metal foil are employed.
  • CRT, PDP, etc. it is necessary for the operator to recognize characters displayed on the screen, so transparency on the display is required. For this reason, any of the above methods is inappropriate as an electromagnetic wave shielding method in which the front surface of the display often becomes opaque.
  • a PDP generates a larger amount of electromagnetic waves than a CRT or the like, and thus a stronger electromagnetic wave shielding ability is required.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding ability can be simply expressed by the surface resistance value.
  • the surface resistance value is required to be about 300 ⁇ / sq or less.
  • translucent electromagnetic shielding material for 2.5 Q Zsq or less is required, and for consumer plasma televisions using PDP, 1.
  • the required level of transparency is about 70% or more for CRT and 8 for PDP.
  • Visible light transmittance of 0% or more is required, and much higher transparency is desired.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses an electromagnetic shielding material such as a conductive fiber cover.
  • this shield material has a drawback that when the display screen is shielded with a thick mesh line width, the screen becomes dark and it is difficult to see the characters displayed on the display.
  • Patent Documents 5 to 8 There has been proposed a method of forming a metal thin film mesh on a transparent substrate by an etching process using a photolithography method. Since this method allows fine processing, it has the advantage that a mesh having a high aperture ratio (high transmittance) can be created and can be shielded even when strong electromagnetic waves are emitted. However, the manufacturing process is complicated and complicated, and the production cost is high. Ettin It is known that the intersection of the lattice pattern is thicker than the line width of the straight line part. In addition, the problem of moire was pointed out and improvement was desired.
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-327274
  • Patent Document 2 JP 11 170420 A
  • Patent Document 3 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-283889
  • Patent Document 4 JP-A-11-170421
  • Patent Document 5 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-46293
  • Patent Document 6 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-23290
  • Patent Document 7 JP-A-5-16281
  • Patent Document 8 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-338848
  • Patent Document 9 Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-207001
  • Patent Document 10 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-221564
  • Patent Document 10 has advantages such as being able to precisely control the shape of the mesh, imparting high transparency, and enabling mass production at low cost compared to other methods.
  • advantages due to the high resistance of the developed silver conductive mesh, it is difficult to perform direct electroplating, and electroless plating and electroplating are used together when plating on large-area films. There is a need to. Therefore, improvement has been desired due to problems such as deterioration in productivity and high plating costs.
  • the electroplating process is performed by single wafer processing and batch processing.
  • electroplating is performed on a film with a large surface resistance of ⁇ ⁇ / sq or more by single wafer processing
  • the film portion that is in contact with the plating solution is mostly deposited on the portion near the current-carrying side.
  • this phenomenon occurred at the start of plating, that is, at the first power supply, and it was difficult to uniformly apply the plating even if the plating was continued thereafter.
  • a method of printing the above electroless plating catalyst as a grid pattern by a printing method and then performing electroless plating is, for example, when using screen printing, a patterning force screen of a plating catalyst nucleus or an intaglio. This breaks in units of size, resulting in the mesh breaking.
  • a photolithography method is used, the mesh breaks in units of exposure mask size. The reason for this is that since the exposure method is a single-wafer photomask, the exposure to the exposed photoresist is long, and the entire roll film cannot be exposed continuously, and exposure within the photomask size range is possible. This must be repeated once.
  • near infrared cut performance is an important required characteristic for the purpose of preventing malfunction of the remote control.
  • the generation of near-infrared light has increased with the increase in PDP brightness.
  • Cutting performance is required.
  • the film or functional film having the antireflection function is also supplied as a roll-like film like the film having the near-infrared cut function. Therefore, if the conductive mesh of the electromagnetic wave shielding film is interrupted, the material is lost. There was a problem of doing.
  • the means for imparting the electromagnetic wave shielding function to the PDP is an optical for PDP having a base material such as glass, plastic sheet, or plastic film, in which the electromagnetic wave shielding film is bonded to the image display panel using an adhesive.
  • a method such as attaching an electromagnetic shielding film to the filter is used.
  • an adhesive is used.
  • a photographic film has been very rarely used for bonding to glass or plastic with such an adhesive.
  • the support surface conventionally used in photographic film is bonded to glass, the peel strength of the bonded surface is insufficient and peeling occurs over time.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the productivity with a small loss of the shielding material, and to form a continuous mesh pattern in a large amount at a low cost. It is to provide a shielding film.
  • a second object is to provide an electromagnetic wave shielding film having excellent adhesion (peeling strength) to an glass shielding substrate or the like of an electromagnetic wave shielding film obtained from a photosensitive material.
  • a further object of the present invention is to provide a light-sensitive material having an easy-adhesion layer in which developed silver is not substantially formed in an unexposed portion on a conductive film obtained by developing the light-sensitive material, that is, no capri is formed. And it is providing an electromagnetic wave shielding film.
  • another object of the present invention is to provide a translucent electromagnetic shielding film having both high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near-infrared cut performance.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical filter and a plasma display having high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near infrared cut performance.
  • the first method for producing a conductive film of the present invention is a method for producing a conductive film comprising a developing step of exposing and developing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support.
  • the reduction process process which makes a reducing agent contact the surface of the said photosensitive film, and the smoothness process process which smoothes the said photosensitive film.
  • the reduction process may be performed after the smoothing process or the smoothing process may be performed after the reduction process.
  • the second method for producing a conductive film of the present invention includes a step of exposing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support to develop a metallic silver portion by developing.
  • a smoothing treatment step of smoothing the photosensitive film subjected to the reduction treatment According to the first and second methods for producing a conductive film of the present invention, the electrical resistance of the obtained conductive film can be reduced.
  • a conductive metal such as metallic silver or copper formed by electrolytic plating
  • the manufacturing method of the present invention only the reduction treatment may be performed without performing the smoothing treatment, but the electrical resistance of the conductive film can be reduced by using the smoothing treatment and the reduction treatment in combination. It can be sufficiently reduced.
  • the smoothing process is a calendar process
  • the calendar process is a linear pressure of 1960 N / cm (200 kgf / cm) or more. Is preferably carried out.
  • the reducing agent is an alkaline aqueous solution, and the reducing agent is sodium triacetoxyborohydride, dimethylamine borane or sodium borohydride. Preferably there is.
  • the metal silver part preferably contains 50 to: LO 0% by mass of Ag.
  • the physical image and / or the staking process may not be substantially applied to the metal silver part.
  • the electrolytic plating process may further include an electrolytic plating process in which the metallic silver part is subjected to an electrolytic plating process. It is preferable to be used.
  • the metallic silver portion is treated with a silver ion ligand instead of the reduction treatment or in addition to the reduction treatment. By performing this treatment, the electrical resistance can be further sufficiently reduced.
  • the present invention is a translucent electromagnetic shielding film formed by forming a mesh-shaped metallic silver portion on a support, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion contains 50 to L00% by mass of Ag.
  • a metallic silver portion in which metallic silver wires having a line width of 18 ⁇ m or less are combined in a mesh shape with an aperture ratio of 85% or more, and the shield film has a surface resistance of 5 ⁇ / sq or less
  • a translucent electromagnetic wave sheet characterized in that it is a shield film in which the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is continuous for 3 m or more in the longitudinal direction and the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is disconnected at 10 locations / m 2 or less. It is also in the film.
  • the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film preferably has a haze generated by light transmission of 10% or less.
  • Such a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film can be manufactured using the conductive film manufactured by the manufacturing method of the first and second conductive films of the present invention.
  • the present invention also provides a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film for a plasma display panel, an optical filter, or a plasma display manufactured using the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film. There is also a play panel.
  • the present invention may be in the following forms.
  • a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film in which a mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is formed on a support, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion has a line width of 18 m containing 50 to Ag LOO.
  • the following metallic silver wire is a metallic silver part that is combined in a mesh shape with an aperture ratio of 85% or more, and the shield film has a surface resistance value of 5 ⁇ / sq or less, and the mesh-like shape in the longitudinal direction.
  • a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film characterized in that the metallic silver part is a shielding film having a continuous length of 3 m or more, and the mesh-shaped metallic silver part has a break of 10 places / m 2 or less.
  • a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film for plasma display panels comprising the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film described in any one of 1) to 9) above.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a method for producing a conductive film that can sufficiently reduce the electrical resistance of the conductive film. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film in which a continuous mesh pattern is formed in a large amount at a low cost by improving the productivity with little loss of the shielding material.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding film excellent in the adhesiveness (peeling strength) to the glass substrate etc. of the electromagnetic wave shielding film obtained from a photosensitive material can be provided.
  • a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film having excellent productivity, low cost, no generation of capri, and high electromagnetic wave shielding properties, an optical filter and a plasma display panel using the same Can be provided.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of an electroplating bath suitably used for electroplating treatment.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a conductive film obtained by the method for producing a conductive film of the present invention.
  • “mesh” in “continuous mesh pattern” or the like refers to a mesh pattern having a plurality of fine line forces or a net having a plurality of fine line forces according to an example in the art.
  • a continuous mesh pattern is a pattern in which fine lines are not substantially cut (10 locations / m 2 or less) and is continuous over a long distance.
  • High productivity of translucent electromagnetic shielding film because it can be cut at the position.
  • the “conductive film referred to as an electromagnetic wave shielding film when used for electromagnetic wave shielding”
  • it is not connected to other components (component film) to be laminated. As long as there is no confusion, it is sometimes called “electromagnetic wave shielding film” or simply “film”.
  • the thickness of the support in the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is 200 m or less, preferably 20 to 180 / ⁇ ⁇ , more preferably 50 to 120 m. If it is in the range of 10 to 200 m, a desired visible light transmittance can be obtained, and handling is easy.
  • the method for forming the metallic silver portion is not particularly limited, but a photosensitive material containing a silver salt (film-like) In the case of being processed, it is most advantageous to form the photosensitive film) by a developing method. Therefore, the following description explains the case where a method of developing a photosensitive material containing a silver salt is adopted.
  • the thickness of the metallic silver portion can be appropriately determined according to the coating thickness of the silver salt-containing layer coating (silver salt emulsion) coated on the support.
  • the thickness of the metallic silver part is preferably 30 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.01 to 9 ⁇ m. Most preferred is ⁇ 5 / ⁇ ⁇ .
  • a metallic silver part is pattern shape.
  • the metallic silver part may be a single layer or a multilayer structure of two or more layers.
  • different color sensitivities can be imparted so that it can be exposed to different wavelengths.
  • different patterns can be formed in each layer.
  • the translucent electromagnetic shielding film including the patterned metal silver portion having a multilayer structure formed as described above can be used as a high-density printed wiring board.
  • the thickness of the metallic silver part is preferable for use as an electromagnetic wave shielding film of a display because the viewing angle of the display becomes wider as it is thinner.
  • the thickness of the metallic silver part is preferably less than 9 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 m or more and less than 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 or more and less than 3 m. More preferably.
  • a metal silver portion having a desired thickness is formed by controlling the coating thickness of the above-described silver salt-containing layer, and the thickness of the layer made of conductive metal particles is further reduced by physical development and Z or staking treatment. Since it can be freely controlled, even a translucent electromagnetic shielding film having a thickness of less than 5 ⁇ m, preferably less than 3 ⁇ m can be easily formed.
  • the present invention supports a pattern containing a necessary amount of conductive metal. Since it can be provided on the body, it is sufficient to use only the minimum amount of metal, which is advantageous in terms of both reducing manufacturing costs and reducing the amount of metal waste.
  • FIG. 2 shows an example of the conductive film of the present invention.
  • a conductive film 21 shown in FIG. 2 has a conductive functional layer 22 on a support 23.
  • the conductive functional layer 22 contains a silver halide emulsion layer 28.
  • a metal silver portion can be formed by performing exposure 'development processing or the like on the exposed portion 24, and a conductive metal portion can be formed by applying electrolytic plating in order to further increase the conductivity.
  • the unexposed part 25 becomes a light-transmitting part (for example, made of gelatin).
  • the preferred adhesive layer of the present invention will be described.
  • the easy adhesion layer is composed of one layer, and may be composed of two or more layers.
  • an easy-adhesion layer having the following two-layer structure on the surface of the support on which the metallic silver portion is not provided.
  • Antistatic layer comprising water-dispersible or water-soluble synthetic resin, carpositimide compound and conductive metal oxide particles as essential components
  • Second layer Surface layer containing water-dispersible or water-soluble synthetic resin and cross-linking agent as essential components (It is not the surface layer when laminated with other constituent layers, but it means the top layer of the easy-adhesion layer)
  • the easy adhesion layer is provided with an antistatic layer and a surface layer in this order on a support.
  • the haze of the low charge support obtained by providing the antistatic layer on the support is 3% or less, and the surface electrical resistance of the surface layer of the resulting photosensitive material
  • the conductivity is imparted so that is in the range of 8 X 10 6 to 6 ⁇ 10 8 ⁇ .
  • the haze in the present specification is a value measured according to JIS K-7105 using a haze meter (NDH2000, Nippon Denshoku) under the measurement conditions of 25 ° C. and 60% RH.
  • the antistatic layer is a layer containing conductive metal oxide particles, and generally further contains a binder.
  • the conductive metal oxide particles are preferably needle-like particles having a major axis to minor axis ratio (major axis Z minor axis) in the range of 3 to 50. . In particular, those having a major axis Z minor axis in the range of 10 to 50 are preferred.
  • the minor axis of such acicular particles is preferably in the range of 0.001 to 0.0, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.01 to 0.02 / zm.
  • the major axis is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 5. O / zm, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.1 to 2. O / zm.
  • Materials for the conductive metal oxide particles include ZnO, TiO2, SnO, AlO, InO.
  • metal oxides containing different atoms can be mentioned.
  • SnO metal oxide
  • ZnO, A10, TiO, InO, and MgO are preferred and SnO, ZnO, InO and
  • SnO is particularly preferred, with 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 and TiO being preferred.
  • TiO is particularly preferred.
  • ZnO is particularly preferred, with 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 and TiO being preferred.
  • ZnO is particularly preferred.
  • the material of the conductive metal oxide particles is preferably a material containing a small amount of different elements with respect to the metal oxide or the composite metal oxide. Also preferred are those containing an oxygen defect in the crystal structure. Examples of the conductive metal oxide particles containing a small amount of different atoms include SnO doped with antimony.
  • antimony-doped SnO having the dimensions of the short axis and the long axis
  • the use of 2 metal oxide particles is advantageous for forming an antistatic layer that is transparent and has good electrical conductivity. As a result, it is possible to easily obtain a light-sensitive material having a low chargeable support having a haze of 3% or less and having a surface electrical resistance of 8 ⁇ 10 6 to 6 ⁇ 10 8 ⁇ . Monkey.
  • acicular metal oxide particles for example, antimony-doped Sn 2 O 3
  • a transparent antistatic layer having good conductivity is advantageously formed.
  • the reasons for this can be considered as follows.
  • the acicular metal oxide particles extend long in the antistatic layer with the long axis direction parallel to the surface of the antistatic layer. It occupies only the length of the short axis diameter in the thickness direction. Since such needle-like metal oxide particles are long in the long axis direction as described above, high conductivity can be obtained even in a small amount that is easy to contact with each other compared to normal spherical particles. . Therefore, the surface electrical resistance can be reduced without impairing transparency.
  • the minor axis diameter is usually smaller than or substantially the same as the thickness of the antistatic layer, and even if it protrudes slightly on the surface, the protruding portion does not protrude. Since it is weak, it is almost completely covered by the surface layer provided on the antistatic layer. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an advantage that there is almost no occurrence of powder falling which is a detachment of the protruding portion from the layer during the conveyance of the support for preparing the photosensitive material, the photosensitive material for exposure and development.
  • the change in surface electrical resistance before and after the development of the photosensitive material is extremely small when the above-mentioned acicular metal oxide is used, compared to the relatively large case of spherical particles, especially after development processing. It can also be said that the transportability is significantly improved. This is presumably because in the case of spherical particles, the arrangement and state of the particles change due to swelling and shrinkage of the film due to the development process, and the number of parts in contact with each other decreases. .
  • the antistatic layer in the present invention generally contains a binder for dispersing and supporting the conductive metal oxide particles.
  • a binder material various polymers such as acrylic resin, bulle resin, polyurethane resin, and polyester resin can be used. From the viewpoint of preventing powder falling, a cured product of a polymer (preferably acrylic resin, vinyl resin, polyurethane resin or polyester resin) and a carpositimide compound is preferable.
  • a polymer and a carboxyimide compound in a water-dispersed state such as a water-soluble one or an emulsion. .
  • the polymer has a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or an amino group so that a cross-linking reaction with the carpositimide compound is possible.
  • a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferred, and a carboxyl group is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the hydroxyl group or carboxyl group in the polymer is preferably from 0.0001 to L equivalent Zlkg, particularly preferably from 0.001 to L equivalent Zlkg.
  • Acrylic resin includes acrylic acid esters such as acrylic acid and alkyl acrylate, and methacrylic acid esters such as acrylamide, acrylonitrile, methacrylic acid, and alkyl methacrylate.
  • acrylic acid esters such as acrylic acid and alkyl acrylate
  • methacrylic acid esters such as acrylamide, acrylonitrile, methacrylic acid, and alkyl methacrylate.
  • examples include stears, methacrylamides, and meta-tallow-tolyl homopolymers of any of the monomers, or copolymers obtained by polymerization of two or more of these monomers.
  • homopolymers of monomers of acrylic acid esters such as alkyl acrylates and methacrylic acid esters such as alkyl methacrylates, or copolymers obtained by polymerization of two or more of these monomers. Is preferred.
  • the acrylic resin has, as a main component, a monomer having any group of, for example, a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, and an amino group so that a crosslinking reaction with a carpositimide compound is possible. Is a polymer obtained by partially using
  • Examples of the above-mentioned bur resin include polybulu alcohol, acid-modified polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl enore mannole, polybutyral, polybulu methyl ether, polyolefin, ethylene Z butadiene copolymer, polyacetate bur, chloride.
  • Mention of vinyl Z vinyl acetate copolymer, vinyl chloride Z (meth) acrylate copolymer and ethylene Z acetate butyl copolymer (preferably ethylene Z vinyl acetate Z (meth) acrylate copolymer) Can do.
  • polybulal alcohol, acid-modified polybulal alcohol, polybullymarl, polyolefin, ethylene z butadiene copolymer and ethylene Z butyl acetate copolymer (preferably ethylene Z butyl acetate Z acrylic) Acid ester copolymers) are preferred.
  • the above-mentioned vinyl resin is capable of crosslinking reaction with a carposimide compound, such as polybulal alcohol, acid-modified polyvinyl alcohol, polybul formal, polybulutyl, polybulumethyl ether and polyacetate butyl.
  • a polymer having a hydroxyl group is obtained by leaving an alcohol unit in the polymer.
  • a part of a monomer having a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or an amino group is used for crosslinking.
  • a possible polymer is used for crosslinking.
  • polyurethane resin examples include polyhydroxy compounds (eg, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerin, trimethylolpropane), polyhydroxy compounds and polybasic compounds.
  • the hydroxyl group remaining unreacted after the reaction between polyol and polyisocyanate can be used as a functional group capable of crosslinking reaction with a carpositimide compound.
  • the polyester resin generally used is a polymer obtained by reacting a polyhydroxy compound (eg, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerin, trimethylolpropane) with a polybasic acid.
  • a polyhydroxy compound eg, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerin, trimethylolpropane
  • the polyester resin for example, after the reaction between the polyol and the polybasic acid is completed, the unreacted hydroxyl group and carboxyl group can be used as a functional group capable of a crosslinking reaction with the calpositimide compound.
  • a third component having a functional group such as a hydroxyl group may be added.
  • acrylic resin and polyurethane resin are preferable, and acrylic resin is particularly preferable.
  • calpositimide compound used in the present invention it is preferable to use a compound having a plurality of calpositimide structures in the molecule.
  • Polycarposimide is usually synthesized by a condensation reaction of an organic diisocyanate.
  • the organic group of the organic diisocyanate used for the synthesis of a compound having a plurality of carposimide structures in the molecule is not particularly limited, and either an aromatic group, an aliphatic group, or a mixture thereof can be used.
  • an aliphatic type is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • synthetic raw materials organic isocyanate, organic diisocyanate, organic triisocyanate and the like are used.
  • organic isocyanates aromatic isocyanates, aliphatic isocyanates, and mixtures thereof can be used.
  • organic monoisocyanate isophorone isocyanate, phenyl isocyanate, cyclohexyl isocyanate, butyl isocyanate, naphthyl isocyanate and the like are used.
  • calpositimide-based compound that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product such as, for example, calpositrite V-02-L2 (trade name: manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd.).
  • the carbodiimide compound is preferably added in an amount of 1 to 200% by mass, more preferably 5 to 100% by mass, based on the binder.
  • the conductive metal oxide particles were dispersed as they are or in a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary).
  • a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary).
  • the dispersion is added to an aqueous dispersion or aqueous solution containing the binder (eg, polymer, carpositimide compound and appropriate additive), and mixed (dispersed as necessary) to form an antistatic layer-forming coating solution.
  • the antistatic layer is formed by applying a coating solution for forming the antistatic layer to a surface of a plastic film such as polyester (on the side where no photosensitive layer is provided), such as a dip coating method or an air knife coating.
  • the applied plastic film such as polyester may be before sequential biaxial stretching, before simultaneous biaxial stretching, after uniaxial stretching, before re-stretching, or after biaxial stretching.
  • the thickness of the antistatic layer in the present invention is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • a range of 01-0. 2 / zm is preferred. If it is less than 0.01 / zm, it is difficult to apply the coating agent uniformly, so uneven coating occurs immediately on the product: If it exceeds Lm, the antistatic performance and scratch resistance may be inferior. It is preferable that the conductive metal oxide particles are contained in the antistatic layer in a range of 10 to LOOO% by mass with respect to the binder (for example, the total of the above polymer and carpositimide compound). Furthermore, the range of 100-500 mass% is preferable. Less than 10% by mass In such a case, sufficient antistatic properties cannot be obtained, and if it exceeds 1000% by mass, the haze becomes too high.
  • the antistatic layer and the following surface layer may be used in combination with additives such as a matting agent, a surface active agent, and a slipping agent, if necessary.
  • Matting agents include particles of oxides such as silicon oxide, aluminum oxide and magnesium oxide having a particle size of 0.001 to 10 m, and particles of polymers or copolymers such as polymethylmethalate and polystyrene. Can give.
  • Cationic surfactants amphoteric surfactants, nonionic surfactants and the like can be mentioned.
  • slip agents include natural waxes such as carnauba wax, phosphate esters of higher alcohols having 8 to 22 carbon atoms or amino salts thereof, palmitic acid, stearic acid, behenic acid and esters thereof, and silicone compounds. Can be mentioned.
  • a surface layer may be provided on the antistatic layer.
  • the surface layer is provided mainly for providing adhesion with the adhesive layer and assisting the anti-detachment function of the conductive metal oxide particles of the antistatic layer.
  • various materials such as acrylic resin, beer resin, polyurethane resin, and polyester resin can be used as the material for the surface layer, and the polymers described as the binder in the antistatic layer can be used. Is preferred.
  • the cross-linking agent used for the surface layer is preferably an epoxy compound without affecting the photosensitive properties of the photosensitive material layer to be contacted when the roll is removed in the manufacturing process.
  • Examples of the epoxy compound include 1,4 bis (2 ', 3'-epoxypropyloxy) butane, 1,3,5 triglycidyl isocyanurate, 1,3 diglycidinole-5- ( ⁇ -acetoxy-1- ⁇ -oxypropyl) isosinurate, Sorbitol polyglycidyl ethers, polyglyceryl polyglycidyl ethers, pentaerythritol polyglycidyl ethers, diglycerone polyrenoglycenosidinoatenore, 1, 3, 5 triglycidyl (2 hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerol polyglycerol Epoxy compounds such as ethers and trimethic lip-and-loop polyglycidyl ethers are preferred as specific products such as Denacol ⁇ -521 and EX- 614B (manufactured by Nagase Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
  • Ethyleneimine compounds methanesulfonic acid ester compounds such as 1,2-di (methanesulfonoxy) ethane, 1,4-di (methanesulfonoxy) butane and 1,5 di (methanesulfonoxy) pentane Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and 1 dicyclohexyl 3- (3 trimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride 2, 5 Isoxazole compounds such as dimethylisoxazole; Inorganic compounds such as chromium alum and chromium acetate; N-carboethoxy-2-isopropoxy 1,2 dihydroquinoline and N- ( 1 Morpholinocarboxy) Dehydrated condensation type peptide reagents such as 4 methyl pyridinium chloride; active ester compounds such as N, N, -adiboyldioxydisuccinimide and N, N, -terephthaloyl
  • the polymer, epoxy compound, and appropriate additives are added to a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary) and mixed (necessary). Disperse accordingly) to prepare a surface layer coating solution.
  • a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary) and mixed (necessary). Disperse accordingly) to prepare a surface layer coating solution.
  • the surface layer is formed by a coating method generally well known on the antistatic layer in the present invention, such as dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, etast. It can be formed by applying the above surface layer coating solution by a rouge coating method or the like.
  • the layer thickness of the surface layer is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 / ⁇ ⁇ , and more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 0.2 m. If it is less than 0.01 m, the antistatic layer has insufficient anti-detachment function for the conductive metal oxide particles, and if it exceeds 1 ⁇ m, it is difficult to apply the coating agent uniformly, so it is applied to the product. Unevenness is likely to occur.
  • the adhesive layer preferably used in the present invention will be described.
  • the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is bonded via an adhesive layer when incorporated in an optical filter, a liquid crystal display panel, a plasma display panel, other image display panels, or the like.
  • the refractive index of the adhesive used in the present invention is preferably 1.40-1.70. This is related to the refractive index of the adhesive, such as a plastic film used in the present invention, to reduce the difference and prevent the visible light transmittance from being lowered. 40-1.70 is good with little decrease in visible light transmittance.
  • the adhesive used in the present invention is an adhesive that flows by heating or pressurization.
  • the adhesive exhibits fluidity when heated to 200 ° C. or lower or pressurized to 1 kgfZcm 2 (0.098 MPa) or higher. Since it can flow, a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film (electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film) provided with an adhesive layer can be bonded to an adherend by lamination or pressure molding, particularly pressure molding. Further, it can be easily bonded to an adherend having a curved surface or a complicated shape.
  • the softening temperature of the adhesive is preferably 200 ° C or lower.
  • the softening temperature of the adhesive layer is preferably 80 ° C or higher because the environment used is usually less than 80 ° C. preferable.
  • the softening temperature is the temperature at which the viscosity is 10 12 boise or less. Usually, at that temperature, flow is observed within a time of 1 to LO seconds.
  • Typical examples of the adhesive that flows by heating or pressurization as described above are mainly the following thermoplastic resins.
  • epoxy acrylate ( ⁇ 1.
  • urethane acrylate, epoxy acrylate, and polyether acrylate are excellent in terms of adhesiveness.
  • epoxy acrylate include 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and aryl.
  • a polymer having a hydroxyl group in the molecule, such as epoxy acrylate, is effective in improving adhesion.
  • the softening temperature of the polymer used as the adhesive is preferably 200 ° C. or less, and more preferably 150 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of handleability. Since the environment in which the electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film is used is usually 80 ° C or lower, the softening temperature of the adhesive layer is most preferably 80 to 120 ° C in view of processability. On the other hand, it is preferable to use a polymer having a mass average molecular weight (measured using a standard polystyrene calibration curve by gel permeation chromatography, the same shall apply hereinafter) of 500 or more.
  • the adhesive used in the present invention may contain additives such as diluents, plasticizers, antioxidants, fillers, colorants, ultraviolet absorbers and tackifiers, as necessary.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is particularly preferably 10 to 80 m, more preferably 20 to 50 m, more than the thickness of the conductive layer.
  • the difference in the bending rate between the support and the easy-adhesion layer is 0.14 or less.
  • the difference in the bending rate between the support and the easy-adhesion layer is 0.14 or less.
  • Type epoxy resin novolak type epoxy resin, resorcinol type epoxy resin, polyalcohol 'polydaryl alcohol type epoxy resin, polyolefin type epoxy resin, epoxy resin such as cycloaliphatic Nyanogen bisphenol (all with refractive index 1.55-1.60) can be used.
  • polybutene 1.5125
  • acrylic resin is well known as one that hardly changes color over time, and is preferably used in the present invention.
  • acrylic polymers Two or more kinds of these acrylic polymers may be copolymerized as necessary, or two or more kinds may be blended and used. By blending several types of acrylic polymers with different molecular weights, it is possible to adjust the viscoelasticity of the adhesive to the desired properties.
  • epoxy acrylate, urethane acrylate, polyether acrylate, polyester acrylate and the like can also be used.
  • Epoxy acrylate and polyether acrylate are particularly excellent in terms of adhesiveness. Examples of epoxy acrylate include 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and aryl alcohol diglycidyl.
  • Ether resorcinol diglycidyl ether, diglycidyl ester adipate, diglycidyl phthalate, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, sorbitol tetraglycidyl ether Etc.
  • Epoxy acrylate is effective in improving adhesiveness because it has a hydroxyl group in the molecule, and these copolymerized resins can be used in combination of two or more as required.
  • the polymer that is the main component of the adhesive has a mass average molecular weight of 1,000 or more. When the molecular weight is 1,000 or less, the cohesive force of the composition is too low, and the adhesion to the adherend is reduced.
  • Adhesive curing agents include amines such as triethylenetetramine, xylenediamine, diaminodimethane, phthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride, anhydrous dodecylsuccinic acid, anhydrous pyromellitic acid, and anhydrous benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid.
  • Acid anhydrides such as acids, diaminodiphenyl sulfone, tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, polyamide resin, dicyandiamide, ethylmethylimidazole and the like can be used. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the addition amount of these crosslinking agents is selected in the range of 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer. If the amount of addition is less than 0.1 parts by mass, curing may be insufficient, and if it exceeds 50 parts by mass, excessive crosslinking may occur, which may adversely affect adhesion.
  • Glue of adhesive used in the present invention You may mix
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film having electromagnetic shielding properties and transparency obtained above can be directly attached to a display such as CRT, PDP, liquid crystal, EL, etc., or a plate or sheet such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate. Paste to and use for display. Further, this electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film is used in the same manner as described above for a window or a case for looking inside a measuring apparatus, measuring apparatus or manufacturing apparatus that generates electromagnetic waves. In addition, it will be installed in the windows of buildings and automobile windows where there is a risk of electromagnetic interference from radio towers and high voltage lines.
  • the metal silver part is preferably provided with a ground wire.
  • the adhesion between the support and the glass plate and the adhesive layer is preferably at least lOgZcm (lONZm) at 80 ° C according to the test method in conformity with IS08225! /. More preferably, it is more preferably 20 g / cm (20 N / m) or more, and particularly preferably 30 g / cm (30 N / m) or more.
  • adhesives that exceed 2000 gZcm (2 kNZm) can be bonded together. It may not be preferable due to difficulty. However, it can be used without problems if no significant problems occur.
  • the adhesive is preferably transparent. Specifically, the total light transmittance is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and most preferably 85 to 92%. Furthermore, it is preferable that the temperature is low. Specifically, 0 to 3% is preferable, and 0 to 1.5% is more preferable.
  • the adhesive used in the present invention is preferably colorless so as not to change the original display color of the display. However, even if the resin itself is colored, it can be regarded as virtually colorless if the adhesive is thin. Similarly, this is not the case when intentionally coloring as described later.
  • Examples of the adhesive having the above properties include acrylic resin, a 1-year-old refin resin, vinyl acetate resin, acrylic copolymer resin, urethane resin, epoxy resin, Examples thereof include a vinyl chloride-based resin, a vinyl chloride-based resin, an ethylene butyl acetate-based resin, a polyamide-based resin, and a polyester-based resin. Of these, acrylic resin is preferred. Even in the case of using the same rosin, it is possible to reduce the amount of the adhesive by synthesizing the adhesive by a method such as lowering the amount of the crosslinking agent, adding a tackifier, or changing the end group of the molecule. It is also possible to improve the performance.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably about 5 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness is preferably reduced within the above range. Specifically, it is about 1-20 / ⁇ ⁇ . However, if the display color of the display itself is not changed as described above and the transparency is within the above range, the thickness may exceed the above range.
  • the adhesion strength between the translucent electromagnetic shielding film of the present invention and the glass substrate is as follows: It is preferable that
  • the peel strength is preferably 20 N / m or more. Furthermore, it is preferable that the peel strength after a lapse of 72 hours at a temperature of 60 ° C. and a relative humidity of 90% is a peel strength of 20 N / m or more.
  • the translucent electromagnetic shielding film of the present invention preferably exposes a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer containing a photosensitive silver halide salt on a support, By performing development processing, it is obtained by forming a metallic silver portion and a light transmitting portion in the exposed portion and the unexposed portion, respectively. Further, if necessary, the metallic silver portion may be supported with a conductive metal by subjecting the metallic silver portion to physical development and Z or tacking treatment.
  • a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer containing a photosensitive silver halide salt is exposed on a support and subjected to a development process. However, a photopolymer for photolithography is applied.
  • a shield film can also be produced for the processed photosensitive material.
  • the method for forming a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention includes the following three forms depending on the photosensitive material and the form of development processing.
  • a photosensitive silver halide silver-white photosensitive material that does not contain physical development nuclei and an image-receiving sheet that has a non-photosensitive layer that contains physical development nuclei are overlaid and diffused and transferred to develop a non-photosensitive image of the metallic silver.
  • the mode (I) is an integrated black-and-white development type, in which metallic silver is formed on the photosensitive material.
  • the resulting developed silver is chemically developed silver or heat developed silver, and is highly active in the subsequent staking or physical development process in that it is a filament with a high specific surface.
  • the silver halide grains close to the physical development nucleus are dissolved and deposited on the development nucleus, whereby metallic silver is formed on the photosensitive material.
  • This too Type black and white development type Since the developing action is precipitation on physical development nuclei, it is highly active, but developed silver has a small specific surface and is spherical.
  • the silver halide silver particles are dissolved and diffused in the unexposed area, and are deposited on the development nuclei on the image receiving sheet to form metallic silver on the image receiving sheet.
  • This is a so-called separate type, in which the image-receiving sheet is used with the photosensitive material force peeled off.
  • the mode of deviation can also be selected as negative development between negative development processing and reversal development processing (in the case of the diffusion transfer method, negative development processing can be performed by using an auto positive photosensitive material as the photosensitive material. Possible).
  • a plastic film, a plastic plate, a glass plate, or the like can be used as the support of the photosensitive material used in the production method of the present invention.
  • polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate; polyolefins such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polystyrene and EVA; Bulu resin such as vinyl and poly vinylidene; other polyether ether ketone (PEEK), polysulfone (PSF), polyether sulfone (PES), polycarbonate (PC), polyamide, polyimide, acrylic resin Fats, triacetyl cellulose (TAC), etc. can be used.
  • the plastic film is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film or triacetyl cellulose (TAC) from the viewpoints of transparency, heat resistance, ease of handling and cost!
  • the electromagnetic shielding material for a display requires transparency, it is desirable that the support has high transparency.
  • the total visible light transmittance of the plastic film or plastic plate is preferably 70 to 100%, more preferably 85 to 100%, and particularly preferably 90 to 100%.
  • the plastic film and the plastic plate that are colored to the extent that they do not interfere with the object of the present invention can also be used.
  • the plastic film and plastic plate in the present invention can be used as a single layer, but can also be used as a multilayer film in which two or more layers are combined.
  • the type thereof is not particularly limited.
  • tempered glass having a tempered layer on the surface.
  • tempered glass can prevent breakage compared to glass that has not been tempered.
  • the tempered glass obtained by the air cooling method is preferable from the viewpoint of safety because the broken piece is small and the end face is not sharp even if it is broken.
  • the photosensitive material used may be provided with a protective layer on the emulsion layer described later.
  • the “protective layer” means a layer having a binder force such as gelatin or a polymer material, and is formed on an emulsion layer having photosensitivity in order to exhibit an effect of preventing scratches and improving mechanical properties. It is preferable that the protective layer is not provided in the case of performing the sticking treatment.
  • the thickness is preferably 0.2 m or less.
  • the formation method of the said protective layer is not specifically limited, A well-known coating method can be selected suitably.
  • the light-sensitive material used in the production method of the present invention preferably has an emulsion layer (silver salt-containing layer) containing a silver salt as an optical sensor on a support.
  • the emulsion layer in the present invention may contain a dye, a binder, a solvent and the like as required in addition to the silver salt.
  • the light-sensitive material may contain a dye at least in the emulsion layer.
  • the dye is contained in the emulsion layer as a filter dye or for various purposes such as prevention of irradiation.
  • the dye may contain a solid disperse dye.
  • Examples of the dye preferably used in the present invention include dyes represented by general formula (FA), general formula (FA1), general formula (FA2), and general formula (FA3) described in JP-A-9-179243.
  • compounds F1 to F34 described in the publication are preferable.
  • (IV-2) to (IV-7) described in the publication are also preferably used.
  • Other dyes that can be used in the present invention include cyanine dyes and pyrylium dyes described in JP-A-3-138640 as dyes in the form of solid fine particles that are decolored during development or fixing. And Aminium dyes.
  • cyanine dyes having a carboxyl group described in JP-A-9-96891, cyanine dyes not containing an acid group described in JP-A-8-245902, and JP-A-8-333519 Lake type cyanine dyes cyanine dyes described in JP-A-1-266536, horopora-type cyanine dyes described in JP-A-3-136038, pyrylium dyes described in JP-A-62-299959, JP-A-7-253639 Polymer-type cyanine dyes described in JP-A No.
  • the dye may contain a water-soluble dye.
  • water-soluble dyes include oxonol dyes, benzylidene dyes, merocyanine dyes, cyanine dyes and azo dyes. Of these, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes and benzylidene dyes are useful in the present invention.
  • Specific examples of water-soluble dyes that can be used in the present invention include British Patent Nos. 584, 609, 1, 177, 429, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 48-85130, 49-99620, 49-114420, 52-20822, 59-154439, 59-208548, US Patent 2, 27 No. 4, 782, No.
  • the content of the dye in the emulsion layer is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content, from the viewpoint of preventing irradiation and the like and from the viewpoint of sensitivity reduction due to an increase in the amount of added calories. 1-5 mass% is further more preferable.
  • Examples of the silver salt used in the present invention include inorganic silver salts such as halogenated silver.
  • inorganic silver salts such as halogenated silver.
  • Halogenated silver preferably used in the present invention will be described.
  • halogenated silver for functioning as an optical sensor. It is used in silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate making film, emulsion mask for photomask, etc. relating to halogenated silver.
  • the technique can also be used in the present invention.
  • the halogen element contained in the silver halide may be chlorine, bromine, iodine, or fluorine, or a combination thereof.
  • halogen silver containing mainly AgCl, AgBr and Agl is preferably used, and halogen silver containing mainly AgBr and AgCl is preferably used.
  • Silver chlorobromide, silver iodochlorobromide and silver iodobromide are also preferably used.
  • Silver chlorobromide, silver bromide, silver iodochlorobromide and silver iodobromide are more preferable, and silver chlorobromide and iodochlorobromide containing 50 mol% or more of silver chloride are most preferable.
  • Silver is used.
  • halogenated silver mainly composed of AgBr means silver halide in which the molar fraction of bromide ions in the silver halide composition is 50% or more.
  • the silver halide silver grains mainly composed of AgBr may contain iodide ions and chloride ions in addition to bromide ions.
  • Silver halide is in the form of a solid grain, and from the viewpoint of image quality of the patterned metal silver layer formed after exposure and development, the average grain size of silver halide silver is 0 in terms of a sphere equivalent diameter. It is preferably 1 to 1000 ⁇ (1 / ⁇ ), more preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, and even more preferably 1 to 50 nm.
  • the spherical equivalent diameter of a halogenated silver particle is a diameter of a particle having a spherical shape and the same volume.
  • the shape of the silver halide grains is not particularly limited.
  • various shapes such as a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a flat plate shape (hexagonal flat plate shape, triangular flat plate shape, quadrangular flat plate shape, etc.), octahedral shape, tetrahedral shape, etc.
  • the cubic shape and the tetrahedron shape are preferable.
  • the silver halide grains can have a uniform internal and surface layer, or they can be different. Moreover, you may have the localized layer from which a halogen composition differs in a particle
  • Halogen silver emulsion used as an emulsion layer coating solution for use in the present invention is P. Glalkides, Chimie et Physique Photographique (Paul Montel, 1967), GF Dufin, Pho tographic Emulsion Chemistry (The Forcal Press , 1966), VLZelikman MATSUKI, Managing and Coating Photographic Emulsion (published by The ForcalPress, 1964) and the like.
  • the silver halide emulsion may be prepared by any of an acidic method and a neutral method, and a method of reacting a soluble silver salt with a soluble halogen salt may be a one-side mixing method. Any of a simultaneous mixing method, a combination thereof, and the like may be used.
  • a method for forming silver particles a method of forming particles in the presence of excess silver ions (so-called back mixing method) can also be used.
  • a method of keeping pAg constant in a liquid phase in which halogenated silver is formed that is, a so-called controlled double jet method can be used.
  • halogenated silver solvent such as ammonia, thioether or tetrasubstituted thiourea. More preferred as such a method is a tetra-substituted thiourea compound, which is described in JP-A Nos. 53-82408 and 55-77737.
  • Preferred thiourea compounds include tetramethylthiourea and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinethione.
  • the silver halide emulsion used for the formation of the emulsion layer in the present invention is preferably a monodisperse emulsion ⁇ (standard deviation of grain size) Z (average grain size) ⁇
  • the coefficient of variation represented by X100 is 20% or less, More preferably, it is 15% or less, and most preferably 10% or less.
  • the silver halide silver emulsion used in the present invention may be a mixture of a plurality of types of silver halide emulsions having different grain sizes.
  • the halogen silver halide emulsion used in the present invention may contain a metal element belonging to Group VIII or VIIB of the periodic table.
  • a metal element belonging to Group VIII or VIIB of the periodic table in particular, in order to achieve high contrast and low capri, it is preferable to contain rhodium compounds, iridium compounds, ruthenium compounds, iron compounds, osmium compounds and the like.
  • These compounds are compounds having various ligands, and examples of such ligands include pseudohalogen ligands such as cyanide ions, cyanogen ions, thiocyanate ions, nitrosyl ions, water, hydroxide ions, Besides ammonia
  • organic molecules such as amines (methylamine, ethylenediamine, etc.), heterocyclic compounds (imidazole, thiazol, 5-methylthiazole, mercaptoimidazole, etc.), urea, and thiourea.
  • a water-soluble rhodium compound can be used as the rhodium compound.
  • the water-soluble rhodium compounds include rhodium (III) halide compounds, hexachlororhodium (III) complex salts, pentachloroacorodium complex salts, tetrachlorodiacolodium complex salts, hexadium salts.
  • examples include bromorhodium (in) complex salts, hexaminerhodium (III) complex salts, trizalatrdium (III) complex salts, and K Rh Br.
  • rhodium compounds are used by dissolving in water or a suitable solvent, but are generally used in order to stabilize the solution of the rhodium compound, that is, an aqueous hydrogen halide solution (for example, hydrochloric acid, odorous acid, Hydrofluoric acid, etc.) or halogenated alkali (eg ⁇
  • iridium compound examples include hexadium mouth iridium complex salts such as K IrCl and K IrCl,
  • Hexabromoiridium complex salts Hexabromoiridium complex salts, hexammine iridium complex salts, pentachloro-trosyl iridium complex salts and the like.
  • ruthenium compound examples include hexaclonal ruthenium, pentachloro-trosyl ruthenium, K [Ru (CN)] and the like.
  • iron compound examples include potassium hexanoate ( ⁇ ) and ferrous thiocyanate.
  • ruthenium compounds and osmium compounds are in the form of water-soluble complex salts described in JP-A 63-2042, JP-A 1-285941, JP-A 2-20852, JP-A 2-20855, and the like.
  • Particularly preferred is a hexacoordination complex represented by the following formula.
  • M represents Ru or Os, and n represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
  • the counter ion has no significance, and for example, ammonium or alkali metal ions are used.
  • Preferable ligands include a halide ligand, a cyanide ligand, a cyan oxide ligand, a nitrosyl ligand, a thionitrosyl ligand, and the like. Examples of specific complexes used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • silver halides containing Pd (II) ions and Z or Pd elements can also be preferably used.
  • Pd may be uniformly distributed in the halogen silver halide grains, but is preferably contained in the vicinity of the surface layer of the halogen silver halide grains.
  • Pd is “contained in the vicinity of the surface layer of the silver halide grain” when the surface force of the halogenated silver grain is within 50 nm in the depth direction, and the palladium content is higher than that of the other layers. Means to have a layer.
  • Such halogen silver particles can be prepared by adding Pd during the formation of the halogen silver particles, and after adding silver ions and halogen ions in an amount of 50% or more of the total addition amount, Pd is preferably added. It is also preferable to add Pd (II) ions to the surface of the silver halide silver layer by a method such as addition at the time of post-ripening.
  • Pd-containing halogenated silver particles increase the speed of physical development and electroless plating, increase the production efficiency of the desired electromagnetic shielding material, and contribute to the reduction of production costs.
  • Pd is a well-known force used as an electroless plating catalyst
  • Pd can be unevenly distributed on the surface layer of silver halide grains, so that it is possible to save extremely expensive Pd. .
  • Te content of Pd ions and Z or Pd metal element contained in Harogeni ⁇ is 10- 4-0 of silver halide, with respect to the number of moles of silver. 5 mol / More preferably, it is mol Ag, more preferably 0.01 to 0.3 mol Z mol Ag.
  • Examples of the Pd compound used include PdCl and Na PdCl.
  • chemical sensitization performed with a photographic emulsion can be performed in order to further improve the sensitivity as an optical sensor.
  • chemical sensitization methods sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization, chalcogen sensitization such as tellurium sensitization, noble metal sensitization such as gold sensitization, reduction sensitization and the like can be used. These are used alone or in combination.
  • sulfur sensitization method and gold sensitization method sulfur sensitization method and selenium sensitization method and gold sensitization method
  • sulfur sensitization method and tellurium sensitization method sulfur sensitization method and tellurium sensitization method.
  • a combination of a sensitizing method and a gold sensitizing method is preferable.
  • the sulfur sensitization is usually performed by adding a sulfur sensitizer and stirring the emulsion at a high temperature of 40 ° C or higher for a predetermined time.
  • a sulfur sensitizer known compounds can be used.
  • various sulfur compounds such as thiosulfate, thioureas, and thiazoles can be used. , Rhodons, etc. can be used.
  • Preferred sulfur compounds are thiosulfate and thiourea compounds.
  • the selenium sensitizer used for the selenium sensitization known selenium compounds can be used. That is, the selenium sensitization is usually performed by adding unstable and Z or non-unstable selenium compounds and stirring the emulsion at a high temperature of 40 ° C. or higher for a certain period of time.
  • the unstable selenium compound compounds described in JP-B-44-15748, JP-A-43-13489, JP-A-4-109240, JP-A-4-324855 and the like can be used. .
  • the tellurium sensitizer used in the tellurium sensitizer is a compound that forms silver telluride, which is presumed to be a sensitization nucleus, on the surface or inside of the silver halide silver grains.
  • the formation rate of tellurite silver in the silver halide emulsion can be tested by the method described in JP-A-5-313284. Specifically, U.S. Pat.Nos. 1,623,499, 3,320,069, 3,772,031, British Patent 235,211, No. 1,121,496, No. 1,295,462, No. 1,396,696, Canadian Patent No.
  • JP-A-4 204640 4-271341, 4-333043, and 5-303157, Journal • Chemical Society ⁇ ⁇ Chemical 'Communication (J.Chem.So Chem.Com mun.) Page 635 ( 1980), 1102 (1979), 645 (1979), Journal of Chemical Society, Perkin Transaction (J. Chem. So Perkin. Trans.) 1, 21 91 (1980) ), S. Patai, The Chemistry of Organic Selenium and Telluniu m Compounds), 1 ⁇ (1986), 2 ⁇ (1987) can be used.
  • a compound represented by the general formula (IIKIIIXIV) in JP-A-5-313284 is preferred.
  • the conditions for chemical sensitization in the present invention are not particularly limited, but the pH is 5 to 8, pAg is 6 to 11, preferably 7 to 10, and the temperature is 40 to 95 ° C, preferably 45. ⁇ 85 ° C.
  • Examples of the noble metal sensitizer include gold, platinum, noradium, iridium and the like, and gold sensitization is particularly preferable.
  • Specific examples of gold sensitizers used for gold sensitization include salt and gold acid, potassium chromate orate, potassium thiothiocyanate, gold sulfide, tiodarcos gold (1), tiomannose gold ( I) and the like, can be used per mole 10- 7 ⁇ _ 2 moles silver halide.
  • a cadmium salt, a sulfite salt, a lead salt, a thallium salt, etc. may coexist in the halogen-silver emulsion used in the present invention in the process of halogen-silver particle formation or physical ripening.
  • reduction sensitization can be used.
  • reduction sensitizer stannic salts, amines, formamidinesulfinic acid, silane compounds, and the like can be used.
  • a thiosulfonic acid compound may be added to the above-described halogenated silver emulsion by the method described in European Patent Publication (EP) 293917.
  • the silver halide emulsion used in the production of the light-sensitive material used in the present invention may be only one type, or two or more types (for example, those having different average grain sizes, those having different halogen yarn compositions, crystal habits). Different types, those with different chemical sensitization conditions, and those with different sensitivities) may be used in combination.
  • a binder can be used in the emulsion layer for the purpose of uniformly dispersing silver salt grains and assisting the adhesion between the emulsion layer and the support.
  • the binder both a water-insoluble polymer and a water-soluble polymer can be used as a binder.
  • binder examples include polysaccharides such as gelatin, polybutyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), starch, cellulose and derivatives thereof, polyethylene oxide, polysaccharides, polyvinylamine, chitosan, polylysine, Examples include polyacrylic acid, polyalginic acid, polyhyaluronic acid, carboxycellulose, and the like. These have neutral, anionic, and cationic properties depending on the ionicity of the functional group.
  • the content of the binder contained in the emulsion layer is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately determined within a range in which dispersibility and adhesion can be exhibited.
  • the content of the binder contained in the silver salt-containing layer in the production method of the present invention can be appropriately determined within a range in which dispersibility and adhesion can be exhibited.
  • the content of noinda in the silver salt-containing layer is 1Z2 to 1Z0.1 in terms of AgZ binder volume ratio. More preferably, it is 1 ⁇ 0.5.
  • the solvent used for forming the emulsion layer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include water, organic solvents (for example, alcohols such as methanol, ketones such as acetone, amides such as formamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, and the like. Examples thereof include sulfoxides, esters such as ethyl acetate, ethers, and the like, and mixed solvents thereof.
  • the content of the solvent used in the emulsion layer of the present invention is in the range of 30 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of silver salt and binder contained in the emulsion layer, and 50 to 80% by mass. A range is preferred.
  • the emulsion layer and other hydrophilic colloid layers of the light-sensitive material according to the present invention are preferably hardened with a hardener.
  • inorganic or organic gelatin hardeners can be used alone or in combination.
  • active bur compounds such as 1, 3, 5 triatalyloyl-hexahydro s triazine, bis (bululsulfurylmethyl) ether, ⁇ , N'-methylenebis ([j8- (bululsulfurol) propionamide], etc.) active halogen Compound (2, 4 Dichloro 6 —Hydroxy-trisazine, etc.), mucohalic acids (eg, mucochloric acid), N-strength rubamoylpyridyl-um salt (eg, 1 morpholinocarbolu-pyridyl) methanesulfonate, haloamidi-um salt (1 — (1—Black 1-Pyridinomethylene) pyrrolidinium 2-Naphthalenesulfonate, etc.) can be used alone or in combination.
  • the swelling ratio of the emulsion layer can be arbitrarily controlled by adjusting the addition amount of the hardener in the emulsion layer.
  • the amount of hardener added to the emulsion layer is preferred and the range depends on the storage temperature and humidity of the photosensitive material after addition of the hardener, the storage period, the film pH of the photosensitive material, and the amount of binder contained in the photosensitive material. It ’s not clear.
  • the hardener since the hardener can diffuse over all layers located on the same side of the light-sensitive material before reacting with the binder, the hardener is preferably added to the same surface of the photosensitive material including the emulsion layer. Depends on the total binder amount on the side.
  • the preferable hardener content of the light-sensitive material of the present invention is in the range of 0.2 to 15% by weight, more preferably, based on the total binder amount on the same side of the light-sensitive material including the emulsion layer. It is in the range of 0.5 mass% to 6 mass%.
  • the hardener can diffuse, so the hardener should be added to the emulsion layer.
  • it can be preferably added to any layer on the same side as the emulsion layer, and it is also preferable to add it divided into multiple layers.
  • an irradiated part is on a pattern or a non-irradiated part is patterned (inverted).
  • Perform exposure The exposure can be performed using electromagnetic waves. Examples of electromagnetic waves include light such as visible light and ultraviolet light, and radiation such as X-rays. Further, a light source having a specific wavelength may be used for exposure, or a light source having a wavelength distribution may be used.
  • the light source various light emitters that emit light in the visible spectrum region are used as necessary.
  • a red light emitter, a green light emitter, and a blue light emitter are used in combination.
  • the spectral region is not limited to the above red, green, and blue, and a phosphor that emits light in the yellow, orange, purple, or infrared region is also used.
  • a cathode ray tube that emits white light by mixing these light emitters is often used.
  • mercury lamp g-line, mercury lamp i-line, etc. which are also preferred for ultraviolet lamps, are used.
  • the exposure in the present invention is a second harmonic light source (SHG) that combines a solid-state laser using a gas laser, a light emitting diode, a semiconductor laser, a semiconductor laser, or a semiconductor laser as an excitation light source and a nonlinear optical crystal.
  • SHG second harmonic light source
  • a scanning exposure method using monochromatic high-density light such as) can be preferably used, and a KrF excimer laser, an ArF excimer laser, an F2 laser, or the like can also be used.
  • exposure is more preferably performed using a semiconductor laser, a semiconductor laser, or a second harmonic generation light source (SHG) that combines a solid-state laser and a nonlinear optical crystal.
  • SHG second harmonic generation light source
  • exposure is most preferably performed using a semiconductor laser.
  • the exposure energy is preferably lmj / cm 2 or less, preferably 100 j / cm 2 or less, more preferably 50 j / cm 2 or less. Further preferred.
  • laser light sources include blue semiconductor lasers with a wavelength of 430 to 460 nm (announced by Nichia Chemical at the 48th Applied Physics-related Conference in March 2001), semiconductor lasers (oscillation) LiNbO SH with a waveguide inversion domain structure
  • Approx. 530nm green laser, wavelength 685nm red semiconductor laser (Hitachi type No. HL6738MG), wavelength 650nm red semiconductor laser (Hitachi type No. HL6501MG), etc., are preferably used. It is done.
  • the method of exposing the silver salt-containing layer in a pattern is preferably scanning exposure using a laser beam.
  • the capstan type laser scanning exposure apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-39677 is preferred.
  • DMD described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-1244 is used instead of beam scanning by rotating a polygon mirror. It is also preferable to use it for a light beam scanning system.
  • the development processing can be performed by a normal development processing technique used for silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate-making film, photomask emulsion mask and the like.
  • the developer is not particularly limited, but PQ developer, MQ developer, MAA developer, etc. can also be used, and commercially available products such as CN-16, CR-56, CP45X Each developer such as FD-3, Papitor, KODAK prescription C-41, E-6, RA-4, D-19, D-72, or the developer included in those kits should be used. it can. You can also use lith developer.
  • a metallic silver portion preferably a butter-shaped metallic silver portion is formed in the exposed portion, and a light transmissive portion described later is formed in the unexposed portion.
  • a dihydroxybenzene developing agent can be used as the developer.
  • Dihydroxybenzene developing agents include hydroquinone, black mouth hydroquinone, isopropyl hydroquinone, methyl hydroquinone, hide mouth quinone monos Forces such as sulfonates Particularly preferred is hydroquinone.
  • auxiliary developing agents that exhibit superadditivity with the above-mentioned dihydroxybenzene-based developing agents include 1-phenol, 1-virazolidone, and paminophenols.
  • a combination of a dihydroxybenzene developing agent and 1-phenolino bisazolidone; or a combination of a dihydroxybenzene developing agent and p-aminophenols is preferably used.
  • 1-phenol 3- virazolidone As the developing agent used in combination with 1-phenol 3- virazolidone or its derivatives used as an auxiliary developing agent, specifically, 1-phenol 3- virazolidone, 1-phenyl 1, 4, 4 Examples include dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1-3-azolidone.
  • P-aminophenol auxiliary developing agents examples include N-methyl p-aminophenol, ⁇ -aminophenol, N— (j8-hydroxyethyl) p-aminophenol, and N— (4-hydroxyphenol) glycine. Of these, N-methyl-paminophenol is preferred.
  • the dihydroxybenzene-based developing agent is usually preferably used in an amount of 0.05 to 0.8 mol / liter, but in the present invention, it is particularly preferably used in an amount of 0.23 mol Z liter or more. More preferably, it is in the range of 0.23 to 0.6 mol Z liter.
  • the former is 0.23 to 0.6 mol / liter, more preferably 0.23 to 0.5 mol Z. Liters, the latter is less than 0.06 mol Z liters, more preferred ⁇ 0.03 Monore / Lit Nore ⁇ 0.03 Monore / Lit Nore for use in amounts!
  • the pH increase is 0.5 or less when 1 mol of sodium hydroxide is added.
  • the method of imparting the above properties to the development initiator and the development replenisher is preferably a method using a buffer.
  • the buffer include carbonates, boric acid described in JP-A-62-186259, saccharides (for example, saccharose), oximes (for example, acetooxime), phenols described in JP-A-60-93433.
  • 5-sulfosalicylic acid), triphosphate (for example, sodium salt, potassium salt) and the like can be used, and carbonate and boric acid are preferably used.
  • the amount of the above-mentioned buffering agent (particularly carbonate) is preferably 0.25 monolet / litnore or more, 0.25 ⁇ : L5 monole / litnore power is particularly preferred! / ⁇ .
  • the pH of the development initiator is 9.0 to 11.0, particularly preferably 9.5 to 10.7.
  • the pH of the developer replenisher and the developer in the developer tank during continuous processing are also in this range.
  • the alkali agent used for setting the pH usual water-soluble inorganic alkali metal salts (for example, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate) can be used.
  • the content of the developer replenisher in the developer is 323 ml or less, preferably 323 to 30 ml, particularly 225 to 50 ml.
  • the development replenisher may have the same composition as the development starter, and the components consumed in development may have a higher concentration than the starter.
  • additives usually used for the developer used for developing the light-sensitive material in the present invention (hereinafter, both the development initiator and the development replenisher may be simply referred to as "developer") (For example, a preservative and a chelating agent) can be contained.
  • the preservative include sulfites such as sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, lithium sulfite, ammonium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium metabisulfite, and sodium formaldehyde bisulfite.
  • the sulfite is preferably used in an amount of 0.20 mol Z liters or more, more preferably 0.3 mol Z liters or more.
  • the upper limit is 1. 2 mol Z liter is desirable. Particularly preferred is 0.35 to 0.7 mole Z liter.
  • a small amount of ascorbic acid derivative may be used in combination with sulfite as a preservative for the dihydroxy base BR developer.
  • the ascorbic acid derivative includes ascorbic acid and its stereoisomer erythorbic acid and its alkali metal salts (sodium and potassium salts).
  • sodium erythorbate is preferred in terms of material cost.
  • the amount of the ascorbic acid derivative added is preferably in the range of 0.03-0.12 in terms of mono-ktt, particularly preferably in the range of 0.05-5.10 with respect to the dihydroxybenzene developing agent.
  • the developer does not contain a boron compound.
  • additives that can be used in the developer include development inhibitors such as sodium bromide and potassium bromide; organic solvents such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, and dimethylformamide. ; Development accelerators such as alkanolamines such as diethanolamine and triethanolamine, imidazole or derivatives thereof, and mercapto compounds, indazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, and benzoimidazole compounds as capri-protecting agents Alternatively, it may be included as a black pepper inhibitor.
  • development inhibitors such as sodium bromide and potassium bromide
  • organic solvents such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, and dimethylformamide.
  • Development accelerators such as alkanolamines such as diethanolamine and triethanolamine, imidazole or derivatives thereof, and mercapto compounds, indazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, and benzoimidazole compounds as capri-protecting agents
  • benzoimidazole compound examples include 5--troindazole, 5-p-trobenzoylaminoindazole, 1-methyl-5-troindazole, 6-toluindazole, 3-methyl-5--.
  • the content of these benzoimidazole compounds is usually from 0.01 to LOmmol, more preferably from 0.1 to 2mmol per liter of developer.
  • organic / inorganic chelating agents can be used in combination in the developer.
  • Examples of the inorganic chelating agent that can be used include sodium tetrapolyphosphate and sodium hexametaphosphate.
  • organic chelating agent organic carboxylic acid, aminopolycarboxylic acid, organic phosphonic acid, aminophosphonic acid and organic phosphonocarboxylic acid can be mainly used.
  • organic carboxylic acids examples include acrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, dartaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, succinic acid, ashellaic acid, sebacic acid, nonanedicarboxylic acid, decandi power norlevonic acid, undecandi power norlevonic acid. , Maleic acid, itaconic acid, malic acid , Citrate, tartaric acid, and the like, but are not limited thereto.
  • aminopolycarboxylic acids examples include iminoacetic acid, ditrimethyl triacetic acid, ditrimethyl tripropionic acid, ethylenediamine monohydroxyethyl triacetic acid, ethylenediammine tetraacetic acid, glycol ether tetraacetic acid, 1, 2-Diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, triethylenetetraminehexaacetic acid, 1,3-diamino-2-propanoltetraacetic acid, glycol etherdiaminetetraacetic acid, and other JP-A-52-25632, 55-67747, 57-
  • JP-A-52-25632 Japanese Patent No. 102624 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 53-40900
  • organic phosphonic acid examples include hydroxyalkylidene-diphosphonic acid and research disclosure (Research Disclosure No. 1) described in US Patent Nos. 3214454 and 3794591 and West German Patent Publication 2227639. 181, Item 18170 ( May 1979), and the like.
  • aminophosphonic acid examples include aminotris (methylenephosphonic acid), ethylenediaminetetramethylenephosphonic acid, aminotrimethylenephosphonic acid and the like.
  • aminotris methylenephosphonic acid
  • ethylenediaminetetramethylenephosphonic acid examples include aminotrimethylenephosphonic acid and the like.
  • organic phosphonocanolevonic acids examples include JP-A 52-102726, 53-42730, 54-121127, 55-4024, 55-4025, 55-126241. Nos. 55-65 955, 55-65956, and the above-mentioned Research Disclosure 1 8170. These chelating agents may be used in the form of alkali metal salts or ammonium salts.
  • JP-A-56-24347, JP-B-56-46585, JP-B-62-2849 and JP-A-4-362942 as silver stain preventing agents in the developer. Can be used. Further, compounds described in JP-A-61-267759 can be used as dissolution aids. Furthermore, in the developing solution, if necessary, a color toner, a surfactant, an antifoaming agent, A hardener or the like may be included.
  • the development processing temperature and time are interrelated, and the force determined in relation to the total processing time. Generally, the development temperature is preferably about 20 ° C to about 50 ° C, more preferably 25 to 45 ° C.
  • the development time is preferably 5 seconds to 2 minutes, more preferably 7 seconds to 1 minute 30 seconds.
  • the development processing in the present invention can include a fixing processing performed for the purpose of removing and stabilizing the silver salt in the unexposed portion.
  • a fixing process technique used for silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate-making film, photomask emulsion mask and the like can be used.
  • Preferable components of the fixing solution used in the fixing step include the following.
  • the fixing agent for the fixing solution used in the present invention examples include sodium thiosulfate and ammonium thiosulfate, and ammonium thiosulfate is preferred from the viewpoint of fixing speed.
  • Viewpoint power Sodium thiosulfate may be used.
  • the amount of these known fixing agents used can be appropriately changed, and is generally about 0.1 to about 2 mol Z liter. Particularly preferred is 0.2 to 1.5 mol Z liter.
  • the fixer may contain a hardening agent (eg, a water-soluble aluminum compound), a preservative (eg, sulfite, bisulfite), a pH buffer (eg, acetic acid), a pH adjuster (eg, ammonia, sulfuric acid). ), Chelating agents, surfactants, wetting agents, fixing accelerators.
  • surfactant examples include anionic surfactants such as sulfates and sulfones, polyethylene surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants described in JP-A-57-6740. It is done. A known antifoaming agent may be added to the fixing solution.
  • Examples of the wetting agent include alkanolamine and alkylene glycol. I can get lost.
  • Examples of the fixing accelerator include thiourea derivatives described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 45-35754, 58-122535, and 58-122536; alcohols having triple bonds in the molecule; Examples include thioether compounds described in US Pat. No. 4126459; mesoionic compounds described in JP-A-4-229860, and compounds described in JP-A-2-44355 may be used.
  • Examples of the pH buffer include organic acids such as acetic acid, malic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, citrate, oxalic acid, maleic acid, glycolic acid and adipic acid, boric acid, phosphate and sulfite.
  • Inorganic buffers such as can be used.
  • the pH buffer acetic acid, tartaric acid, and sulfite are preferably used.
  • the pH buffer is used for the purpose of preventing the pH of the fixing agent from rising due to the introduction of the developer, and is preferably 0.01 to: L 0 mol Z liter, more preferably 0.02 to 0.6. Use about mol Z liters.
  • the pH of the fixing solution is preferably 4.0 to 6.5, and particularly preferably 4.5 to 6.0. Further, it is possible to use a compound described in JP-A-64-4739 as the dye elution accelerator.
  • Examples of the hardener in the fixing solution of the present invention include water-soluble aluminum salts and chromium salts.
  • a preferable compound as the hardener is a water-soluble aluminum salt, and examples thereof include aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfate, potash and vane.
  • the preferred amount of added calories of the above hardener is 0.01 monole to 0.2 monole / lit nore, more preferably 0.03 to 0.08 mol Z liter.
  • the fixing temperature in the fixing step is preferably about 20 ° C to about 50 ° C, more preferably 25 to 45 ° C.
  • the fixing time is preferably 5 seconds to 1 minute, more preferably 7 seconds to 50 seconds.
  • the replenishing amount of the fixing solution, 600mlZm 2 or less good Mashigu 500MlZm 2 or less and more preferably tool 300MlZm 2 or less is particularly preferred for the process of the photosensitive material.
  • the photosensitive material that has been subjected to development and fixing processing is preferably subjected to water washing treatment or stabilization treatment.
  • the washing water amount is usually 20 liters or less per lm 2 of the light-sensitive material, and can be replenished in 3 liters or less (including 0, ie, rinsing with water). For this reason, not only water-saving treatment can be performed, but also the piping for installing the self-supporting machine can be eliminated.
  • a multi-stage countercurrent system for example, two-stage, three-stage, etc.
  • This multi-stage countercurrent system is used in the present invention.
  • the photosensitive material after fixing is gradually stained in the normal direction, that is, stained with the fixing solution! Good water washing is done.
  • various oxidizer additions and filter filtration may be combined to reduce the pollution load, which is a problem when washing with small amounts of water.
  • JP-A-60-235133 a part or all of them can be used for a processing solution having fixing ability as a previous processing step.
  • water-soluble surfactants and antifoaming agents are added to prevent unevenness of water bubbles, which are likely to occur when washing with a small amount of water, and to prevent the processing agent component adhering to the Z or squeeze roller from being transferred to the processed film. Also good.
  • a dye adsorbent described in JP-A-63-163456 may be installed in the washing tank in order to prevent contamination with dyes eluted from the photosensitive material.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2-201357, JP-A-2-132435, JP-A-1102553, and JP-A No. 46-44446 are disclosed. May be used as the final bath of the light-sensitive material.
  • metal compounds such as ammonia compounds, Bi, A1, fluorescent brighteners, various chelating agents, membrane pH regulators, hardeners, bactericides, fungicides, alkanolamines, A surfactant can also be added.
  • Water used in the water washing or stabilization process is sterilized with tap water, deionized water, halogen, UV germicidal lamps, various oxidizing agents (such as ozone, hydrogen peroxide, and chlorate). It is preferred to use fresh water. Further, washing water containing the compounds described in JP-A-4-39 652 and JP-A-5-241309 may be used.
  • the bath temperature and time in the water washing treatment or stable temperature are preferably 0 to 50 ° C. and 5 seconds to 2 minutes.
  • the electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is preferably obtained in a shape carrying a contact pattern such as a roll shape from the viewpoint of productivity and ease of production of an optical filter, it is advantageous to use a developing machine for rolls. In particular, it is preferable to use a roller conveyance type automatic developing machine.
  • roller-conveying type automatic developing machine is described in US Pat. Nos. 30,257,795, 3,545,971, etc., and is simply referred to as a roller-conveying type automatic developing machine in this specification.
  • the roller transport type automatic processor preferably has four process powers of development, fixing, washing and drying, other processes (for example, stop process) are not excluded, but these four processes are followed. Is most preferred. Further, instead of the washing step, four steps by a stable step may be used.
  • a component obtained by removing water from the composition of the developer or the fixing solution may be supplied in a solid form and dissolved in a predetermined amount of water and used as a developer or a fixing solution.
  • a form of treating agent is called a solid treating agent.
  • powder, tablet, granule, powder, lump or paste is used as the solid processing agent.
  • a preferred form of the above-mentioned treatment agent is the form or tablet described in JP-A-61-259921.
  • the method for producing the tablets is generally described in, for example, the publications of JP-A-51-61837, JP-A-54-155038, JP-A-52-88025, and British Patent No. 1,213,808.
  • the granule treating agent is a general method described in JP-A-2-109042, JP-A-2-109043, JP-A-3-3935 and JP-A-3-39739. Can be manufactured. Further, powder processing agents are generally described in, for example, JP-A-54-133332, British Patents 725,892 and 729,862 and German Patent 3,733,861. Can be manufactured in a conventional manner.
  • the bulk density of the solid processing agent and in view of its solubility, from 0.5 to 6.
  • a material inert to the reactive material.
  • a method may be employed in which reactive substances are placed in layers so as to form a layer separated by at least one intervening separation layer, a bag that can be vacuum packaged is used as a packaging material, and the bag is evacuated and sealed.
  • inert means that the substances do not react under normal conditions in the package when they are in physical contact with each other, or even if there is any reaction.
  • the inert material may be inert in the intended use of the two reactive materials, apart from being inert to the two mutually reactive materials.
  • an inert substance is a substance that is used simultaneously with two reactive substances.
  • hydroquinone and sodium hydroxide in a developer react when they come into direct contact with each other. Therefore, by using sodium sulfite or the like as a separation layer between hydroquinone and sodium hydroxide in vacuum packaging, Can be stored in a knockout.
  • the packaging material for these vacuum packaging materials is an inert plastic film, a bag made from a laminate of plastic material and metal foil.
  • the mass of the metallic silver contained in the exposed area after the development treatment is preferably 80% by mass or more based on the mass of silver contained in the exposed area before the exposure. It is even more preferable that it is at least%. If the mass of silver contained in the exposed part is 50% by mass or more with respect to the mass of V and silver contained in the exposed part before exposure, high conductivity can be obtained.
  • the gradation after development processing in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably more than 4.0.
  • the conductivity of the conductive metal portion can be increased while keeping the transparency of the light transmissive portion high.
  • doping of the above-mentioned rhodium ions and iridium ions into the photosensitive halogen silver halide particles can be mentioned.
  • the developed silver thus obtained is preferably treated with a reducing agent or a silver ion ligand, or heated or calendered. By these treatments, the conductivity of developed silver can be increased. These processes may be performed after the development process and the fixing process after the current image process before the fixing process, or may be performed at both times. [0137] The treatment with a reducing agent or silver ion ligand preferably used in the present invention will be described.
  • a reducing agent or a silver ion ligand it is preferable to perform treatment with a reducing agent or a silver ion ligand.
  • a reducing agent it is sufficient if the silver ion can be reduced to metallic silver, for example, thiourea dioxide, Rongalite, sodium chloride (11), sodium borohydride, sodium triacetoxyborono, idide, Examples thereof include trimethylamine borane, triethylamine borane, pyridine borane, and borane. Among these, particularly preferred is sodium triacetoxyborono, idide, dimethylamine borane or sodium borohydride, which is preferred for alkali.
  • Silver ion ligands include chlorine ions, bromine ions, halogen ions such as iodine ions, pseudohalogen ions such as thiocyanate ions, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds such as pyridine and biviridine, sulfite ions, and 1 , 2, 4-Triazolium-3-thiolates (eg, 1, 2, 4-trimethyl-1, 2, 4-triazolium-3-thiolate), 3, 6-dithiaoctane-1, 8 -Thiol ether compounds such as diols.
  • a calendar process preferably used in the present invention that is, a process using a calendar roll will be described.
  • the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is preferably treated with a calender roll.
  • the conductivity of the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion can be improved, and the electromagnetic shielding performance can be improved.
  • a calendar roll usually consists of one or more pairs of rolls.
  • a plastic roll such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyimide amide or a metal roll is used. It is particularly preferable to treat with metal rolls.
  • the linear pressure is preferably 1960 N / cm (200 kgf / cm) or more, more preferably 2940 N / cm (300 kgf / cm) or more.
  • the temperature of the calender roll treatment is preferably 10 ° C to 100 ° C, more preferably 10 ° C to 50 ° C.
  • This calendar process can continuously process a roll-like film.
  • the heat treatment preferably used in the present invention is preferably performed at 40 ° C to 250 ° C, more preferably 60 ° C to 200 ° C, and even more preferably 70 ° C to 150 ° C.
  • the time you like It is preferable to heat-treat for 10 seconds to 1 hour, more preferably for 30 seconds to 30 minutes, and even more preferably for 1 minute to 10 minutes. It is good to carry out after development and before electrolytic plating.
  • the conductive metal particles can be supported on the metal silver portion by only one of physical development or staking treatment. Further, the conductive metal particles can be combined by combining physical development and plating treatment. Can also be supported on the metallic silver part.
  • a metal silver part that has been subjected to physical development and Z or staking treatment is referred to as a “conductive metal part”.
  • “Physical development” in the present invention means that metal particles such as silver ions are reduced with a reducing agent on metal or metal compound nuclei to precipitate metal particles. This physical phenomenon is used in the manufacture of instant B & W films, instant slide films, printing plates, etc., and the technology can be used in the present invention.
  • the physical development may be performed simultaneously with the development processing after exposure or may be performed separately after the development processing.
  • the plating process uses electroless plating (reduction plating or substitution plating), electrolysis plating, or both electroless plating and electrolytic plating. be able to.
  • the metallic silver portion after the exposure and development treatment can be further treated with an electroless plating solution.
  • an electroless plating solution a method of treating with an aqueous palladium compound solution or a method of treating with a reducing agent and / or a silver ion ligand is preferred.
  • the former is carried out by treating the metallic silver part after exposure and development with a solution containing Pd.
  • Pd may be divalent palladium ion or metal palladium. This treatment can accelerate electroless plating or physical development speed. Electroless plating with noradium is described in detail in the “Electroless plating” section of the Japan Society for the Science and Chemistry Handbook Applied Chemistry.
  • a plating apparatus for suitably carrying out the above-described electroplating treatment exposes the emulsion layer and electrically feeds the sequentially fed film from a feeding reel (not shown) around which the developed film is wound.
  • the film is fed into a plating tank and the film after plating is sequentially wound around a reel for reeling (not shown).
  • Fig. 1 shows an example of an electroplating bath suitably used for the electroplating treatment.
  • the electrolytic plating bath 10 shown in FIG. 1 is capable of continuously plating a long film 16 (the one subjected to the above exposure and development processing).
  • the arrow indicates the transport direction of the film 16.
  • the electrolytic plating bath 10 includes a plating bath 11 for storing a plating solution 15.
  • a pair of anode plates 13 are disposed in parallel in the plating bath 11, and a pair of guide rollers 14 are disposed inside the anode plate 13 so as to be rotatable in parallel with the anode plate 13.
  • the guide roller 14 can be moved in the vertical direction, so that the processing time of the film 16 can be adjusted.
  • a pair of feed rollers (force swords) 12a and 12b for guiding the film 16 to the plating bath 11 and supplying current to the film 16 are rotatably arranged.
  • a liquid draining roller 17 is rotatably disposed below the outlet-side power supply roller 12b.
  • the liquid draining roller 17 and the outlet-side power supply roller 12b are connected to each other.
  • a water spray (not shown) is installed to remove the plating solution from the film.
  • the anode plate 13 is connected to a positive terminal of a power supply device (not shown) via an electric wire (not shown), and the power supply rollers 12a and 12b are connected to a negative terminal of the power supply device (not shown). Yes.
  • the feeding roller 12a on the entrance side and the film 16 are in contact with each other.
  • the distance between the bottom of the surface and the plating solution surface (distance La shown in FIG. 1) is preferably 0.5 to 15 cm, more preferably l to 10 cm, and l to 7 cm. More preferably. Further, it is preferable that the distance (distance Lb shown in FIG. 1) between the lowermost part of the surface where the power supply roller 12b on the outlet side and the film 16 are in contact with each other and the liquid surface is 0.5 to 15 cm.
  • the solution 15 is stored in the bath 11.
  • a plating solution containing 30 gZL to 300 gZL of copper sulfate pentahydrate and 30 gZL to 300 gZL of sulfuric acid can be used.
  • nickel plating nickel sulfate, nickel hydrochloride, or the like can be used.
  • additives such as surfactant, a sulfur compound, and a nitrogen compound, to a plating solution.
  • the film 16 is set in a state where it is wound on a supply reel (not shown), and the film 16 is placed so that the surface on which the film 16 is to be formed comes into contact with the feeding rollers 12a and 12b. It is wound around a conveyance roller (not shown).
  • the surface resistance of the film immediately before electroplating is 1 to: LOOO Q Zsq is preferred 5 to 500 Q Zsq is more preferred Further, the range is 10 to 100 ⁇ Zsq It is.
  • a voltage is applied to the anode plate 13 and the feed rollers 12a and 12b, and the film 16 is conveyed while being in contact with the feed rollers 12a and 12b.
  • Film 16 is introduced into plating bath 11 and dipped in plating solution 15 to form copper plating.
  • the plating solution 15 adhering to the film 16 is wiped off and collected in the plating bath 11. This is repeated in a plurality of electrolytic baths, and finally washed with water, and then wound up on a reeling reel (not shown).
  • the conveyance speed of the film 16 is set in the range of 1 to 30 mZ.
  • the conveying speed of the film 16 is preferably in the range of 1 to: LOmZ, and more preferably in the range of 2 to 5 mZ.
  • the number of electrolytic plating tanks is not particularly limited, but 10 or less, that is, 10 or less is preferable, 2 to 10 is preferable, and 3 to 6 is more preferable.
  • the applied voltage is preferably in the range of 1 to: L00V, and more preferably in the range of 2 to 60V. When a plurality of electrolytic plating tanks are installed, it is preferable to lower the applied voltage of the electrolytic plating tank stepwise.
  • the amount of current on the inlet side of the first tank is preferably 1 to 30 A. 2 to: L0A is more preferable.
  • the feeding rollers 12a and 12b be in contact with the entire surface of the film (80% or more of the contact area is substantially in electrical contact). It is preferable to perform water washing and acid washing before the plating treatment in the electrolytic bath.
  • the treatment solution used for the acid cleaning can be one containing sulfuric acid or the like.
  • the thickness of the conductive metal part to be attached by the electrolytic plating process is preferable because the viewing angle of the display becomes wider as the electromagnetic wave shielding material of the display is thinner. Furthermore, as a use for conductive wiring materials, thinning is required because of the demand for higher density. From this point of view, the thickness of the conductive metal part is preferably less than 9 m, more preferably 0.1 m or more and less than 5 ⁇ m, 0.1 m or more and 3 ⁇ m. More preferably, it is less than.
  • a known electroless plating technique can be used.
  • it can be used for a printed wiring board and the like, and the electroless plating technique can be used.
  • Electrolytic copper plating is preferable.
  • Chemical species contained in the electroless copper plating solution include copper sulfate and copper chloride, as a reducing agent, formalin glyoxylic acid, as a copper ligand, EDTA, triethanolamine, etc.
  • Polyethylene glycol, yellow blood salt, biviridine and the like can be mentioned as additives for improving the smoothness of wrinkles and glazing films.
  • the conductive pattern on the film is preferably continuous (not electrically interrupted). If even a part of the pattern is connected, the conductive pattern may break, and there is a risk that a non-sticky part may be formed in the first electrolytic plating tank or it may become uneven.
  • the plating speed during the plating process can be high-speed plating with a force of 5 ⁇ mZhr or more that can be performed under moderate conditions.
  • various additives such as a ligand such as EDTA can be added to the plating solution and used.
  • the metallic silver portion after the development processing, the physical development and the Z or mating treatment It is preferable to subject the conductive metal part formed by treatment to an oxidation treatment.
  • an oxidation treatment for example, when a metal is slightly deposited on the light transmitting portion, the metal can be removed, and the light transmitting portion can be made almost 100% transparent.
  • the oxidation treatment examples include known methods using various oxidizing agents such as Fe (III) ion treatment. As described above, the oxidation treatment can be carried out after the emulsion layer exposure and development treatment, or after physical development or staking treatment, and further after the development treatment and after physical development or staking treatment, .
  • a triangle such as a regular triangle, an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a square, a rectangle, a rhombus, a parallelogram, a trapezoid, etc.
  • a mesh consisting of these geometric shapes which is preferably a combination of (positive) hexagons, (positive) n-gons such as (positive) hexagons, circles, ellipses, stars, etc. It is even better to be in the shape. From the viewpoint of EMI shielding properties, the triangular shape is the most effective force.
  • the shape of the said electroconductive metal part is not specifically limited, Arbitrary shapes can be suitably determined according to the objective.
  • the line width of the thin metal wire of the conductive metal portion needs to be 18 ⁇ m or less in order to ensure conductivity. If the line width exceeds 18 ⁇ m, it is not preferable because both the aperture ratio and mesh size are constrained to a satisfactory level.
  • the line width is preferably 5 to 18 ⁇ m, more preferably 8 to 16 ⁇ m.
  • the line spacing is preferably 50 ⁇ m or more and 500 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 200 ⁇ m or more and 400 ⁇ m or less, and most preferably 250 ⁇ m or more and 350 ⁇ m or less.
  • the conductive metal part in the present invention has an aperture ratio of preferably 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more, and more preferably 95% or more from the viewpoint of visible light transmittance. Is most preferable.
  • the open area ratio is the ratio of the portion without fine lines that make up the mesh to the whole, For example, the aperture ratio of a square grid mesh with a line width of 15 / zm and a pitch of 300 m is 90%.
  • the “light transmitting part” in the present invention means a part having transparency other than the conductive metal part in the light transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film.
  • the transmittance of the light transmissive portion is 90% or more, preferably the transmittance indicated by the minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength region of 380 to 780 nm excluding the contribution of light absorption and reflection of the support. Is 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more, even more preferably 98% or more, and most preferably 99% or more.
  • the mesh pattern of the conductive metal portion in the present invention is preferably continuous for 3 m or more in the longitudinal direction of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and the longer the continuous length of the mesh pattern, the more the optical pattern becomes. It can be said that this is a more preferable mode because the loss in producing the filter material can be reduced.
  • the continuous length is long, the roll diameter becomes large when the roll is formed, the roll mass becomes heavy, the pressure at the center of the roll becomes strong, causing problems such as adhesion and deformation, and cheapness.
  • the following is preferable. It is preferably 100 m or more and 1000 m or less, more preferably 200 m or more and 800 m or less, and most preferably 300 m or more and 500 m or less.
  • the thickness of the support is preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more and 180 ⁇ m or less, and most preferably 50 ⁇ m or more and 120 ⁇ m or less.
  • the scanning method of the light beam is preferably a method of exposing with a linear light source or a rotating polygon mirror arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the transport direction.
  • the light beam needs to be intensity-modulated by two or more values, and the straight line is battered as a series of dots. Since the dots are continuous, the edge of the fine line of one dot is stepped, but the thickness of the fine line means the narrowest length of the constricted part.
  • the mesh pattern is preferably inclined by 30 ° to 60 ° with respect to the longitudinal direction of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film. More preferably, it is 40 ° to 50 °, and most preferably 43 ° to 47 °.
  • the surface resistance value of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is required to be 5 Q Zsq or less.
  • a preferable surface resistance value is ⁇ ⁇ / sq or less, and more preferably 0.7 to 0.03 ⁇ Zsq.
  • the disconnection of the metallic silver portion of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention needs to be 10 locations / m 2 or less. Thereby, conductivity is ensured and an electromagnetic wave shielding function is exhibited. Preferably, it is 4 sites / m 2 or less, more preferably 1 site / m 2 or less.
  • the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention can be provided with a peelable protective film.
  • the protective film need not be provided on both surfaces of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and can be provided only on the conductive metal portion or on the opposite side. When the protective film is provided on a conductive metal part, V, it is desirable that it can be peeled off.
  • the peel strength of the protective film is preferably 5mNZ25mm width to 5NZ25mm width, more preferably 10mNZ25mm width to 100mNZ25mm width under the above test conditions. If it is less than the lower limit, peeling is too easy and the protective film may be peeled off during handling or inadvertent contact. If the upper limit is exceeded, a large force is required for peeling, and a conductive film is required for peeling. There is a risk that the conductive metal part may peel off from the support, which is not preferable.
  • polyethylene resin which is a polyolefin resin, polyester resin such as polypropylene resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, or resin film such as acrylic resin It is preferable to use, and the surface to which the protective film is bonded is preferably subjected to corona discharge treatment.
  • an acrylic ester-based, rubber-based, or silicone-based adhesive can be used.
  • the rolled translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention and the optical film incorporating the same may be subjected to blackening treatment.
  • the black wrinkle process is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-188576.
  • the blackened layer formed even by the blackening treatment can impart antireflection properties in addition to the antifungal effect.
  • the black layer can be formed by, for example, Co—Cu alloy plating, and can prevent reflection of the surface of the metal foil.
  • a chromate treatment may be performed thereon as a fouling treatment.
  • the chromate treatment is performed by immersing in a solution containing chromic acid or dichromate as a main component and drying to form an anti-fouling coating, which can be performed on one or both sides of the metal foil as required. Force Commercially available chromate-treated copper foil or the like may be used.
  • a metal foil that has been blackened in advance can be used, it may be blackened in an appropriate later step. Formation of the black wrinkle layer is accomplished by forming a photosensitive resin layer that can be a resist layer using a black colored composition, and leaving the resist layer without removal after etching is completed. Alternatively, a plating method that gives a black film may be used.
  • the configuration shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-266095 may be used. That is, after the first black layer is provided on the conductive metal portion and the electrolytic plating is performed on the first black layer, the second black layer is further formed on the plating. It is a configuration with layers. In order to perform electroplating on the first black layer, at least the first black layer must be conductive.
  • the conductive black layer can be formed using a conductive metal compound, for example, a compound such as nickel (Ni), zinc (Zn), copper (Cu), or the like. It can be formed using an electrodepositing ionic polymer material such as an electrodeposition coating material.
  • the electrolyte bath containing the blackening material can be a black tanning bath containing nickel sulfate as a main component, and is also commercially available.
  • Blackish Attached bath can be used in the same way.
  • a black plating bath manufactured by Shimizu Corporation (trade name, Novroy SNC, Sn—Ni alloy system), black manufactured by Nippon Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • Metal bath (trade name, Nitsuka black, Sn—Ni alloy), black bath bath (trade name, Evo-Chromium 85 series, 85 series, Cr series) manufactured by Metal Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Can be used.
  • various black tanning baths such as Zn-based, Cu-based, and others can be used as the black tanning bath.
  • the conductive mesh is applied to form a conductive mesh pattern, and then a second black layer is formed thereon.
  • the metal with an electric field is Cu
  • treat the surface of Cu with hydrogen sulfide (HS) solution treatment.
  • HS hydrogen sulfide
  • the second black layer is formed.
  • the metal as the above-mentioned good conductive substance can be used as the most advantageous material. Therefore, when forming the above-mentioned metal electrodeposition layer, it is possible to use general-purpose metal electrolytes, so there are many types of inexpensive metal electrolytes, and it is free to choose the one that suits the purpose. There is an advantage that can be done. In general, Cu is frequently used as an inexpensive and highly conductive metal, and in the present invention, it is useful to use Cu in accordance with the purpose. Of course, other metals are similarly used. It can be used for Next, in the present invention, the mesh-like conductive pattern 4 does not need to be composed of only a single metal layer.
  • the mesh-like conductive pattern 4 made of Cu in the above example is used. Since it is relatively soft and easily scratched, the protective layer can be a two-layer metal electrodeposition layer using a general-purpose hard metal such as Ni or Cr.
  • the blackening agent for the second blackening layer it can be easily manufactured using a sulfide-based compound, and there are many types of treating agents on the market. 'Copper black CuO, CuS, selenium-based Copa Black No. 65, etc. (made by Isolate Chemical Laboratories), trade name' Ebonol C Special (made by Meltex Co., Ltd.), etc. can be used. Functional layers other than electromagnetic shielding of optical electromagnetic shielding film]
  • a functional layer having functionality may be separately provided as necessary.
  • This functional layer can have various specifications for each application.
  • display electromagnetic Wave shield materials include anti-reflective layers with anti-reflective functions that adjust the refractive index and film thickness, non-glare layers or anti-glare layers (both have anti-glare functions), and compounds and metals that absorb near-infrared rays.
  • Near-infrared absorption layer layer with a color tone adjustment function that absorbs visible light in a specific wavelength range
  • antifouling layer with a function that easily removes dirt such as fingerprints
  • hard-coat layer that is hard to scratch
  • impact A layer having an absorption function, a layer having a function of preventing glass scattering when the glass is broken, and the like can be provided.
  • These functional layers may be provided on the opposite side of the conductive metal part and the support, or may be provided on the same side.
  • a material provided with these functional layers is called an optical filter (or simply a filter).
  • each functional layer When using a translucent electromagnetic shielding film for a display (especially a plasma display), it is preferable to attach each functional layer by attaching a functional layer (functional film) described below.
  • the functional film can be directly or indirectly attached to the translucent electromagnetic shielding film via an adhesive or the like.
  • the functional film can be formed by providing a functional layer having antireflection properties and antiglare properties on a suitable transparent substrate. (Anti-reflective 'Anti-glare)
  • the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film has anti-reflection (AR: anti-reflection) properties to suppress external light reflection, anti-glare properties (AG: anti-glare) properties to prevent reflection of mirror images, or both. It is preferable to provide any anti-glare and anti-glare (ARAG) function provided.
  • AR anti-reflection
  • AG anti-glare
  • the visible light reflectance is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 1.3% or less. More preferably, it is 0.8% or less.
  • a thin film of a fluorine-based transparent polymer resin, magnesium fluoride, a silicon-based resin, silicon oxide, or the like is formed as a single layer with an optical film thickness of 1Z4 wavelength, for example.
  • Two or more thin films of inorganic compounds such as metal oxides, fluorides, halides, nitrides and sulfides, or organic compounds such as silicon-based resins, acrylic resins, and fluorine-based resins with different refractive indexes. It can be formed of a multi-layered laminate.
  • an antiglare layer 0.1 ⁇ ! It is possible to form a laminar force having a surface state with minute irregularities of about 10 m.
  • acrylic or silicone resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, fluorinated resin, or other thermosetting or photocurable resin, silica, organic It can be formed by coating and curing an ink obtained by dispersing particles of an inorganic compound or organic compound such as a silicon compound, melamine, or acrylic.
  • the average particle size of the particles is preferably about 1 to 40 / ⁇ ⁇ .
  • the antiglare layer can also be formed by applying the thermosetting or photocurable resin as described above and then pressing and curing a mold having a desired dalos value or surface state. Monkey.
  • the haze generated during light transmission of the translucent electromagnetic shielding film is preferably 0.5% or more and 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less. % To 10%. If the haze is too small, the antiglare property is insufficient, and if the haze is too large, the transmitted image sharpness tends to be low.
  • the functional film has a hard coat property.
  • the hard coat layer include thermosetting type or photosetting type resin such as acrylic resin, silicone resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, and fluorine resin.
  • the type and formation method are not particularly limited.
  • the thickness of the hard coat layer is preferably about 1 to 50 / ⁇ ⁇ .
  • the surface hardness of the translucent electromagnetic shielding film with hard coat properties is JIS ( ⁇ -54
  • the pencil hardness according to (00) is preferably at least H, more preferably 2H, even more preferably 3H or more.
  • the transmissive electromagnetic wave shielding film has antistatic properties.
  • a film having high conductivity can be used.
  • the conductivity is about 10 11 ⁇ Zsq or less in terms of surface resistance
  • a highly conductive film can be formed by providing an antistatic layer on a transparent substrate.
  • the antistatic agent used in the antistatic layer include a trade name Pelestat (manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd.), a trade name electroslipper (manufactured by Kao Corporation), and the like.
  • the antistatic layer may be formed of a known transparent conductive film such as ITO, or a conductive film in which conductive ultrafine particles such as ITO ultrafine particles and tin oxide ultrafine particles are dispersed.
  • the above hard coat layer, antireflection layer, antiglare layer and the like may be provided with antistatic properties by containing conductive fine particles.
  • the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film has antifouling property, it is preferable because it can be easily removed when it is prevented from being smudged or smudged.
  • a functional film having antifouling properties can be obtained, for example, by applying a compound having antifouling properties on a transparent substrate.
  • a compound having antifouling property for example, a fluorine compound or a key compound may be used as long as the compound has non-wetting property with respect to water and Z or oil.
  • Specific examples of the fluorine compound include trade name OPTOOL (manufactured by Daikin) and the like, and examples of the key compound include trade name Takata Quantum (manufactured by NOF Corporation).
  • the functional film having ultraviolet cut-off property can be formed by a method in which an ultraviolet absorber is contained in the transparent substrate itself or by providing an ultraviolet absorbing layer on the transparent substrate.
  • the transmittance in the ultraviolet region shorter than the wavelength of 380 nm is 20% or less, preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less.
  • a functional film having an ultraviolet cutting property can be obtained by forming a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber or an inorganic compound that reflects or absorbs ultraviolet rays on a transparent substrate.
  • Conventionally known UV absorbers such as benzotriazoles and benzophenones can be used, and their type 'concentration is dispersibility in the medium to be dispersed or dissolved' solubility, absorption wavelength-absorption coefficient, medium It is determined by the thickness of the material and is not particularly limited.
  • the functional film having ultraviolet cut-off property has little absorption in the visible light region and does not significantly reduce visible light transmittance or exhibit a color such as yellow. Moreover, when the layer containing the pigment
  • the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film has a gas barrier property because it may be clouded or the adhesive may be phase-separated and deposited due to the influence of moisture.
  • the water vapor permeability of the functional film is preferably lOgZm 2 ⁇ day or less, preferably Is preferably 5 gZm 2 ⁇ day or less.
  • a plasma display Since a plasma display generates intense near-infrared rays, it is preferable to provide a near-infrared cut-off property, particularly when a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film is used for a plasma display.
  • a film having a transmittance of 25% or less in a wavelength region of 800 to 1 OOOnm is preferably less than 15%, more preferably less than 10%. is there.
  • the transmitted color is-neutral gray or blue gray. This is to maintain or improve the light emission characteristics and contrast of the plasma display, and is also a force that may prefer a white color temperature slightly higher than the standard white color.
  • color plasma displays are said to have insufficient color reproducibility.
  • the emission spectrum of red display shows several emission peaks ranging from about 580 nm to about 700 nm. There is a problem that red emission becomes poor in color purity close to orange due to a strong emission peak on the short wavelength side. Therefore, it is preferable that the functional film has a function of selectively reducing unnecessary light emission of the phosphor or discharge gas force that is the cause thereof.
  • optical properties can be controlled by using a dye.
  • near-infrared absorbers can be used for near-infrared cut, and dyes that selectively absorb unwanted luminescence can be used to reduce unwanted luminescence.
  • the color tone can also be made suitable by using a dye having an appropriate absorption in the visible region.
  • the dye may be a general dye or pigment having a desired absorption wavelength in the visible region, or a compound known as a near-infrared absorber, and the type thereof is not particularly limited.
  • a compound known as a near-infrared absorber for example, anthraquinone, phthalocyanine, methine, azomethine, oxazine, imonium, azo, styryl, coumarin, porphyrin, dibenzofuranone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, rhodamine, xanthene
  • organic dyes that are generally commercially available, such as pyromethene-based compounds, dithiol-based compounds, and diiminium-based compounds.
  • the plasma display has a heat resistance that does not deteriorate at about 80 ° C, for example, because the temperature of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film increases when the temperature of the environment where the panel surface temperature is high is high. It is preferable to speak.
  • some dyes have poor light resistance. If such dyes cause problems with the light emission of plasma displays and the deterioration of UV light and visible light from outside light, functional films as described above. It is preferable to prevent the dye from being deteriorated by ultraviolet rays or visible rays by adding an ultraviolet absorber to the layer or providing a layer that does not transmit ultraviolet rays.
  • the transmission characteristics of the optical filter change, and the color tone may change or the near-infrared cutting ability may decrease.
  • the dye is highly soluble and dispersible in the solvent in order to dissolve or disperse it in the resin composition for forming the transparent substrate and the coating composition for forming the coating layer. Is preferred.
  • the concentration of the dye is appropriately set based on the absorption wavelength of the dye, the absorption coefficient, the transmission characteristics required for the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, the transmittance, and the type of the medium or coating film to be dispersed. can do.
  • the functional film When the functional film contains a pigment, it may be contained inside the transparent substrate, or a layer containing the pigment may be coated on the surface of the substrate. Further, two or more kinds of dyes having different absorption wavelengths may be mixed and contained in one layer, or two or more layers containing dyes may be provided.
  • the functional film containing the dye has a layer containing the light transmitting electromagnetic wave shield. More preferably, it is arranged so that it does not come into contact with the conductive metal part on the metal film.
  • the translucent electromagnetic shielding film with the functional film attached is attached to the display, it is usually attached so that the functional film is on the outside and the adhesive layer is on the display side.
  • the conducting part is preferably provided around the conductive metal part along the peripheral edge of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film.
  • the conductive portion may be formed of a mesh pattern, or may be patterned! /,
  • the conductive portion may be formed of a mesh pattern, or may be patterned! /,
  • the metal foil is not patterned like a solid metal foil.
  • the conductive part may be a mesh pattern layer or not patterned, for example, a solid layer of metal foil, the electrical connection with the ground part of the display body is good.
  • the conductive portion be patterned like a metal foil solid layer.
  • the conductive part is not patterned like a solid metal foil, and when Z or the mechanical strength of the conductive part is sufficiently strong, the conductive part itself can be used as an electrode. It is.
  • an electrode on the conducting part it is preferable to form an electrode on the conducting part to protect the conducting part and to make good electrical contact with the grounding part when Z or the conducting part is a mesh pattern layer.
  • the shape of the electrode is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the electrode is formed so as to cover all the conductive portions.
  • the material used for the electrode is composed of a single substance or two or more of silver, copper, nickel, aluminum, chromium, iron, zinc, carbon, etc. in terms of conductivity, contact resistance and adhesion to the transparent conductive film.
  • An alloy, a synthetic resin and a single substance or a mixture of these alloys, or a paste that also has a mixture force between a borosilicate glass and these single substances or an alloy can be used. Conventionally known methods can be employed for printing and coating the paste.
  • Commercially available conductive tape can also be suitably used.
  • the conductive tape is conductive on both sides, and a single-sided adhesive type and a double-sided adhesive type using a carbon-dispersed conductive adhesive can be suitably used.
  • the thickness of the electrode is also not particularly limited, but is about several / zm to several mm.
  • an optical filter having excellent optical characteristics that can maintain or improve the image quality without significantly impairing the luminance of the plasma display.
  • it has excellent electromagnetic shielding ability to block electromagnetic waves that have been pointed out to be harmful to the health of the plasma display, and near infrared rays near 800 to 1000 nm are also emitted from the plasma display. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an optical filter that does not adversely affect the wavelengths used by the remote control of peripheral electronic devices, transmission optical communication, etc., and can prevent malfunctions thereof.
  • an optical filter having excellent weather resistance can be provided at a low cost.
  • Hexaclo oral rhodate ammonium (0.001% NaCl 20% aqueous solution) 7ml Potassium hexaloiridium (III) (0.005% KC1 20% aqueous solution) and hexachloro oral rhodate ammonium 0.001% NaC120% aqueous solution) was prepared by dissolving the powder in KC1 20% aqueous solution and NaC120% aqueous solution, respectively, and heating at 40 ° C. for 120 minutes.
  • Sample 1-1 was prepared by coating on a polyethylene terephthalate film support consisting of a moisture-proof undercoat containing both sides of the polyvinylidene chloride shown below so as to form the UL layer Z emulsion layer.
  • the preparation method, coating amount and coating method of each layer are shown below.
  • sensitizing dye (sd-1) 5.7 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag to the emulsion A. Further to KBr3.4 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag, the compound (Cpd- 3) 8.0 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag Karoe, and mixed well.
  • Polyethylene terephthalate resin having an inherent viscosity of 0.66 which was polycondensed using antimony trioxide and antimony as the main catalyst, was dried to a water content of 50 ppm or less and melted in an extruder set at a heater temperature of 280 to 300 ° C.
  • the molten PET resin is discharged from a die part onto a chill roll that is electrostatically applied to obtain a non-crystalline base.
  • the obtained amorphous base was stretched 3.1 times in the direction of base travel and then 3.9 times in the width direction to produce a 96 m thick support in roll form.
  • a coating solution having the following composition was successively applied and dried under the following coating conditions to form the following back layer (easy adhesion layer).
  • the surface of the support was subjected to corona discharge treatment under printing energy 727 jZm 2 conditions, and then the antistatic layer having the following compositional power.
  • the use coating liquid application amount was applied by bar coating method at 7. lccZm 2.
  • an antistatic layer was obtained by drying at 180 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
  • Polyacrylic resin Jiurimer ET-410: Nippon Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., solid content 30%
  • Needle-shaped tin oxide particles F-10D: Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., solid content 20%
  • 131.1 parts by mass Carposiimide compound Carposiimide compound (Carpolite V-02- L2: Nisshinbo, solid content 40%)
  • Surfactant Sandet BL: Sanyo Chemical Industries solid content 44.6%)
  • Silica fine particle dispersion Seahoster KE-W30: Nippon Shokubai 0.3 ⁇ m solids 20%
  • a coating solution for the surface layer having the following composition was applied on the antistatic layer at a coating amount of 5.05 ccZm 2 by the bar coating method. Subsequently, a back layer having a two-layer structure was obtained by drying at 160 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
  • An undercoat coating solution having the following composition was simultaneously applied to the surface of the polyethylene terephthalate support opposite to the surface on which the back layer was formed, thereby forming an undercoat layer for the emulsion layer. That is, in the state where the substrate was conveyed at a conveyance speed of 105 mZ, the opposite surface of the support was subjected to corona discharge treatment under 467 jZm 2 conditions, and the coating solution for the first subbing layer having the following composition was applied by the bar coating method. It applied by. The coating amount was 5.05 ccZm 2, and the first undercoat layer was obtained by drying at 180 ° C. for 1 minute in the air flotation drying zone, the same as the back layer antistatic layer drying zone.
  • Polystyrene fine particles (average particle size 2 ⁇ )
  • a coating solution having the following composition was subsequently applied onto the first undercoat layer by the bar coating method.
  • the coating amount was 8.7 cc / m 2
  • a second undercoat layer was obtained by drying at 160 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
  • the obtained Sample 11 had an applied silver amount of 7.6 g / m 2 , an Ag / gelatin mass ratio of the emulsion layer of 6.9, a swelling ratio of 209%, and a product of Ag / gelatin mass ratio and swelling ratio of 13.2. It was a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer as the uppermost layer.
  • the swelling ratio of the emulsion layer was determined as follows. That is, by observing a section of the dried sample with a scanning electron microscope, the thickness (a) of the emulsion layer at the time of drying is obtained, immersed in distilled water at 25 ° C for 1 minute, and then freeze-dried with liquid nitrogen. By observing the slice of the sample with a scanning electron microscope, the film thickness (b) of the emulsion layer during swelling was determined, and the swelling ratio was calculated by the following equation.
  • the exposed sample was subsequently subjected to development processing to create a metallic silver part.
  • Electrolytic plating 2 35 ° C 30 seconds
  • the water washing process was a two-tank counter-flow system with two rinses, 1, four rinses, and three rinses from 6 to 5.
  • composition of each treatment solution is as follows.
  • Electrolytic copper plating solution composition (same replenisher composition)
  • the oxidation-reduction potential of the black-and-white developer was 340 mVvs SCE, expressed as the bath potential obtained by immersing the rotating platinum electrode in the developer.
  • samples shown in Table 1 were prepared by changing the amount of gelatin (Gel) used in the binder of the emulsion. Samples that were not plated, samples that were reduced after development, and samples that were calendered were prepared.
  • Gel gelatin
  • the reduction treatment was performed by treatment with a 0.01 mol / L aqueous solution of sodium triacetoxyborohydride for 5 minutes.
  • the calendering process was performed by applying a linear pressure of 2940 N / cm (300 kg / cm) with a calender roll and passing the sample between calender rollers with two pairs of metal roll forces.
  • each sample was subjected to the exposure and development processes described above, so that the conductive metal portion and the metal were substantially present.
  • a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film was formed as a light transmitting part.
  • the conductive metal part exhibited a mesh pattern corresponding to the exposure pattern, and the line Z space width was 15 ⁇ m / 285 ⁇ m in all samples. In all samples, the aperture ratio of the light transmission part was about 90%.
  • Each sample is developed without being exposed! ⁇ The surface of each sample was visually observed to evaluate whether or not a black spot-like or linear developed silver was formed.
  • the evaluation criteria were as follows.
  • Level A 0 to 3 black spots or linear developed silver.
  • Level B 4 to 10 black spots or linear developed silver.
  • Level C Number of black spots or linear developed silver is 10 or more.
  • Revenore A Number of breaks 0 to: LO.
  • Level B Number of breaks 11 or more.
  • Level C Number of disconnections 20 or more.
  • Example 1 A glass plate was bonded to the inner light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film excluding the outer edge portion of 20 mm through an acrylic light-transmitting adhesive material having a thickness of 25 m.
  • the acrylic light-transmitting pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contained a toning dye (PS-Red-G, PS-Violet-RC manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) that adjusts the transmission characteristics of the optical filter.
  • an anti-reflection film having a near-infrared cutting ability (trade name Realic 7 72UV manufactured by Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd.) was bonded to the opposite main surface of the glass plate via an adhesive material to produce an optical filter. .
  • the display image does not take on a metallic color, and has an electromagnetic wave shielding ability and a near infrared ray cutting ability that are not problematic in practice, and an antireflection film. It was excellent in visibility.
  • a pigment it has been possible to impart a color-adjusting function, and it can be suitably used as an optical filter for plasma displays and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Plasma & Fusion (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Shielding Devices Or Components To Electric Or Magnetic Fields (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a low-cost light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film exhibiting excellent productivity and high electromagnetic shielding performance, while generating no fog. Also disclosed are an optical filter and plasma display panel using such a light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film. Specifically disclosed is a method for producing a conductive film, which comprises a development step wherein a silver metal portion is formed by exposing and developing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer on a support, a reduction step wherein a reducing agent is brought into contact with the surface of the silver metal portion, and a smoothing step wherein the reduced photosensitive film is subjected to smoothing. Also specifically disclosed are a light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel produced by using such a conductive film.

Description

導電性膜の製造方法、並びに、透光性電磁波シールド膜、光学フィルタ
Figure imgf000002_0001
Manufacturing method of conductive film, translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, optical filter
Figure imgf000002_0001
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、 CRT (陰極線管)、 PDP (プラズマディスプレイパネル)、液晶、 ELP (ェ レクト口ルミネッセンスパネル(ELともいう。))、 FED (フィールドェミッションディスプレ ィ)などのディスプレイの前面、電子レンジ、電子機器、プリント配線板などカゝら発生 する電磁波を遮蔽する電磁波シールドに関し、特に、透光性を有する透光性電磁波 シールド膜、該透光性電磁波シールド膜を備えた光学フィルターおよびプラズマディ スプレイパネルに関する。  [0001] The present invention relates to the front surface of a display such as a CRT (cathode ray tube), a PDP (plasma display panel), a liquid crystal, an ELP (electric aperture luminescence panel (also referred to as EL)), or a FED (field emission display). In particular, the present invention relates to an electromagnetic shield that shields electromagnetic waves generated from a microwave oven, electronic equipment, printed wiring board, etc., and in particular, a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film having translucency, and an optical filter provided with the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film And plasma display panels.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 近年、各種の電気設備や電子応用設備の利用の増加に伴!、、電磁波障害 (Electr 0- Magnetic Interference: EMI)が急増している。 EMIは、電子、電気機器の誤動作、 障害の原因になるほか、これらの装置のオペレーターにも健康障害を与えることが指 摘されている。このため、電子、電気機器では、電磁波放出の強さを規格又は規制 内に抑えることが要求されて 、る。  [0002] In recent years, electromagnetic interference (Electr 0- Magnetic Interference: EMI) has been rapidly increasing with the increasing use of various electric facilities and electronic application facilities. In addition to causing malfunctions and failures of electronic and electrical equipment, EMI has been pointed out to cause health problems for operators of these devices. For this reason, electronic and electrical equipment is required to keep the intensity of electromagnetic wave emission within the standard or regulation.
[0003] 上記 EMIの対策には電磁波をシールドする必要がある力 それには金属の電磁波 を貫通させない性質を利用すればよいことは自明である。例えば、筐体を金属体又 は高導電体にする方法や、回路基板と回路基板との間に金属板を挿入する方法、ケ 一ブルを金属箔で覆う方法などが採用されている。しかし、 CRT, PDPなどではオペ レーターが画面に表示される文字等を認識する必要があるため、ディスプレイにおけ る透明性が要求される。このため、前記の方法では、いずれもディスプレイ前面が不 透明になることが多ぐ電磁波のシールド法としては不適切なものであった。  [0003] It is self-evident that the above-mentioned countermeasure against EMI requires the ability to shield electromagnetic waves. For example, a method of making the casing a metal body or a high conductor, a method of inserting a metal plate between the circuit board and the circuit board, and a method of covering the cable with a metal foil are employed. However, in CRT, PDP, etc., it is necessary for the operator to recognize characters displayed on the screen, so transparency on the display is required. For this reason, any of the above methods is inappropriate as an electromagnetic wave shielding method in which the front surface of the display often becomes opaque.
[0004] 特に、 PDPは、 CRT等と比較すると多量の電磁波を発生するため、より強い電磁 波シールド能が求められている。電磁波シールド能は、簡便には表面抵抗値で表す ことができ、 CRT用の透光性電磁波シールド材料では、表面抵抗値は凡そ 300 Ω / sq以下であることが要求されるのに対し、 PDP用の透光性電磁波シールド材料では 、 2. 5 Q Zsq以下が要求され、 PDPを用いた民生用プラズマテレビにおいては、 1.[0004] In particular, a PDP generates a larger amount of electromagnetic waves than a CRT or the like, and thus a stronger electromagnetic wave shielding ability is required. The electromagnetic wave shielding ability can be simply expressed by the surface resistance value. In the case of translucent electromagnetic wave shielding material for CRT, the surface resistance value is required to be about 300 Ω / sq or less. In translucent electromagnetic shielding material for 2.5 Q Zsq or less is required, and for consumer plasma televisions using PDP, 1.
5 Ω /sq以下とする必要性が高ぐより望ましくは 0. l Q Zsq以下という極めて高い 導電性が要求されている。 The necessity of being 5 Ω / sq or less is high, and it is desirable to have extremely high conductivity of 0. l Q Zsq or less.
また、透明性に関する要求レベルは、 CRT用として凡そ 70%以上、 PDP用として 8 The required level of transparency is about 70% or more for CRT and 8 for PDP.
0%以上の可視光透過率が要求されており、更に一層高い透明性が望まれている。 Visible light transmittance of 0% or more is required, and much higher transparency is desired.
[0005] 上記の問題を解決するために、以下に示されるように、開口部を有する金属製のメ ッシュを利用して電磁波シールド性と透明性とを両立させる種々の材料'方法がこれ まで提案されている。 [0005] In order to solve the above problems, as described below, various materials' methods that achieve both electromagnetic shielding properties and transparency using metal meshes having openings have been proposed so far. Proposed.
[0006] (1)導電性繊維 [0006] (1) Conductive fiber
例えば、特許文献 1には、導電性繊維カゝらなる電磁波シールド材が開示されている For example, Patent Document 1 discloses an electromagnetic shielding material such as a conductive fiber cover.
。し力し、このシールド材はメッシュ線幅が太くディスプレイ画面をシールドすると、画 面が暗くなり、ディスプレイに表示された文字が見えにくいという欠点があった。 . However, this shield material has a drawback that when the display screen is shielded with a thick mesh line width, the screen becomes dark and it is difficult to see the characters displayed on the display.
[0007] (2)無電解めつきにより形成されたメッシュ  [0007] (2) Mesh formed by electroless plating
無電解めつき触媒を印刷法で格子状パターンとして印刷し、次 、で無電解めつきを 行う方法が提案されている(例えば、特許文献 2、特許文献 3など)。しかし、印刷され る触媒の線幅は 60 m程度と太ぐ比較的小さな線幅、緻密なパターンが要求され るディスプレイの用途としては不適切であった。  There has been proposed a method in which an electroless plating catalyst is printed as a grid pattern by a printing method, and then electroless plating is performed in the following manner (for example, Patent Document 2 and Patent Document 3). However, the printed catalyst has a line width of about 60 m, which is inappropriate for displays that require a thick, relatively small line width and a fine pattern.
さらに、無電解めつき触媒を含有するフォトレジストを塗布して露光と現像を行うこと により無電解めつき触媒のパターンを形成した後、無電解めつきする方法が提案され ている(例えば、特許文献 4)。しかし、導電膜の可視光透過率は 72%であり、透明性 が不十分であった。更には、露光後に大部分を除去する無電解めつき触媒として極 めて高価なパラジウムを用いる必要があるため、製造コストの面でも問題があった。  Furthermore, a method of applying electroless plating after forming a pattern of an electroless plating catalyst by applying a photoresist containing an electroless plating catalyst and performing exposure and development has been proposed (for example, patents). Reference 4). However, the visible light transmittance of the conductive film was 72%, and the transparency was insufficient. Furthermore, since it is necessary to use extremely expensive palladium as an electroless plating catalyst that removes most after exposure, there is also a problem in terms of production cost.
[0008] (3)フォトリソグラフィ一法により形成されたメッシュ [0008] (3) Mesh formed by a photolithography method
フォトリソグラフィ一法を利用したエッチング加工により、透明基体上に金属薄膜のメ ッシュを形成する方法が提案されている(例えば、特許文献 5〜8など)。この方法で は、微細加工が可能であるため、高開口率 (高透過率)のメッシュを作成することがで き、強力な電磁波が放出されても遮蔽できるという利点を有する。しかし、その製造ェ 程は煩雑かつ複雑で、生産コストが高価になるという問題点があった。また、エツチン グ法によるところから、格子模様の交点部が直線部分の線幅より太い問題があること が知られている。また、モアレの問題も指摘され、改善が要望されていた。 There has been proposed a method of forming a metal thin film mesh on a transparent substrate by an etching process using a photolithography method (for example, Patent Documents 5 to 8). Since this method allows fine processing, it has the advantage that a mesh having a high aperture ratio (high transmittance) can be created and can be shielded even when strong electromagnetic waves are emitted. However, the manufacturing process is complicated and complicated, and the production cost is high. Ettin It is known that the intersection of the lattice pattern is thicker than the line width of the straight line part. In addition, the problem of moire was pointed out and improvement was desired.
[0009] (4)ハロゲンィ匕銀を現像する方法により形成されたメッシュ  [0009] (4) Mesh formed by a method of developing halogen silver
ハロゲン化銀を現像して得られる導電性金属銀で導電性メッシュを形成する方法、 あるいは該導電性メッシュにさらに金属銅をめつきしてメッシュを形成する方法が提案 されている(例えば、特許文献 9、 10)。  A method of forming a conductive mesh with conductive metal silver obtained by developing silver halide, or a method of forming a mesh by further attaching metal copper to the conductive mesh has been proposed (for example, patents). Reference 9, 10).
特許文献 1:特開平 5— 327274号公報  Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-327274
特許文献 2:特開平 11 170420号公報  Patent Document 2: JP 11 170420 A
特許文献 3:特開平 5 - 283889号公報  Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-283889
特許文献 4:特開平 11— 170421号公報  Patent Document 4: JP-A-11-170421
特許文献 5 :特開 2003— 46293号公報  Patent Document 5: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-46293
特許文献 6:特開 2003 - 23290号公報  Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-23290
特許文献 7 :特開平 5— 16281号公報  Patent Document 7: JP-A-5-16281
特許文献 8:特開平 10— 338848号公報  Patent Document 8: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-338848
特許文献 9:特開 2004— 207001号公報  Patent Document 9: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-207001
特許文献 10:特開 2004 - 221564号公報  Patent Document 10: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-221564
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0010] 背景技術の項に前記した特許文献は、それぞれの目的に対しては改善がなされた 技術の開示ではある力 その一方次のような課題が残されている。  [0010] The patent document described in the section of the background art is a disclosure of the technology that has been improved for each purpose. On the other hand, the following problems remain.
[0011] (無電解めつきによる低生産性)  [0011] (Low productivity due to electroless plating)
例えば特許文献 10に開示された技術は、他の方式に比べて、メッシュの形状を精 密に制御でき、高い透明性を付与し、安価に大量生産が可能なことなどの優れた点 があるが、現像銀の導電性メッシュの抵抗が高いために、直接電解めつきを行うこと が困難で、めっき処理を大面積フィルムに対して行う際には無電解めつきと電解めつ きを併用する必要がある。したがって、生産性が悪化し、めっきコストが高い等の問題 があり改善が望まれていた。  For example, the technique disclosed in Patent Document 10 has advantages such as being able to precisely control the shape of the mesh, imparting high transparency, and enabling mass production at low cost compared to other methods. However, due to the high resistance of the developed silver conductive mesh, it is difficult to perform direct electroplating, and electroless plating and electroplating are used together when plating on large-area films. There is a need to. Therefore, improvement has been desired due to problems such as deterioration in productivity and high plating costs.
[0012] (感光材料のかぶりの問題) そこで電解めつきを容易に行うために、現像銀のメッシュを低抵抗なものとすること が望まれるが、低抵抗な現像銀メッシュを得る場合、未露光部でも現像が起こる問題 が生じることが判明した。未露光部での現像銀の発生は、カプリと呼ばれるものであ る。 [0012] (Problem of photosensitive material fogging) Therefore, in order to easily perform electroplating, it is desirable that the developed silver mesh has a low resistance. However, when obtaining a developed silver mesh having a low resistance, there may be a problem that development occurs even in an unexposed area. found. The development of developed silver in the unexposed areas is called capri.
また、特許文献 1では、電解めつき処理を枚葉処理でかつバッチ処理により行って いる。表面抵抗が Ι Ω /sq以上と大きいフィルムに対して枚葉処理により電解めつき を行うと、めっき液と接触しているフィルム部分のうち、電流を流した側に近い部分で 多くめつきされる。特に、めっき開始時、即ち最初の給電時にこの現象がおき、その 後めつきを続けてもめっきを均一に付けることが困難であった。  In Patent Document 1, the electroplating process is performed by single wafer processing and batch processing. When electroplating is performed on a film with a large surface resistance of Ω Ω / sq or more by single wafer processing, the film portion that is in contact with the plating solution is mostly deposited on the portion near the current-carrying side. The In particular, this phenomenon occurred at the start of plating, that is, at the first power supply, and it was difficult to uniformly apply the plating even if the plating was continued thereafter.
[0013] (不連続メッシュパターンによる低生産性) [0013] (Low productivity due to discontinuous mesh pattern)
また、従来のメッシュの形成方法のいくつかは、ある一定の面積しか断線のないメッ シュを作成することができな力つた。例えば上記の無電解めつき触媒を印刷法で格 子状パターンとして印刷し、次いで無電解めつきを行う方法は、例えばスクリーン印 刷を利用した場合、めっき触媒核のパターユング力スクリーンまたは凹版などのサイ ズ単位で途切れ、結果としてメッシュが断線してしまう。また、フォトリソグラフィ一法を 利用した場合は、露光マスクサイズ単位にメッシュが途切れてしまう。その理由は、露 光方式が枚葉のフォトマスクである為に露光フォトレジストへの露光を長 、ロールフィ ルム全体に渡って連続で露光することができず、フォトマスクの大きさの範囲の露光 を 1回 1回繰り返さなければならないからである。  In addition, some of the conventional mesh formation methods have been unable to create meshes that are disconnected only in a certain area. For example, a method of printing the above electroless plating catalyst as a grid pattern by a printing method and then performing electroless plating is, for example, when using screen printing, a patterning force screen of a plating catalyst nucleus or an intaglio. This breaks in units of size, resulting in the mesh breaking. In addition, when a photolithography method is used, the mesh breaks in units of exposure mask size. The reason for this is that since the exposure method is a single-wafer photomask, the exposure to the exposed photoresist is long, and the entire roll film cannot be exposed continuously, and exposure within the photomask size range is possible. This must be repeated once.
このため、例えば、 PDP用途の場合では、作成したシールド膜のメッシュのパター ンと PDPのモジュールないしは前面板またはガラス等を基体とした光学フィルター材 料に電磁波シールド膜を位置あわせする製造方法がとられてきた。しかし生産性を 向上するためにロール状の電磁波シールド膜を連続的に貼り合わせようとしても、位 置合せに時間がかかり、生産速度を十分に上げることができな力 た。また、電磁波 シールド膜に損失が発生するという問題点もあった。  For this reason, for example, in the case of PDP applications, there is a manufacturing method in which an electromagnetic wave shielding film is aligned with an optical filter material based on the created shield film mesh pattern and PDP module or front plate or glass. Has been. However, in order to improve productivity, it was difficult to sufficiently increase the production speed because it took time to align the roll-shaped electromagnetic shielding film continuously. Another problem is that loss occurs in the electromagnetic shielding film.
[0014] 更に上記のような電磁波シールド膜では、リモコンの誤作動等を防止する目的で近 赤外線カット性能が重要な要求特性とされている。特に最近では、 PDPの輝度の向 上に伴って、近赤外線の発生量も多くなつていることから、より一層高度な近赤外線 カット性能が必要とされて 、る。 [0014] Further, in the electromagnetic wave shielding film as described above, near infrared cut performance is an important required characteristic for the purpose of preventing malfunction of the remote control. In recent years, the generation of near-infrared light has increased with the increase in PDP brightness. Cutting performance is required.
この近赤外カット機能を付与するために、その機能を有するフィルムを電磁波シー ルド膜と貼り合わせるなどの方法が考えられるが、電磁波シールド膜が上記のように 断続的なものである限り、近赤外カット機能を有するフィルムもまた、断続的にしカゝ利 用されない欠点を抱えている。また近赤外カット機能を有するフィルムは一般的に口 ール状で供給されるため、製作時に材料の損失が発生するという問題点があった。 カロえて、 PDP用途においては、上記の電磁波シールド能、近赤外線カット能にカロ え、反射防止機能が不可欠である。この反射防止機能を有するフィルムまたは機能 膜も、近赤外線カット機能を有するフィルムと同様、ロール状のフィルムとして供給さ れるため、電磁波シールド膜の導電性メッシュが途切れていると、材料に損失が発生 するという問題点があった。  In order to provide this near-infrared cut function, a method such as laminating a film having the function with an electromagnetic shielding film is conceivable. However, as long as the electromagnetic shielding film is intermittent as described above, the near-infrared shielding function may be used. Films having an infrared cut function also have the drawback of being intermittent and not being used. In addition, since a film having a near-infrared cut function is generally supplied in the form of a tool, there is a problem that material loss occurs during production. In PDP applications, anti-reflection functions are indispensable for the above-mentioned electromagnetic wave shielding ability and near infrared ray cutting ability. The film or functional film having the antireflection function is also supplied as a roll-like film like the film having the near-infrared cut function. Therefore, if the conductive mesh of the electromagnetic wave shielding film is interrupted, the material is lost. There was a problem of doing.
[0015] (密着強度の問題) [0015] (Adhesion strength problem)
前述のように、 PDPに電磁波シールド機能を付与する手段は、電磁波シールド膜 を画像表示パネルに接着剤を利用して貼り合わせる、ガラスやプラスチックシート、プ ラスチックフィルムなどの基材を有する PDP用光学フィルターに電磁波シールド膜を 貼り合わせる、などの方法が採られる。電磁波シールド膜をガラスやプラスチックに貼 り合わせる場合、接着剤が利用されるが、従来、写真フィルムにおいては、このような 接着剤によってガラスやプラスチックへの貼り合せを行う用途が極めて少な力つた。 更に、従来、写真フィルムで利用されている支持体面をガラスに貼り合せた場合、貼 り合せ面の剥離強度が不足し、経時で剥れが生じる問題があることが判明した。  As described above, the means for imparting the electromagnetic wave shielding function to the PDP is an optical for PDP having a base material such as glass, plastic sheet, or plastic film, in which the electromagnetic wave shielding film is bonded to the image display panel using an adhesive. A method such as attaching an electromagnetic shielding film to the filter is used. When an electromagnetic wave shielding film is bonded to glass or plastic, an adhesive is used. Conventionally, a photographic film has been very rarely used for bonding to glass or plastic with such an adhesive. Furthermore, it has been found that when the support surface conventionally used in photographic film is bonded to glass, the peel strength of the bonded surface is insufficient and peeling occurs over time.
[0016] 本発明は、かかる事情に鑑みなされたものであり、本発明の目的は、シールド材料 のロスが少なく生産性を向上させ、安価に大量に、連続メッシュパターンを形成した 透光性電磁波シールド膜を提供することにある。 [0016] The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the productivity with a small loss of the shielding material, and to form a continuous mesh pattern in a large amount at a low cost. It is to provide a shielding film.
また、第 2の目的は、感光材料から得られる電磁波シールドフィルムのガラス基材な どへの接着性 (剥離強度)に優れた電磁波シールドフィルムを提供することである。 本発明のさらなる目的は、感光材料を現像して得られる導電性膜上の未露光部に 現像銀が実質的に形成しない、即ちカプリを生じることのない、易接着層を有する感 光材料、及び、電磁波シールドフィルムを提供することである。 さらに本発明の別目的は、高い電磁波シールド性と高い近赤外線カット性能が両 立した透光性電磁波シールド膜を提供することである。 A second object is to provide an electromagnetic wave shielding film having excellent adhesion (peeling strength) to an glass shielding substrate or the like of an electromagnetic wave shielding film obtained from a photosensitive material. A further object of the present invention is to provide a light-sensitive material having an easy-adhesion layer in which developed silver is not substantially formed in an unexposed portion on a conductive film obtained by developing the light-sensitive material, that is, no capri is formed. And it is providing an electromagnetic wave shielding film. Furthermore, another object of the present invention is to provide a translucent electromagnetic shielding film having both high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near-infrared cut performance.
また、本発明のさらなる目的は、高い電磁波シールド性と高い近赤外線カット性能 を有する光学フィルターおよびプラズマディスプレイを提供することである。  Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical filter and a plasma display having high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near infrared cut performance.
課題を解決するための手段 Means for solving the problem
上記課題は、以下の発明により解決された。  The above problems have been solved by the following invention.
すなわち、本発明の第一の導電性膜の製造方法は、支持体上に銀塩を含有する 銀塩乳剤層を有する感光フィルムを露光して現像処理する現像工程を含む導電性 膜の製造方法であって、  That is, the first method for producing a conductive film of the present invention is a method for producing a conductive film comprising a developing step of exposing and developing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support. Because
さらに、前記感光フィルムの表面に還元剤を接触させる還元処理工程と、 前記感光フィルムを平滑ィ匕する平滑ィ匕処理工程とを有する。ここで、還元処理と平 滑化処理の順番は、還元処理後に平滑化処理を行ってもよぐ平滑化処理後に還元 処理を行ってもよい。  Furthermore, it has the reduction process process which makes a reducing agent contact the surface of the said photosensitive film, and the smoothness process process which smoothes the said photosensitive film. Here, regarding the order of the reduction process and the smoothing process, the reduction process may be performed after the smoothing process or the smoothing process may be performed after the reduction process.
また、本発明の第二の導電性膜の製造方法は、支持体上に銀塩を含有する銀塩 乳剤層を有する感光フィルムを露光して現像処理することにより金属銀部を形成する 現像工程と、  In addition, the second method for producing a conductive film of the present invention includes a step of exposing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support to develop a metallic silver portion by developing. When,
前記金属銀部の表面に還元剤を接触させる還元処理工程と、  A reduction treatment step of bringing a reducing agent into contact with the surface of the metallic silver part;
前記還元処理が施された感光フィルムを平滑化する平滑化処理工程と、を有する。 上記本発明の第一及び第二の導電性膜の製造方法によれば、得られる導電性膜 の電気抵抗を低減することができる。なお、導電性膜の電気抵抗を低減できる理由 は定かではないが、本発明の製造方法では、導電性膜上に形成される導電性金属( 金属銀または電解メツキ処理により形成される銅など)の表面に、製造工程中にでき た酸化物や硫化物を還元することができ、この結果、電気抵抗を低減できたと推察さ れる。なお、本発明の製造方法においては、平滑ィ匕処理を行わずに、還元処理のみ を実施してもよいが、平滑化処理および還元処理を併用することで、導電性膜の電 気抵抗を十分に低減することができる。  And a smoothing treatment step of smoothing the photosensitive film subjected to the reduction treatment. According to the first and second methods for producing a conductive film of the present invention, the electrical resistance of the obtained conductive film can be reduced. The reason why the electrical resistance of the conductive film can be reduced is not clear, but in the manufacturing method of the present invention, a conductive metal (such as metallic silver or copper formed by electrolytic plating) formed on the conductive film It is assumed that the oxides and sulfides produced during the manufacturing process could be reduced on the surface of the metal, and as a result, the electrical resistance could be reduced. In the manufacturing method of the present invention, only the reduction treatment may be performed without performing the smoothing treatment, but the electrical resistance of the conductive film can be reduced by using the smoothing treatment and the reduction treatment in combination. It can be sufficiently reduced.
また、本発明の第一及び第二の導電性膜の製造方法においては、前記平滑化処 理がカレンダー処理であり、カレンダー処理が線圧力 1960N/cm (200kgf/cm)以上 で行われることが好ましい。 In the first and second conductive film production methods of the present invention, the smoothing process is a calendar process, and the calendar process is a linear pressure of 1960 N / cm (200 kgf / cm) or more. Is preferably carried out.
また、本発明の第一及び第二の導電性膜の製造方法では、還元剤がアルカリ水溶 液であること、前記還元剤がソジゥム トリァセトキシボロハイドライド、ジメチルアミンボ ラン又は水素化ホウ素ナトリウムであることが好ましい。  In the first and second conductive film production methods of the present invention, the reducing agent is an alkaline aqueous solution, and the reducing agent is sodium triacetoxyborohydride, dimethylamine borane or sodium borohydride. Preferably there is.
本発明の第二の導電性膜の製造方法においては、前記金属銀部が Agを 50〜: LO 0質量%含有することが好ましい。このような形態の場合には、金属銀部には物理現 像および/またはめつき処理が実質的に施されていなくてもよい。なお、金属銀部に 対して物理現像および/またはめつき処理を行わな!/ヽ場合には、電気抵抗を低減す ることが難しいが、本発明では、還元処理及び Z又は平滑ィ匕処理が行われることから 、このような場合にも十分に電気抵抗を低減することができる。また、電気抵抗を十分 に低減する観点からは、金属銀部に電気めつき処理が施される電解メツキ処理工程 をさらに有してもよぐ電解めつき処理が、 10段以下のめっき浴を用いて行われること が好ましい。  In the second method for producing a conductive film of the present invention, the metal silver part preferably contains 50 to: LO 0% by mass of Ag. In the case of such a form, the physical image and / or the staking process may not be substantially applied to the metal silver part. Note that it is difficult to reduce the electrical resistance when physical development and / or tacking processing is not performed on the metallic silver part. However, in the present invention, reduction processing and Z or smoothing processing are performed. Therefore, the electrical resistance can be sufficiently reduced even in such a case. In addition, from the viewpoint of sufficiently reducing the electrical resistance, the electrolytic plating process may further include an electrolytic plating process in which the metallic silver part is subjected to an electrolytic plating process. It is preferable to be used.
本発明の第二の導電性膜の製造方法においては、還元処理に代えて、又は還元 処理にさらにカ卩えて、金属銀部が銀イオン配位子で処理されて 、ることが好ま 、。 この処理を施すことで、さらに十分に電気抵抗を低減できる。  In the second method for producing a conductive film of the present invention, it is preferable that the metallic silver portion is treated with a silver ion ligand instead of the reduction treatment or in addition to the reduction treatment. By performing this treatment, the electrical resistance can be further sufficiently reduced.
また、本発明は、支持体上にメッシュ状の金属銀部を形成してなる透光性電磁波シ 一ルド膜であって、前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が Agを 50〜: L00質量%含有する線 幅が 18 μ m以下の金属銀細線が開口率 85%以上のメッシュ状に組み合わされてな る金属銀部であり、かつ、前記シールド膜が表面抵抗値が 5 Ω /sq以下で、長手方 向に前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が 3m以上連続し、かつ前記メッシュ状の金属銀部の 断線が 10箇所/ m2以下であるシールド膜であることを特徴とする透光性電磁波シー ルド膜にもある。この透光性電磁波シールド膜は、光の透過によって生じるヘイズが 1 0%以下であることが好ましい。このような透光性電磁波シールド膜は、上記本発明 の第一及び第二の導電性膜の製造方法により製造された導電性膜を用いて製造す ることがでさる。 Further, the present invention is a translucent electromagnetic shielding film formed by forming a mesh-shaped metallic silver portion on a support, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion contains 50 to L00% by mass of Ag. A metallic silver portion in which metallic silver wires having a line width of 18 μm or less are combined in a mesh shape with an aperture ratio of 85% or more, and the shield film has a surface resistance of 5 Ω / sq or less, A translucent electromagnetic wave sheet characterized in that it is a shield film in which the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is continuous for 3 m or more in the longitudinal direction and the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is disconnected at 10 locations / m 2 or less. It is also in the film. The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film preferably has a haze generated by light transmission of 10% or less. Such a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film can be manufactured using the conductive film manufactured by the manufacturing method of the first and second conductive films of the present invention.
また、本発明は、上記透光性電磁波シールド膜を用いて製造された、プラズマディ スプレイパネル用透光性電磁波シールド膜、光学フィルター、またはプラズマデイス プレイパネルにもある。 The present invention also provides a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film for a plasma display panel, an optical filter, or a plasma display manufactured using the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film. There is also a play panel.
また、本発明は、以下の形態としてもよい。  Moreover, the present invention may be in the following forms.
1) 支持体上にメッシュ状の金属銀部を形成してなる透光性電磁波シールド膜で あって、前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が Agを 50〜: LOO質量%含有する線幅が 18 m 以下の金属銀細線が開口率 85%以上のメッシュ状に組み合わされてなる金属銀部 であり、かつ、前記シールド膜が表面抵抗値が 5 Ω /sq以下で、長手方向に前記メッ シュ状の金属銀部が 3m以上連続し、かつ前記メッシュ状の金属銀部の断線が 10箇 所/ m2以下であるシールド膜であることを特徴とする透光性電磁波シールド膜。 1) A translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film in which a mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is formed on a support, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion has a line width of 18 m containing 50 to Ag LOO. The following metallic silver wire is a metallic silver part that is combined in a mesh shape with an aperture ratio of 85% or more, and the shield film has a surface resistance value of 5 Ω / sq or less, and the mesh-like shape in the longitudinal direction. A translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film characterized in that the metallic silver part is a shielding film having a continuous length of 3 m or more, and the mesh-shaped metallic silver part has a break of 10 places / m 2 or less.
2)ヘイズが 10%以下であることを特徴とする上記 1)に記載の透光性電磁波シー ルド膜。  2) The translucent electromagnetic shielding film as described in 1) above, wherein the haze is 10% or less.
3)前記メッシュ状の金属銀部には、物理現像および/またはめつき処理が実質的に 施されて ヽな ヽことを特徴とする上記 1)または 2)に記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜  3) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in 1) or 2) above, wherein the mesh-like metallic silver part is substantially subjected to physical development and / or squeezing treatment.
4)前記メッシュ状の金属銀部に、電気めつき処理が施されていることを特徴とする 上記 1)または 2)に記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。 4) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in 1) or 2) above, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver part is subjected to an electrical plating process.
5)前記電気めつき処理力 10段以下のめっき浴での処理であることを特徴とする 上記 4)に記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  5) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in 4) above, wherein the electroplating treatment power is a treatment in a plating bath having 10 steps or less.
6)カレンダー処理が施されて 、ることを特徴とする上記 1)〜5)の 、ずれかに記載 の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  6) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in any one of 1) to 5) above, which is subjected to a calendar treatment.
7)前記カレンダー処理力 線圧力 1960NZcm (200kgf/cm)以上で行われたこ とを特徴とする上記 6)に記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  7) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in 6) above, wherein the calendering force is performed at a linear pressure of 1960 NZcm (200 kgf / cm) or more.
8)前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が還元剤で処理されて 、ることを特徴とする上記 1) 〜7)の 、ずれかに記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  8) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in any one of 1) to 7) above, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is treated with a reducing agent.
9)前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が銀イオン配位子で処理されて 、ることを特徴とする 上記 1)〜8)の 、ずれかに記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  9) The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film as described in any one of 1) to 8) above, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is treated with a silver ion ligand.
10)上記 1)〜9)の 、ずれかに記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜を含んでなることを 特徴とするプラズマディスプレイパネル用透光性電磁波シールド膜。  10) A translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film for plasma display panels, comprising the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film described in any one of 1) to 9) above.
11)上記 1)〜9)の 、ずれかに記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜を含んでなることを 特徴とする光学フィルター。 11) The light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film described in any one of 1) to 9) above is included. Features optical filter.
12)上記 1)〜9)の 、ずれかに記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜を有するプラズマ ディスプレイパネル。 発明の効果  12) A plasma display panel having the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film described in any one of 1) to 9) above. The invention's effect
[0018] 本発明によれば、導電性膜の電気抵抗を十分に低減できる導電性膜の製造方法 を提供できる。また、本発明によれば、シールド材料のロスが少なく生産性を向上さ せ、安価に大量に、連続メッシュパターンを形成した透光性電磁波シールド膜を提供 することができる。  [0018] According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for producing a conductive film that can sufficiently reduce the electrical resistance of the conductive film. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film in which a continuous mesh pattern is formed in a large amount at a low cost by improving the productivity with little loss of the shielding material.
また、感光材料から得られる電磁波シールドフィルムのガラス基材などへの接着性( 剥離強度)に優れた電磁波シールドフィルムを提供することができる。  Moreover, the electromagnetic wave shielding film excellent in the adhesiveness (peeling strength) to the glass substrate etc. of the electromagnetic wave shielding film obtained from a photosensitive material can be provided.
さらにまた、感光材料を現像して得られる導電性膜上の未露光部に現像銀が実質 的に形成しない、即ちカプリを生じることのない、易接着層を有する感光材料、及び、 電磁波シールドフィルムを提供することができる。  Furthermore, a photosensitive material having an easy-adhesion layer in which developed silver is not substantially formed in an unexposed portion on a conductive film obtained by developing the photosensitive material, that is, no capri is formed, and an electromagnetic wave shielding film Can be provided.
カロえて、高 ヽ電磁波シールド性と高 、近赤外線カット性能が両立した透光性電磁 波シールド膜を提供することができ、高 ヽ電磁波シールド性と高 ヽ近赤外線カット性 能を有する光学フィルターおよびプラズマディスプレイを提供することができる。  It is possible to provide a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film having both high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near infrared cut performance, and an optical filter having high electromagnetic shielding properties and high near infrared cut performance and A plasma display can be provided.
したがって本発明によれば、優れた生産性、低コスト性を有し、カプリが発生せず、 高 ヽ電磁波シールド性を有する透光性電磁波シールド膜、これを用いた光学フィル ターおよびプラズマディスプレイパネルを提供することができる。  Therefore, according to the present invention, a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film having excellent productivity, low cost, no generation of capri, and high electromagnetic wave shielding properties, an optical filter and a plasma display panel using the same Can be provided.
図面の簡単な説明  Brief Description of Drawings
[0019] [図 1]電解めつき処理に好適に用いられる電解めつき槽の一例を示す模式図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of an electroplating bath suitably used for electroplating treatment.
[図 2]本発明の導電性膜の製造方法により得られる導電性膜の一例を示す模式図で ある。  FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a conductive film obtained by the method for producing a conductive film of the present invention.
符号の説明  Explanation of symbols
[0020] 10 電解めつき槽 [0020] 10 Electrolytic bath
11 めっき浴  11 Plating bath
12a, 12b 給電ローラ  12a, 12b Feed roller
13 アノード板 14 ガイドローラー 13 Anode plate 14 Guide roller
16 フィルム  16 films
17 液切ローラー  17 Liquid roller
21 導電性膜  21 Conductive film
22 導電性機能層  22 Conductive functional layer
23 支持体  23 Support
24 露光部 (金属銀部)  24 Exposure part (Metal silver part)
25 未露光部  25 Unexposed area
26 電解めつき処理部  26 Electrolytic plating section
27 電解めつき処理部  27 Electrolytic plating section
28 ハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤層  28 Halogen silver emulsion layer
発明を実施するための最良の形態  BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0021] 本明細書で、「連続メッシュパターン」等における「メッシュ」とは、当業界の用例にし たがって複数の細線力 なる網目パターンまたは複数の細線力 なる網を指す。 連続メッシュパターンとは、細線が実質的に切断されてなく(10箇所/ m2以下)、長 距離に亘つて連続して 、るパターンであって、貼り合わせる対象物のサイズに合わせ て任意の位置で裁断'製作ができるので透光性電磁波シールド膜の生産性が高い。 また、「導電性膜 (電磁波シールドに使用する場合には、電磁波シールド膜と呼ぶ) 」はフィルム状の支持体に担持されているので、積層される他の構成要素 (構成フィ ルム)との混乱がな 、限り「電磁波シールドフィルム」又は単に「フィルム」と呼ぶことも ある。 In this specification, “mesh” in “continuous mesh pattern” or the like refers to a mesh pattern having a plurality of fine line forces or a net having a plurality of fine line forces according to an example in the art. A continuous mesh pattern is a pattern in which fine lines are not substantially cut (10 locations / m 2 or less) and is continuous over a long distance. High productivity of translucent electromagnetic shielding film because it can be cut at the position. In addition, since the “conductive film (referred to as an electromagnetic wave shielding film when used for electromagnetic wave shielding)” is carried on a film-like support, it is not connected to other components (component film) to be laminated. As long as there is no confusion, it is sometimes called “electromagnetic wave shielding film” or simply “film”.
[0022] [透光性電磁波シールド膜の構成]  [0022] [Configuration of translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film]
(各層の厚みの概要)  (Outline of each layer thickness)
本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜における支持体の厚さは、 200 m以下であり 、 20〜180 /ζ πιであることが好ましぐ 50〜 120 mであることがさらに好ましい。 10 〜200 mの範囲であれば所望の可視光の透過率が得られ、かつ取り扱いも容易 である。  The thickness of the support in the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is 200 m or less, preferably 20 to 180 / ζ πι, more preferably 50 to 120 m. If it is in the range of 10 to 200 m, a desired visible light transmittance can be obtained, and handling is easy.
[0023] 金属銀部の形成方法は、とくに制限されないが、銀塩を含む感光材料 (フィルム状 に加工されている場合には、感光フィルム)を現像する方法により形成することが最も 有利であるので、以下の記載は銀塩を含む感光材料を現像する方法を採用した場 合について説明する。金属銀部の厚さは、支持体上に塗布される銀塩含有層用塗 料 (銀塩乳剤)の塗布厚みに応じて適宜決定することができる。金属銀部の厚さは、 3 0 μ m以下であることが好ましぐ 20 μ m以下であることがより好ましぐ 0. 01〜9 μ m であることがさらに好ましぐ 0. 05〜5 /ζ πιであることが最も好ましい。また、金属銀部 はパターン状であることが好ましい。金属銀部は 1層でもよぐ 2層以上の重層構成で あってもよい。金属銀部がパターン状であり、かつ 2層以上の重層構成である場合、 異なる波長に感光できるように、異なる感色性を付与することができる。これにより、露 光波長を変えて露光すると、各層において異なるパターンを形成することができる。こ のようにして形成された多層構造のパターン状金属銀部を含む透光性電磁波シール ド膜は、高密度なプリント配線板として利用することができる。 [0023] The method for forming the metallic silver portion is not particularly limited, but a photosensitive material containing a silver salt (film-like) In the case of being processed, it is most advantageous to form the photosensitive film) by a developing method. Therefore, the following description explains the case where a method of developing a photosensitive material containing a silver salt is adopted. The thickness of the metallic silver portion can be appropriately determined according to the coating thickness of the silver salt-containing layer coating (silver salt emulsion) coated on the support. The thickness of the metallic silver part is preferably 30 μm or less, more preferably 20 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.01 to 9 μm. Most preferred is ~ 5 / ζ πι. Moreover, it is preferable that a metallic silver part is pattern shape. The metallic silver part may be a single layer or a multilayer structure of two or more layers. When the metallic silver part is patterned and has a multilayer structure of two or more layers, different color sensitivities can be imparted so that it can be exposed to different wavelengths. As a result, when the exposure wavelength is changed for exposure, different patterns can be formed in each layer. The translucent electromagnetic shielding film including the patterned metal silver portion having a multilayer structure formed as described above can be used as a high-density printed wiring board.
[0024] 金属銀部の厚さは、ディスプレイの電磁波シールド膜の用途としては、薄 、ほどディ スプレイの視野角が広がるため好ましい。さらに、導電性配線材料の用途としては、 高密度化の要請力 薄膜ィ匕が要求される。このような観点から、金属銀部の厚さは、 9 μ m未満であることが好ましぐ 0. 1 m以上 5 μ m未満であることがより好ましぐ 0 . 以上 3 m未満であることがさらに好ましい。 [0024] The thickness of the metallic silver part is preferable for use as an electromagnetic wave shielding film of a display because the viewing angle of the display becomes wider as it is thinner. In addition, as a use for conductive wiring materials, demand for high density thin film is required. From this point of view, the thickness of the metallic silver part is preferably less than 9 μm, more preferably 0.1 m or more and less than 5 μm, and more preferably 0.3 or more and less than 3 m. More preferably.
本発明では、上述した銀塩含有層の塗布厚みをコントロールすることにより所望の 厚さの金属銀部を形成し、さらに物理現像及び Z又はめつき処理により導電性金属 粒子からなる層の厚みを自在にコントロールできるため、 5 μ m未満、好ましくは 3 μ m未満の厚みを有する透光性電磁波シールド膜であっても容易に形成することがで きる。  In the present invention, a metal silver portion having a desired thickness is formed by controlling the coating thickness of the above-described silver salt-containing layer, and the thickness of the layer made of conductive metal particles is further reduced by physical development and Z or staking treatment. Since it can be freely controlled, even a translucent electromagnetic shielding film having a thickness of less than 5 μm, preferably less than 3 μm can be easily formed.
[0025] なお、従来のエッチングを用いた方法では、金属薄膜の大部分をエッチングで除 去、廃棄する必要があつたが、本発明では必要な量だけの導電性金属を含むパター ンを支持体上に設けることができるため、必要最低限の金属量だけを用いればよぐ 製造コストの削減及び金属廃棄物の量の削減という両面から利点がある。  [0025] In the conventional method using etching, most of the metal thin film needs to be removed by etching and discarded, but the present invention supports a pattern containing a necessary amount of conductive metal. Since it can be provided on the body, it is sufficient to use only the minimum amount of metal, which is advantageous in terms of both reducing manufacturing costs and reducing the amount of metal waste.
[0026] 図 2に本発明の導電性膜の一例を示す。図 2に示す導電性膜 21は支持体 23上に 導電性機能層 22を有する。導電性機能層 22はハロゲン化銀乳剤層 28を含有して いる。例えば、露光部 24に露光'現像処理等を行うことにより、金属銀部を形成する ことができ、さらに導電性を高めるため、電解めつきを施すことにより導電性金属部を 形成することができる。なお、一例として、電解めつき処理部 26に Cuを電解めつきし 、電解めつき処理部 27に Niを電解めつきする態様などがある。未露光部 25は光透 過性部(一例としては、ゼラチンからなるもの)となる。 FIG. 2 shows an example of the conductive film of the present invention. A conductive film 21 shown in FIG. 2 has a conductive functional layer 22 on a support 23. The conductive functional layer 22 contains a silver halide emulsion layer 28. Yes. For example, a metal silver portion can be formed by performing exposure 'development processing or the like on the exposed portion 24, and a conductive metal portion can be formed by applying electrolytic plating in order to further increase the conductivity. . As an example, there is a mode in which Cu is electrolytically attached to the electrolytic plating treatment part 26 and Ni is electrolytically attached to the electrolytic plating treatment part 27. The unexposed part 25 becomes a light-transmitting part (for example, made of gelatin).
[0027] [易接着層] [0027] [Adhesive layer]
本発明の好ま ヽ易接着層につ ヽて説明する。易接着層は 1層で構成されて 、て もよぐ 2層以上で構成されていてもよい。  The preferred adhesive layer of the present invention will be described. The easy adhesion layer is composed of one layer, and may be composed of two or more layers.
本発明において、支持体の金属銀部が設けられない側の表面には、下記のような 二層構成の易接着層が設けることが好ましい。  In the present invention, it is preferable to provide an easy-adhesion layer having the following two-layer structure on the surface of the support on which the metallic silver portion is not provided.
(組成)  (Composition)
一層目:水分散性あるいは水溶性合成樹脂、カルポジイミド化合物および導電性 金属酸化物粒子を必須成分とした帯電防止層  First layer: antistatic layer comprising water-dispersible or water-soluble synthetic resin, carpositimide compound and conductive metal oxide particles as essential components
二層目:水分散性あるいは水溶性合成樹脂、および架橋剤を必須成分とした表面 層(他の構成層と積層することによって表面層ではなくなるが、易接着層の最上層と いう意味)  Second layer: Surface layer containing water-dispersible or water-soluble synthetic resin and cross-linking agent as essential components (It is not the surface layer when laminated with other constituent layers, but it means the top layer of the easy-adhesion layer)
易接着層は、支持体上に帯電防止層と表面層がこの順で設けられる。本発明にお ける帯電防止層においては、支持体上に帯電防止層を設けて得られる低帯電性支 持体のヘイズが 3%以下にあり、そして得られる感材の表面層の表面電気抵抗が 8 X 106〜6 Χ 108 Ωの範囲にあるように、導電性が付与されている。帯電防止層を付与 することで、プラスチック支持体をノヽンドリングする製造プロセスにお 、て発生する静 電気起因のゴミ付き故障の発生、および感光材料のスタチック放電カプリの発生を抑 ff¾することができる。 The easy adhesion layer is provided with an antistatic layer and a surface layer in this order on a support. In the antistatic layer of the present invention, the haze of the low charge support obtained by providing the antistatic layer on the support is 3% or less, and the surface electrical resistance of the surface layer of the resulting photosensitive material The conductivity is imparted so that is in the range of 8 X 10 6 to 6 Χ 10 8 Ω. By providing the antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrostatic trouble due to static electricity and the occurrence of static discharge capri of the photosensitive material in the manufacturing process in which the plastic support is knocked. .
なお本明細書でいうヘイズは、 25°C, 60%RHの測定条件において、ヘイズメータ 一(NDH2000、 日本電色製)を用い、 JIS K— 7105に従って測定した値である。  The haze in the present specification is a value measured according to JIS K-7105 using a haze meter (NDH2000, Nippon Denshoku) under the measurement conditions of 25 ° C. and 60% RH.
[0028] 上記帯電防止層は、導電性金属酸化物粒子を含む層であり、一般に更に結合剤 を含んでいる。上記導電性金属酸ィ匕物粒子としては、針状粒子であり、その短軸に 対する長軸の比 (長軸 Z短軸)が 3〜50の範囲にあるものを使用することが好ましい 。特に長軸 Z短軸が 10〜50の範囲のものが好ましい。このような針状粒子の短軸は 、 0. 001〜0. の範囲にあること力 S好ましく、特に 0. 01〜0. 02 /z mの範囲に あることが好ましい。またその長軸は、 0. 1〜5. O /z mの範囲にあることが好ましぐ 特に 0. 1〜2. O /z mの範囲にあることが好ましい。 [0028] The antistatic layer is a layer containing conductive metal oxide particles, and generally further contains a binder. The conductive metal oxide particles are preferably needle-like particles having a major axis to minor axis ratio (major axis Z minor axis) in the range of 3 to 50. . In particular, those having a major axis Z minor axis in the range of 10 to 50 are preferred. The minor axis of such acicular particles is preferably in the range of 0.001 to 0.0, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.01 to 0.02 / zm. The major axis is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 5. O / zm, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.1 to 2. O / zm.
[0029] 上記導電性金属酸化物粒子の材料としては、 ZnO、 TiO 、 SnO 、 Al O、 In O [0029] Materials for the conductive metal oxide particles include ZnO, TiO2, SnO, AlO, InO.
2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
、 MgO、 BaO及び MoO 及びこれらの複合酸化物、そしてこれらの金属酸化物に MgO, BaO and MoO and their complex oxides, and their metal oxides
3  Three
更に異種原子を含む金属酸ィ匕物を挙げることができる。金属酸ィ匕物としては、 SnO  Furthermore, metal oxides containing different atoms can be mentioned. For metal oxides, SnO
2 2
、ZnO、A1 0 、TiO 、 In O、及び MgOが好ましぐさらに SnO、 ZnO、 In O 及 ZnO, A10, TiO, InO, and MgO are preferred and SnO, ZnO, InO and
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 び TiOが好ましぐ SnOが特に好ましい。異種原子を少量含む例としては、 ZnOに SnO is particularly preferred, with 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 and TiO being preferred. As an example containing a small amount of different atoms, ZnO
2 2 twenty two
対して A1あるいは In、 TiOに対して Nbあるいは Ta、 In O に対して Sn、及び SnO  In contrast, A1 or In, Nb or Ta for TiO, Sn for In O, and SnO
2 2 3 2 に対して Sb、 Nbあるいはハロゲン元素などの異種元素を 0. 01〜30モル0 /0 (好まし くは 0. 1〜10モル0 /0)ドープしたものを挙げることができる。異種元素の添加量が、 0 . 01モル%未満の場合は酸化物または複合酸化物に充分な導電性を付与すること ができず、 30モル%を超えると粒子の黒ィ匕度が増し、帯電防止層が黒ずむため感光 材料 (以下感材ともいう)用としては適さない。従って、本発明では導電性金属酸ィ匕 物粒子の材料としては、金属酸ィ匕物または複合金属酸ィ匕物に対し異種元素を少量 含むものが好ましい。また結晶構造中に酸素欠陥を含むものも好ましい。上記異種 原子を少量含む導電性金属酸ィ匕物粒子としては、アンチモンがドープされた SnO 2 2 3 Sb to two, different kinds of elements such as Nb or a halogen element from 0.01 to 30 mole 0/0 (rather preferably 1 to 10 mol 0/0 0.) can be mentioned those doped . When the amount of the different element added is less than 0.01 mol%, sufficient conductivity cannot be imparted to the oxide or composite oxide, and when it exceeds 30 mol%, the blackness of the particles increases. Since the antistatic layer darkens, it is not suitable for photosensitive materials (hereinafter also referred to as photosensitive materials). Therefore, in the present invention, the material of the conductive metal oxide particles is preferably a material containing a small amount of different elements with respect to the metal oxide or the composite metal oxide. Also preferred are those containing an oxygen defect in the crystal structure. Examples of the conductive metal oxide particles containing a small amount of different atoms include SnO doped with antimony.
2 粒子が好ましぐ特にアンチモンが 0. 2〜2. 0モル%ドープされた SnO粒子が好ま  2 Particles are preferred, especially SnO particles doped with 0.2 to 2.0 mol% of antimony
2  2
しい。従って、本発明では前記短軸、長軸の寸法を有するアンチモンドープ SnO等  That's right. Accordingly, in the present invention, antimony-doped SnO having the dimensions of the short axis and the long axis
2 の金属酸ィ匕物粒子を使用することが、透明で、良好な導電性を有する帯電防止層を 形成するのに有利である。これにより、ヘイズが 3%以下にある低帯電性支持体を有 し、表面層の表面電気抵抗が 8 X 106〜6 Χ 108 Ωの範囲にある感材を容易に得るこ とがでさる。 The use of 2 metal oxide particles is advantageous for forming an antistatic layer that is transparent and has good electrical conductivity. As a result, it is possible to easily obtain a light-sensitive material having a low chargeable support having a haze of 3% or less and having a surface electrical resistance of 8 × 10 6 to 6 Χ 10 8 Ω. Monkey.
[0030] 前記短軸、長軸の寸法を有する針状の金属酸化物粒子 (例、アンチモンドープ Sn O )を使用することにより、透明で、良好な導電性を有する帯電防止層を有利に形 [0030] By using acicular metal oxide particles (for example, antimony-doped Sn 2 O 3) having the short axis and long axis dimensions, a transparent antistatic layer having good conductivity is advantageously formed.
2 2
成できる理由については、次のように考えられる。上記針状の金属酸化物粒子は、帯 電防止層内では、長軸方向が帯電防止層の表面に平行に、長く伸びているが、層の 厚さ方向には短軸の径の長さ分だけ占めて 、るに過ぎな、、。このような針状の金属 酸ィ匕物粒子は、上記のように長軸方向に長いため、通常の球状の粒子に比べて、互 いに接触し易ぐ少ない量でも高い導電性が得られる。従って、透明性を損なうことな ぐ表面電気抵抗を低下させることができる。また、上記針状の金属酸化物粒子では 、短軸の径は、通常、帯電防止層の厚さより小さいか、ほぼ同じであり、表面に突出 することは少なぐ仮に突出してもその突出部分はわず力なため、帯電防止層上に設 けられる表面層によりほぼ完全に覆われることになる。従って、感材作成用の支持体 の搬送中、露光、現像のための感材搬送中に、層より突出部分の脱離である粉落ち の発生がほとんどないとの優位性も得られる。さらに、感材の現像処理前後の表面電 気抵抗の変化が、球状の粒子の場合比較的大きいのに比べて、上記針状の金属酸 化物を用 、た場合は極めて小さく、特に現像処理後の搬送性が格段に向上して 、る ということもできる。これは、球状の粒子の場合には、現像処理による膜の膨潤、収縮 により、針状の粒子の場合よりその配列状態が変化し、互いに接触する部分が減少 するためではな 、かと推測される。 The reasons for this can be considered as follows. The acicular metal oxide particles extend long in the antistatic layer with the long axis direction parallel to the surface of the antistatic layer. It occupies only the length of the short axis diameter in the thickness direction. Since such needle-like metal oxide particles are long in the long axis direction as described above, high conductivity can be obtained even in a small amount that is easy to contact with each other compared to normal spherical particles. . Therefore, the surface electrical resistance can be reduced without impairing transparency. Further, in the above-mentioned acicular metal oxide particles, the minor axis diameter is usually smaller than or substantially the same as the thickness of the antistatic layer, and even if it protrudes slightly on the surface, the protruding portion does not protrude. Since it is weak, it is almost completely covered by the surface layer provided on the antistatic layer. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an advantage that there is almost no occurrence of powder falling which is a detachment of the protruding portion from the layer during the conveyance of the support for preparing the photosensitive material, the photosensitive material for exposure and development. Furthermore, the change in surface electrical resistance before and after the development of the photosensitive material is extremely small when the above-mentioned acicular metal oxide is used, compared to the relatively large case of spherical particles, especially after development processing. It can also be said that the transportability is significantly improved. This is presumably because in the case of spherical particles, the arrangement and state of the particles change due to swelling and shrinkage of the film due to the development process, and the number of parts in contact with each other decreases. .
[0031] 本発明における帯電防止層は、導電性金属酸化物粒子を分散、支持する結合剤 を、一般に含んでいる。結合剤の材料としては、アクリル榭脂、ビュル榭脂、ポリウレ タン榭脂、ポリエステル榭脂等の種々のポリマーを使用することができる。粉落ちを防 止する観点から、ポリマー (好ましくは、アクリル榭脂、ビニル榭脂、ポリウレタン榭脂 又はポリエステル榭脂)とカルポジイミド化合物との硬化物であることが好ましい。本 発明では、良好な作業環境の維持、及び大気汚染防止の観点から、ポリマーもカル ポジイミドィ匕合物も、水溶性のものを使用する力、あるいはェマルジヨン等の水分散 状態で使用することが好ましい。また、ポリマーは、カルポジイミド化合物との架橋反 応が可能なように、メチロール基、水酸基、カルボキシル基及びアミノ基のいずれか の基を有する。水酸基及びカルボキシル基が好ましぐ特にカルボキシル基が好まし い。ポリマー中の水酸基又はカルボキシル基の含有量は、 0. 0001〜: L当量 Zlkg が好ましぐ特に 0. 001〜: L当量 Zlkgが好ましい。  [0031] The antistatic layer in the present invention generally contains a binder for dispersing and supporting the conductive metal oxide particles. As the binder material, various polymers such as acrylic resin, bulle resin, polyurethane resin, and polyester resin can be used. From the viewpoint of preventing powder falling, a cured product of a polymer (preferably acrylic resin, vinyl resin, polyurethane resin or polyester resin) and a carpositimide compound is preferable. In the present invention, from the viewpoints of maintaining a good working environment and preventing air pollution, it is preferable to use both a polymer and a carboxyimide compound in a water-dispersed state such as a water-soluble one or an emulsion. . In addition, the polymer has a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or an amino group so that a cross-linking reaction with the carpositimide compound is possible. A hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferred, and a carboxyl group is particularly preferred. The content of the hydroxyl group or carboxyl group in the polymer is preferably from 0.0001 to L equivalent Zlkg, particularly preferably from 0.001 to L equivalent Zlkg.
[0032] アクリル榭脂としては、アクリル酸、アクリル酸アルキル等のアクリル酸エステル類、 アクリルアミド、アクリロニトリル、メタクリル酸、メタクリル酸アルキル等のメタクリル酸ェ ステル類、メタクリルアミド及びメタタリ口-トリルの 、ずれかのモノマーの単独重合体 又はこれらのモノマー 2種以上の重合により得られる共重合体を挙げることができる。 これらの中では、アクリル酸アルキル等のアクリル酸エステル類、及びメタクリル酸ァ ルキル等のメタクリル酸エステル類のいずれかのモノマーの単独重合体又はこれらの モノマー 2種以上の重合により得られる共重合体が好ましい。例えば、炭素原子数 1 〜6のアルキル基を有するアクリル酸エステル類及びメタクリル酸エステル類のいず れかのモノマーの単独重合体又はこれらのモノマー 2種以上の重合により得られる共 重合体を挙げることができる。上記アクリル榭脂は、上記組成を主成分とし、カルポジ イミドィ匕合物との架橋反応が可能なように、例えば、メチロール基、水酸基、カルボキ シル基及びアミノ基の 、ずれかの基を有するモノマーを一部使用して得られるポリマ 一である。 [0032] Acrylic resin includes acrylic acid esters such as acrylic acid and alkyl acrylate, and methacrylic acid esters such as acrylamide, acrylonitrile, methacrylic acid, and alkyl methacrylate. Examples include stears, methacrylamides, and meta-tallow-tolyl homopolymers of any of the monomers, or copolymers obtained by polymerization of two or more of these monomers. Among these, homopolymers of monomers of acrylic acid esters such as alkyl acrylates and methacrylic acid esters such as alkyl methacrylates, or copolymers obtained by polymerization of two or more of these monomers. Is preferred. For example, homopolymers of monomers of acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters having an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or copolymers obtained by polymerization of two or more of these monomers are listed. be able to. The acrylic resin has, as a main component, a monomer having any group of, for example, a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, and an amino group so that a crosslinking reaction with a carpositimide compound is possible. Is a polymer obtained by partially using
[0033] 上記ビュル榭脂としては、ポリビュルアルコール、酸変性ポリビニルアルコール、ポ リビエノレホノレマーノレ、ポリビュルブチラール、ポリビュルメチルエーテル、ポリオレフィ ン、エチレン Zブタジエン共重合体、ポリ酢酸ビュル、塩化ビニル Z酢酸ビニル共重 合体、塩化ビニル Z (メタ)アクリル酸エステル共重合体及びエチレン Z酢酸ビュル 系共重合体 (好ましくはエチレン Z酢酸ビニル Z (メタ)アクリル酸エステル共重合体) を挙げることができる。これらの中で、ポリビュルアルコール、酸変性ポリビュルアルコ ール、ポリビュルホリマール、ポリオレフイン、エチレン zブタジエン共重合体及びェ チレン Z酢酸ビュル系共重合体 (好ましくは、エチレン Z酢酸ビュル Zアクリル酸ェ ステル共重合体)が好ましい。上記ビニル榭脂は、カルポジイミド化合物との架橋反 応が可能なように、ポリビュルアルコール、酸変性ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビュル ホルマール、ポリビュルプチラール、ポリビュルメチルエーテル及びポリ酢酸ビュルで は、例えば、ビニルアルコール単位をポリマー中に残すことにより水酸基を有するポリ マーとし、他のポリマーについては、例えば、メチロール基、水酸基、カルボキシル基 及びアミノ基のいずれかの基を有するモノマーを一部使用することにより架橋可能な ポリマーとする。  [0033] Examples of the above-mentioned bur resin include polybulu alcohol, acid-modified polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl enore mannole, polybutyral, polybulu methyl ether, polyolefin, ethylene Z butadiene copolymer, polyacetate bur, chloride. Mention of vinyl Z vinyl acetate copolymer, vinyl chloride Z (meth) acrylate copolymer and ethylene Z acetate butyl copolymer (preferably ethylene Z vinyl acetate Z (meth) acrylate copolymer) Can do. Among these, polybulal alcohol, acid-modified polybulal alcohol, polybullymarl, polyolefin, ethylene z butadiene copolymer and ethylene Z butyl acetate copolymer (preferably ethylene Z butyl acetate Z acrylic) Acid ester copolymers) are preferred. The above-mentioned vinyl resin is capable of crosslinking reaction with a carposimide compound, such as polybulal alcohol, acid-modified polyvinyl alcohol, polybul formal, polybulutyl, polybulumethyl ether and polyacetate butyl. A polymer having a hydroxyl group is obtained by leaving an alcohol unit in the polymer. For other polymers, for example, a part of a monomer having a methylol group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or an amino group is used for crosslinking. A possible polymer.
[0034] 上記ポリウレタン榭脂としては、ポリヒドロキシィ匕合物(例、エチレングリコール、プロ ピレンダリコール、グリセリン、トリメチロールプロパン)、ポリヒドロキシ化合物と多塩基 酸との反応により得られる脂肪族ポリエステル系ポリオール、ポリエーテルポリオール (例、ポリ(ォキシプロピレンエーテル)ポリオール、ポリ(ォキシエチレン プロピレン エーテル)ポリオール)、ポリカーボネート系ポリオール、及びポリエチレンテレフタレ ートポリオールの!/、ずれか一種、あるいはこれらの混合物とポリイソシァネートから誘 導されるポリウレタンを挙げることができる。上記ポリウレタン榭脂では、例えば、ポリ オールとポリイソシァネートとの反応後、未反応として残った水酸基をカルポジイミド 化合物との架橋反応が可能な官能基として利用することができる。 [0034] Examples of the polyurethane resin include polyhydroxy compounds (eg, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerin, trimethylolpropane), polyhydroxy compounds and polybasic compounds. Aliphatic polyester polyols obtained by reaction with acids, polyether polyols (eg, poly (oxypropylene ether) polyols, poly (oxyethylene propylene ether) polyols), polycarbonate polyols, and polyethylene terephthalate polyols! /, Mention may be made of one or a mixture of these and polyurethanes derived from polyisocyanates. In the polyurethane resin, for example, the hydroxyl group remaining unreacted after the reaction between polyol and polyisocyanate can be used as a functional group capable of crosslinking reaction with a carpositimide compound.
[0035] 上記ポリエステル榭脂としては、一般にポリヒドロキシィ匕合物(例、エチレングリコー ル、プロピレングリコール、グリセリン、トリメチロールプロパン)と多塩基酸との反応に より得られるポリマーが使用される。上記ポリエステル榭脂では、例えば、ポリオール と多塩基酸との反応終了後、未反応として残った水酸基、カルボキシル基をカルポジ イミドィ匕合物との架橋反応が可能な官能基として利用することができる。勿論、水酸 基等の官能基を有する第三成分を添加してもよ 、。  [0035] As the polyester resin, generally used is a polymer obtained by reacting a polyhydroxy compound (eg, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerin, trimethylolpropane) with a polybasic acid. In the polyester resin, for example, after the reaction between the polyol and the polybasic acid is completed, the unreacted hydroxyl group and carboxyl group can be used as a functional group capable of a crosslinking reaction with the calpositimide compound. Of course, a third component having a functional group such as a hydroxyl group may be added.
[0036] 上記ポリマーの中で、アクリル榭脂及びポリウレタン榭脂が好ましぐ特にアクリル榭 脂が好ましい。  [0036] Among the above polymers, acrylic resin and polyurethane resin are preferable, and acrylic resin is particularly preferable.
[0037] 本発明で使用されるカルポジイミドィ匕合物としては、分子内にカルポジイミド構造を 複数有する化合物を使用することが好まし ヽ。  [0037] As the calpositimide compound used in the present invention, it is preferable to use a compound having a plurality of calpositimide structures in the molecule.
ポリカルポジイミドは、通常、有機ジイソシァネートの縮合反応により合成される。こ こで分子内にカルポジイミド構造を複数有する化合物の合成に用いられる有機ジイソ シァネートの有機基は特に限定されず、芳香族系、脂肪族系のいずれか、あるいは それらの混合系も使用可能であるが、反応性の観点から脂肪族系が特に好ましい。 合成原料としては、有機イソシァネート、有機ジイソシァネート、有機トリイソシァネ ート等が使用される。  Polycarposimide is usually synthesized by a condensation reaction of an organic diisocyanate. Here, the organic group of the organic diisocyanate used for the synthesis of a compound having a plurality of carposimide structures in the molecule is not particularly limited, and either an aromatic group, an aliphatic group, or a mixture thereof can be used. However, an aliphatic type is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of reactivity. As synthetic raw materials, organic isocyanate, organic diisocyanate, organic triisocyanate and the like are used.
有機イソシァネートの例としては、芳香族イソシァネート、脂肪族イソシァネート、及 び、それらの混合物が使用可能である。  As examples of organic isocyanates, aromatic isocyanates, aliphatic isocyanates, and mixtures thereof can be used.
具体的には、 4, 4'ージフエ-ルメタンジイソシァネート、 4, 4ージフエ-ルジメチル メタンジイソシァネート、 1, 4 フエ-レンジイソシァネート、 2, 4 トリレンジイソシァ ネート、 2, 6 トリレンジイソシァネート、へキサメチレンジイソシァネート、シクロへキ サンジイソシァネート、キシリレンジイソシァネート、 2, 2, 4—トリメチルへキサメチレン ジイソシァネート、 4, 4'ージシクロへキシノレメタンジイソシァネート、 1, 3—フエ二レン ジイソシァネート等が用いられ、また、有機モノイソシァネートとしては、イソホロンイソ シァネート、フエ二ルイソシァネート、シクロへキシルイソシァネート、ブチルイソシァネ ート、ナフチルイソシァネート等が使用される。 Specifically, 4,4′-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 4,4-diphenyldimethylmethane diisocyanate, 1,4 phenolic diisocyanate, 2,4 tolylenediisocyanate, 2 , 6 Tolylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, cyclohexane San diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, 2,2,4-trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylenomethane diisocyanate, 1,3-phenylene diisocyanate, etc. As the organic monoisocyanate, isophorone isocyanate, phenyl isocyanate, cyclohexyl isocyanate, butyl isocyanate, naphthyl isocyanate and the like are used.
また、本発明に用いうるカルポジイミド系化合物は、例えば、カルポジライト V— 02 — L2 (商品名:日清紡社製)などの市販品としても入手可能である。  In addition, the calpositimide-based compound that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product such as, for example, calpositrite V-02-L2 (trade name: manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd.).
カルボジイミド系化合物はバインダーに対して 1〜200質量%、より好ましくは 5〜 100 質量%の範囲で添加することが好ま 、。  The carbodiimide compound is preferably added in an amount of 1 to 200% by mass, more preferably 5 to 100% by mass, based on the binder.
[0038] 本発明における帯電防止層を形成するには、まず、例えば前記導電性金属酸化物 粒子をそのままあるいは水等の溶媒 (必要に応じて分散剤、結合剤を含む)に分散さ せた分散液を、上記結合剤(例、ポリマー、カルポジイミドィ匕合物及び適当な添加剤) を含む水分散液あるいは水溶液に、添加、混合 (必要に応じて分散)して帯電防止 層形成用塗布液を調製する。上記帯電防止層は、上記帯電防止層形成用塗布液を ポリエステル等のプラスチックフィルムの表面 (感光層が設けられな 、側)に一般によ く知られた塗布方法、例えばディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート 法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、エタストルージョンコート法などにより塗 布することができる。塗布されるポリエステル等のプラスチックフィルムは、逐次二軸 延伸前、同時二軸延伸前、一軸延伸後で再延伸前、あるいは二軸延伸後のいずれ であってもよ 、。帯電防止層形成用塗布液を塗布するプラスチック支持体の表面は、 あら力じめ紫外線照射処理、コロナ放電処理、グロ一放電処理などの表面処理を施 しておくことが好ましい。  In order to form the antistatic layer in the present invention, first, for example, the conductive metal oxide particles were dispersed as they are or in a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary). The dispersion is added to an aqueous dispersion or aqueous solution containing the binder (eg, polymer, carpositimide compound and appropriate additive), and mixed (dispersed as necessary) to form an antistatic layer-forming coating solution. To prepare. The antistatic layer is formed by applying a coating solution for forming the antistatic layer to a surface of a plastic film such as polyester (on the side where no photosensitive layer is provided), such as a dip coating method or an air knife coating. It can be applied by a method such as a coating method, a curtain coating method, a wire bar coating method, a gravure coating method or an etha trusion coating method. The applied plastic film such as polyester may be before sequential biaxial stretching, before simultaneous biaxial stretching, after uniaxial stretching, before re-stretching, or after biaxial stretching. The surface of the plastic support on which the coating solution for forming the antistatic layer is preferably subjected to surface treatment such as ultraviolet irradiation treatment, corona discharge treatment, and glow discharge treatment.
[0039] 本発明における帯電防止層の層厚は、 0. 01〜1 μ mの範囲が好ましぐさらに 0.  [0039] The thickness of the antistatic layer in the present invention is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 µm.
01-0. 2 /z mの範囲が好ましい。 0. 01 /z m未満では塗布剤を均一に塗布しにくい ため製品に塗布むらが生じやすぐ: L mを超える場合は、帯電防止性能や耐傷性 が劣る場合がある。導電性金属酸化物粒子は、帯電防止層中に、結合剤 (例、上記 ポリマー及びカルポジイミドィ匕合物の合計)に対して 10〜: LOOO質量%の範囲で含ま れていることが好ましぐ更に 100〜500質量%の範囲が好ましい。 10質量%未満の 場合は、充分な帯電防止性が得られず、 1000質量%を超えた場合はヘイズが高く なり過ぎる。 A range of 01-0. 2 / zm is preferred. If it is less than 0.01 / zm, it is difficult to apply the coating agent uniformly, so uneven coating occurs immediately on the product: If it exceeds Lm, the antistatic performance and scratch resistance may be inferior. It is preferable that the conductive metal oxide particles are contained in the antistatic layer in a range of 10 to LOOO% by mass with respect to the binder (for example, the total of the above polymer and carpositimide compound). Furthermore, the range of 100-500 mass% is preferable. Less than 10% by mass In such a case, sufficient antistatic properties cannot be obtained, and if it exceeds 1000% by mass, the haze becomes too high.
[0040] 本発明における帯電防止層および下記の表面層には必要に応じて、マット剤、界 面活性剤、滑り剤などの添加剤を併用して使用することができる。マット剤としては、 0 . 001〜 10 mの粒径をもつ酸化珪素、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウムなどの 酸化物の粒子や、ポリメチルメタタリレート、ポリスチレン等の重合体あるいは共重合 体等の粒子をあげることができる。界面活性剤としては公知のァ-オン系界面活性剤 [0040] In the present invention, the antistatic layer and the following surface layer may be used in combination with additives such as a matting agent, a surface active agent, and a slipping agent, if necessary. Matting agents include particles of oxides such as silicon oxide, aluminum oxide and magnesium oxide having a particle size of 0.001 to 10 m, and particles of polymers or copolymers such as polymethylmethalate and polystyrene. Can give. Known surfactant surfactants as surfactants
、カチオン系界面活性剤、両性系界面活性剤、非イオン系界面活性剤等があげるこ とができる。滑り剤としては、カルナバワックス等の天然ワックス、炭素数 8〜22の高級 アルコールのリン酸エステルもしくはそのアミノ塩;パルミチン酸、ステアリン酸、ベへ ン酸およびそのエステル類;及びシリコーン系化合物等を挙げることができる。 Cationic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants, nonionic surfactants and the like can be mentioned. Examples of slip agents include natural waxes such as carnauba wax, phosphate esters of higher alcohols having 8 to 22 carbon atoms or amino salts thereof, palmitic acid, stearic acid, behenic acid and esters thereof, and silicone compounds. Can be mentioned.
[0041] 本発明においては、帯電防止層の上に表面層が設けられ得る。表面層は、主とし て接着剤層との接着性付与、及び帯電防止層の導電性金属酸化物粒子の脱離防 止機能を補助するために設けられる。表面層の材料には、一般にアクリル榭脂、ビ- ル榭脂、ポリウレタン榭脂、ポリエステル榭脂等の種々のポリマーを使用することがで き、上記帯電防止層中の結合剤として記載したポリマーが好まし 、。 [0041] In the present invention, a surface layer may be provided on the antistatic layer. The surface layer is provided mainly for providing adhesion with the adhesive layer and assisting the anti-detachment function of the conductive metal oxide particles of the antistatic layer. In general, various materials such as acrylic resin, beer resin, polyurethane resin, and polyester resin can be used as the material for the surface layer, and the polymers described as the binder in the antistatic layer can be used. Is preferred.
[0042] 表面層に用いられる架橋剤は、製造プロセス中のロール卷取り形態時にコンタクト する感光材料層の感光特性に影響を与えな 、エポキシィ匕合物が好ま 、。 [0042] The cross-linking agent used for the surface layer is preferably an epoxy compound without affecting the photosensitive properties of the photosensitive material layer to be contacted when the roll is removed in the manufacturing process.
エポキシ化合物としては、 1, 4 ビス(2' , 3 '—エポキシプロピルォキシ)ブタン、 1 , 3, 5 トリグリシジルイソシァヌレート、 1, 3 ジクリシジノレ一 5— ( γ ァセトキシ一 β ォキシプロピル)イソシヌレート、ソルビトールポリグリシジルエーテル類、ポリグリ セロールポリグリシジルエーテル類、ペンタエリスリトールポリグリシジルエーテル類、 ジグリセ口一ノレポリグノレシジノレエーテノレ、 1, 3, 5 トリグリシジル(2 ヒドロキシェチ ル)イソシァヌレート、グリセロールポリグリセロールエーテル類およびトリメチ口—ルプ 口パンポリグリシジルエーテル類等のエポキシィ匕合物が好ましぐその具体的な巿販 品としては、例えばデナコール ΕΧ— 521や EX— 614B (ナガセ化成工業 (株)製)な どを挙げることができるが、これらに限定されるものではない。また、感光特性に影響 を与えない添加量の範囲では、他の架橋性ィ匕合物との併用も可能であり、例えば C. E.K.Meersおよび T.H.James著「The Theory of the Photographic ProcessJ第 3版 (1 966年)、米国特許第 3316095号、同 3232764号、同 3288775号、同 2732303 号、同 3635718号、同 3232763号、同 2732316号、同 2586168号、同 310343 7号、同 3017280号、同 2983611号、同 2725294号、同 2725295号、同 31007 04号、同 3091537号、同 3321313号、同 3543292号及び同 3125449号、並び に英国特許 994869号及び同 1167207号の各明細書等に記載されている硬化剤 などがあげられる。 Examples of the epoxy compound include 1,4 bis (2 ', 3'-epoxypropyloxy) butane, 1,3,5 triglycidyl isocyanurate, 1,3 diglycidinole-5- (γ-acetoxy-1-β-oxypropyl) isosinurate, Sorbitol polyglycidyl ethers, polyglyceryl polyglycidyl ethers, pentaerythritol polyglycidyl ethers, diglycerone polyrenoglycenosidinoatenore, 1, 3, 5 triglycidyl (2 hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerol polyglycerol Epoxy compounds such as ethers and trimethic lip-and-loop polyglycidyl ethers are preferred as specific products such as Denacol ΕΧ-521 and EX- 614B (manufactured by Nagase Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.). However, it is not limited to these Not. In addition, it can be used in combination with other crosslinkable compounds within the range of the addition amount that does not affect the photosensitive properties. EKMeers and THJames, “The Theory of the Photographic ProcessJ 3rd Edition (1966), US Patent Nos. 3316095, 3232764, 3288775, 2732303, 3635718, 3232763, 2732316, No. 2586168, No. 3103437, No. 3017280, No. 2983611, No. 2725294, No. 2725295, No. 3100704, No. 3091537, No. 3321313, No. 3543292, and No. 3125449, and UK patents Examples thereof include curing agents described in each specification of 994869 and 1167207.
代表的な例としては、二個以上 (好ましくは三個以上)のメチロール基およびアルコ キシメチル基の少なくとも一方を含有するメラミンィ匕合物またはそれらの縮重合体で あるメラミン榭脂あるいはメラミン 'ユリア榭脂、さらにはムコクロル酸、ムコブロム酸、ム コフエノキシクロル酸、ムコフエノキシプロム酸、ホルムアルデヒド、グリオキザール、モ ノメチルギリォキザール、 2, 3 ジヒドロキシ 1, 4 ジォキサン、 2, 3 ジヒドロキシ 5—メチルー 1, 4 ジォキサンサクシンアルデヒド、 2, 5 ジメトキシテトラヒドロフラ ン及びダルタルアルデヒド等のアルデヒド系化合物およびその誘導体;ジビニルスル ホン一 N, N' エチレンビス(ビニノレスノレホニノレァセトアミド)、 1, 3 ビス(ビニノレス ルホ-ル)一 2 プロパノール、メチレンビスマレイミド、 5 ァセチルー 1, 3 ジアタリ ロイル一へキサヒドロ一 s トリァジン、 1, 3, 5 トリアタリロイル一へサヒドロ一 s トリ ァジン及び 1, 3, 5 トリビュルスルホ -ル—へキサヒドロ s トリァジンなどの活性 ビュル系化合物; 2, 4 ジクロロ 6 ヒドロキシ— s トリァジンナトリウム塩、 2, 4— ジクロロ一 6— (4—スルホア-リノ)一 s トリァジンナトリウム塩、 2, 4 ジクロロ一 6— (2—スルホェチルァミノ)—s トリァジン及び N, N,—ビス(2—クロロェチルカルバ ミル)ピぺラジン等の活性ハロゲン系化合物;ビス(2, 3 エポキシプロピル)メチルプ 口ピルアンモ-ゥム ·ρ トルエンスルホン酸塩、 2, 4, 6 トリエチレン— s トリアジン 、 1, 6 へキサメチレン一 Ν, Ν,一ビスエチレン尿素およびビス一 β—エチレンイミ ノエチルチオエーテル等のエチレンイミン系化合物; 1 , 2—ジ (メタンスルホンォキシ )ェタン、 1, 4ージ(メタンスルホンォキシ)ブタン及び 1, 5 ジ(メタンスルホンォキシ )ペンタン等のメタンスルホン酸エステル系化合物;ジシクロへキシルカルボジイミド及 び 1 ジシクロへキシル 3— (3 トリメチルァミノプロピル)カルボジイミド塩酸塩等 のカルボジイミド化合物; 2, 5 ジメチルイソォキサゾール等のイソォキサゾール系化 合物;クロム明ばん及び酢酸クロム等の無機系化合物; N—カルボエトキシ— 2—イソ プロポキシ 1, 2 ジヒドロキノリン及び N—(1 モルホリノカルボキシ) 4 メチル ピリジゥムクロリド等の脱水縮合型ペプチド試薬; N, N,—アジボイルジォキシジサク シンイミド及び N, N,ーテレフタロイルジォキシジサクシンイミド等の活性エステル系 化合物:トルエン—2, 4 ジイソシァネート及び 1, 6 へキサメチレンジイソシァネー ト等のイソシァネート類;及びポリアミド ポリアミンーェピクロルヒドリン反応物等のェ ピクロルヒドリン系化合物を挙げることができる力 これに限定されるものではない。 As a typical example, a melamine compound containing at least one of two or more (preferably three or more) methylol groups and an alkoxymethyl group, or a condensation polymer thereof, melamine fat or melamine 'urea'. Fat, and also mucochloric acid, mucobromic acid, mucofenoxycycloic acid, mucophenoxypromic acid, formaldehyde, glyoxal, monomethylglyoxal, 2,3 dihydroxy 1,4 dioxane, 2,3 dihydroxy 5 —Aldehyde compounds such as methyl-1,4dioxanesuccinaldehyde, 2,5 dimethoxytetrahydrofuran and dartalaldehyde and their derivatives; divinyl sulfone N, N 'ethylenebis (vininoresnorephoninorecetamide) 1, 3 Bis (vinylol sulfone), 1-2 propanol, methylene bi Activities such as maleimide, 5-acetylyl 1,3 diataroyl monohexahydro s triazine, 1,3,5 tritaliloyl monosahydro s triazine and 1,3,5 tribululsulfol-hexahydro s triazine Bull compounds; 2, 4 dichloro 6 hydroxy-s triazine sodium salt, 2, 4-dichloro 6- (4-sulfo-lino) mono s triazine sodium salt, 2, 4 dichloro mono 6- (2-sulfo Ethylamino) -s triazine and active halogen compounds such as N, N, -bis (2-chloroethylcarbamyl) piperazine; bis (2,3 epoxypropyl) methyl-propyl pyramone · ρ Toluene sulfonate, 2, 4, 6 triethylene-s triazine, 1, 6 hexamethylene Ν, Ν, bisethylene urea and bis β-ethyleneiminoethyl thioether, etc. Ethyleneimine compounds; methanesulfonic acid ester compounds such as 1,2-di (methanesulfonoxy) ethane, 1,4-di (methanesulfonoxy) butane and 1,5 di (methanesulfonoxy) pentane Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and 1 dicyclohexyl 3- (3 trimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride 2, 5 Isoxazole compounds such as dimethylisoxazole; Inorganic compounds such as chromium alum and chromium acetate; N-carboethoxy-2-isopropoxy 1,2 dihydroquinoline and N- ( 1 Morpholinocarboxy) Dehydrated condensation type peptide reagents such as 4 methyl pyridinium chloride; active ester compounds such as N, N, -adiboyldioxydisuccinimide and N, N, -terephthaloyldioxydisuccinimide : Isocyanates such as toluene-2,4 diisocyanate and 1,6 hexamethylene diisocyanate; and ability to list epichlorohydrin compounds such as polyamide polyamine-epoxyhydrin reactant Is not to be done.
[0043] 上記表面層の形成には、まず、例えば水等の溶媒 (必要に応じて分散剤、結合剤 を含む)に上記ポリマー、エポキシ化合物、及び適当な添加剤を添加、混合 (必要に 応じて分散)して表面層塗布液を調製する。 [0043] For the formation of the surface layer, first, the polymer, epoxy compound, and appropriate additives are added to a solvent such as water (including a dispersant and a binder as necessary) and mixed (necessary). Disperse accordingly) to prepare a surface layer coating solution.
[0044] 上記表面層は、本発明における帯電防止層上に一般によく知られた塗布方法、例 えばディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ワイヤーバーコート 法、グラビアコート法、エタストルージョンコート法などにより上記表面層塗布液を塗布 することにより形成することができる。上記表面層の層厚は、 0. 01〜1 /ζ πιの範囲が 好ましぐさらに 0. 01-0. 2 mの範囲が好ましい。 0. 01 m未満では帯電防止 層の導電性金属酸ィ匕物粒子の脱離防止機能が不十分で、 1 μ mを超える場合は、 塗布剤を均一に塗布しにく ヽため製品に塗布むらが生じやす ヽ。 [0044] The surface layer is formed by a coating method generally well known on the antistatic layer in the present invention, such as dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, etast. It can be formed by applying the above surface layer coating solution by a rouge coating method or the like. The layer thickness of the surface layer is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1 / ζ πι, and more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 0.2 m. If it is less than 0.01 m, the antistatic layer has insufficient anti-detachment function for the conductive metal oxide particles, and if it exceeds 1 μm, it is difficult to apply the coating agent uniformly, so it is applied to the product. Unevenness is likely to occur.
[0045] [接着剤層] [0045] [Adhesive layer]
本発明に好ましく用いられる接着剤層につ ヽて説明する。  The adhesive layer preferably used in the present invention will be described.
本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜は、光学フィルターや、液晶表示板、プラズマ ディスプレイパネル、その他の画像表示パネルなどに組み込まれる際には、接着剤 層を介して接合される。  The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is bonded via an adhesive layer when incorporated in an optical filter, a liquid crystal display panel, a plasma display panel, other image display panels, or the like.
[0046] 本発明で用いる接着剤の屈折率は 1. 40-1. 70のものを使用することが好ましい 。これは本発明で使用するプラスチックフィルム等の支持体と接着剤の屈折率との関 係で、その差を小さくして、可視光透過率が低下するのを防ぐためであり、屈折率が 1. 40-1. 70であると可視光透過率の低下が少なく良好である。  [0046] The refractive index of the adhesive used in the present invention is preferably 1.40-1.70. This is related to the refractive index of the adhesive, such as a plastic film used in the present invention, to reduce the difference and prevent the visible light transmittance from being lowered. 40-1.70 is good with little decrease in visible light transmittance.
[0047] 本発明で用いられる接着剤は、また、加熱または加圧により流動する接着剤である ことが好ましぐ特に、 200°C以下の加熱または lkgfZcm2 (0. 098MPa)以 上の加圧により流動性を示す接着剤であることが好ま ヽ。流動できるので接着剤層 を設けた透光性電磁波シールド膜 (電磁波シールド性接着フィルム)を被着体にラミ ネートや加圧成形、特に加圧成形により貼りあわせることができる。また曲面、複雑形 状を有する被着体にも容易に接着することができる。このためには、接着剤の軟化温 度が 200°C以下であると好ましい。電磁波シールド性接着フィルムの用途から、使用 される環境が通常 80°C未満であるので接着剤層の軟ィ匕温度は、 80°C以上が好まし ぐ加工性力も 80〜120°Cが最も好ましい。軟化温度は、粘度が 1012ボイズ以下にな る温度のことで、通常その温度では 1〜: LO秒程度の時間のうちに流動が認められる。 上記のような加熱または加圧により流動する接着剤としては、主に以下に示す熱可 塑性榭脂が代表的なものとしてあげられる。たとえば天然ゴム (屈折率 n=1.52)、ポリイ ソプレン (n=1.521)、ポリ 1, 2 ブタジエン (n=l.50)、ポリイソブテン (n=1.505〜1.51) 、ポリブテン (n=1.513)、ポリ 2 へプチルー 1, 3 ブタジエン (n=l.50)、ポリ 2 t ーブチルー 1, 3 ブタジエン (n=l.506)、ポリ 1, 3 ブタジエン (n=1.515)などの(ジ )ェン類、ポリオキシエチレン (n=l.456)、ポリオキシプロピレン (n=l.450)、ポリビュルェ チルエーテル (n=l .454)、ポリビュルへキシルエーテル (n=l .459)、ポリビュルブチルェ 一テル (n=l.456)などのポリエーテル類、ポリビュルアセテート (n=l.467)、ポリビュルプ 口ピオネート (n=l.467)などのポリエステル類、ポリウレタン (n=1.5〜1.6)、ェチルセル口 ース (n=1.479)、ポリ塩化ビュル (n=1.54〜1.55)、ポリアクリロニトリル (n=1.52)、ポリメタ タリロニトリル (n=l.52)、ポリスルホン (n=l.633)、ポリスルフイド (n=1.6)、フエノキシ榭脂( n=1.5〜1.6)、ポリェチルアタリレート (n=1.469)、ポリブチルアタリレート (n=1.466)、ポリ 2 ェチルへキシルアタリレート (n=l .463)、ポリ t ブチルアタリレート (n=l .464)、 ポリ 3 エトキシプロピルアタリレート (n=l.465)、ポリオキシカノレポ-ノレテトラメチレン (n=1.465)、ポリメチルアタリレート (n=1.472〜1.480)、ポリイソプロピルメタタリレート (n=l .473)、ポリドデシルメタタリレート (n=1.474)、ポリテトラデシルメタタリレート (n=l.475)、 ポリ一 n—プロピルメタクリレー Kn=1.484)、ポリ一 3, 3, 5 トリメチルシクロへキシルメ タクリレート (η=1.484)、ポリェチルメタタリレート (η=1.485)、ポリ 2 二トロー 2—メチ ルプロピルメタタリレート (η=1.487)、ポリ 1, 1ージェチルプロピルメタタリレート (η=1. 489)、ポリメチルメタクリレー Kn=l.489)などのポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステルが使用可 能である。これらのアクリルポリマーは必要に応じて、 2種以上共重合してもよいし、 2 種類以上をブレンドして使用することも可能である。 [0047] The adhesive used in the present invention is an adhesive that flows by heating or pressurization. In particular, it is preferable that the adhesive exhibits fluidity when heated to 200 ° C. or lower or pressurized to 1 kgfZcm 2 (0.098 MPa) or higher. Since it can flow, a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film (electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film) provided with an adhesive layer can be bonded to an adherend by lamination or pressure molding, particularly pressure molding. Further, it can be easily bonded to an adherend having a curved surface or a complicated shape. For this purpose, the softening temperature of the adhesive is preferably 200 ° C or lower. Due to the use of electromagnetic shielding adhesive films, the softening temperature of the adhesive layer is preferably 80 ° C or higher because the environment used is usually less than 80 ° C. preferable. The softening temperature is the temperature at which the viscosity is 10 12 boise or less. Usually, at that temperature, flow is observed within a time of 1 to LO seconds. Typical examples of the adhesive that flows by heating or pressurization as described above are mainly the following thermoplastic resins. For example, natural rubber (refractive index n = 1.52), polyisoprene (n = 1.521), poly 1,2 butadiene (n = l.50), polyisobutene (n = 1.505 to 1.51), polybutene (n = 1.513), poly 2 Heteroleu 1,3 butadiene (n = l.50), poly 2 t-butyl-1,3 butadiene (n = l.506), poly 1,3 butadiene (n = 1.515), Oxyethylene (n = l.456), polyoxypropylene (n = l.450), polybutyl ether ( n = l .454), polybutyl hexyl ether (n = l .459), polybutyl butyl ether ( Polyethers such as n = l.456), Polyburacetate (n = l.467), Polyburp mouthpiece pionate (n = l.467) and other polyesters, Polyurethane (n = 1.5 to 1.6), Ethyl cell mouth scan (n = 1.479), polychlorinated Bulle (n = 1.54~1.55), polyacrylonitrile (n = 1.52), Porimeta Tarironitoriru (n = l.52), polysulfone (n = l.633), Lisulfide (n = 1.6), phenoxy resin (n = 1.5-1.6), polyethyl acrylate (n = 1.469), polybutyl acrylate (n = 1.466), poly 2-ethyl hexyl acrylate (n = l .463), poly (t-butyl acrylate) (n = l .464), poly 3 ethoxypropyl acrylate (n = l. 465), polyoxycanolepo-noretetramethylene (n = 1.465), polymethyl acrylate ( n = 1.472 to 1.480), polyisopropyl metatalylate (n = l .473), polydodecyl metatalylate (n = 1.474), polytetradecyl metatalylate (n = l.475), poly n-propyl (Metaclurin Kn = 1.484), Poly (1,3,3,5) Trimethylcyclohexyl methacrylate (η = 1.484), Polyethyl methacrylate (η = 1.485), Poly 2 Nitrole 2-methylpropyl methacrylate ( η = 1.487), poly 1,1-jetylpropyl methacrylate (η = 1. 489), poly (meth) acrylic esters such as polymethylmethacrylate Kn = l.489) can be used. Two or more kinds of these acrylic polymers may be copolymerized as needed, or two or more kinds may be blended and used.
[0049] さらにアクリル榭脂とアクリル以外との共重合榭脂としてはエポキシアタリレート (η=1. [0049] Further, as a copolymer resin of acrylic resin and other than acrylic resin, epoxy acrylate (η = 1.
48〜1.60)、ウレタンアタリレート (η=1.5〜1.6)、ポリエーテルアタリレート (η=1.48〜1.49) 、ポリエステルアタリレート (η=1.48〜1.54)なども使うこともできる。特に接着性の点から 、ウレタンアタリレート、エポキシアタリレート、ポリエーテルアタリレートが優れており、 エポキシアタリレートとしては、 1, 6—へキサンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、ネオ ペンチルグリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ァリルアルコールジグリシジルエーテル、 レゾルシノールジグリシジルエーテル、アジピン酸ジグリシジルエステル、フタル酸ジ グリシジルエステル、ポリエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールプ 口パントリグリシジルエーテル、グリセリントリグリシジルエーテル、ペンタエリスリトール テトラグリシジルエーテル、ソルビトールテトラグリシジルエーテル等の(メタ)アクリル 酸付加物が挙げられる。エポキシアタリレートなどのように分子内に水酸基を有する ポリマーは接着性向上に有効である。これらの共重合榭脂は必要に応じて、 2種以 上併用することができる。これらの接着剤となるポリマーの軟ィ匕温度は、取扱い性から 200°C以下が好適で、 150°C以下がさらに好ましい。電磁波シールド性接着フィルム の用途から、使用される環境が通常 80°C以下であるので接着剤層の軟ィ匕温度は、 加工性から 80〜120°Cが最も好ましい。一方、ポリマーの質量平均分子量 (ゲルパ 一ミエーシヨンクロマトグラフィーによる標準ポリスチレンの検量線を用いて測定したも の、以下同様)は、 500以上のものを使用することが好ましい。分子量が 500以下で は接着剤組成物の凝集力が低すぎるために被着体への密着性が低下するおそれが ある。本発明で使用する接着剤には必要に応じて、希釈剤、可塑剤、酸化防止剤、 充填剤、着色剤、紫外線吸収剤や粘着付与剤などの添加剤を配合してもよい。接着 剤の層の厚さは、 10〜80 mであることが好ましぐ導電層の厚さ以上で 20〜50 mとすることが特に好ま 、。 48 to 1.60), urethane acrylate (η = 1.5 to 1.6), polyether acrylate (η = 1.48 to 1.49), polyester acrylate ( η = 1.48 to 1.54), and the like can also be used. In particular, urethane acrylate, epoxy acrylate, and polyether acrylate are excellent in terms of adhesiveness. Examples of epoxy acrylate include 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and aryl. Alcohol diglycidyl ether, resorcinol diglycidyl ether, adipic acid diglycidyl ester, phthalic acid diglycidyl ester, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, trimethylol open-pan triglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, sorbitol tetra Examples include (meth) acrylic acid adducts such as glycidyl ether. A polymer having a hydroxyl group in the molecule, such as epoxy acrylate, is effective in improving adhesion. These copolymerized resins can be used in combination of two or more as required. The softening temperature of the polymer used as the adhesive is preferably 200 ° C. or less, and more preferably 150 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of handleability. Since the environment in which the electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film is used is usually 80 ° C or lower, the softening temperature of the adhesive layer is most preferably 80 to 120 ° C in view of processability. On the other hand, it is preferable to use a polymer having a mass average molecular weight (measured using a standard polystyrene calibration curve by gel permeation chromatography, the same shall apply hereinafter) of 500 or more. If the molecular weight is 500 or less, the cohesive force of the adhesive composition is too low, and the adhesion to the adherend may be reduced. The adhesive used in the present invention may contain additives such as diluents, plasticizers, antioxidants, fillers, colorants, ultraviolet absorbers and tackifiers, as necessary. The thickness of the adhesive layer is particularly preferably 10 to 80 m, more preferably 20 to 50 m, more than the thickness of the conductive layer.
[0050] また、本発明でこのましく用いられる接着剤は、支持体および前記易接着層との屈 折率の差が 0. 14以下とされる。この屈折率の差を満たすことにより、可視光透過率 の低下が少なく良好となる。そのような要件を満たす接着剤の材料としては、支持体 がポリエチレンテレフタレート(n=1.575;屈折率)の場合、ビスフエノール A型エポキシ 榭脂ゃビスフエノール F型エポキシ榭脂、テトラヒドロキシフエニルメタン型エポキシ榭 脂、ノボラック型エポキシ榭脂、レゾルシン型エポキシ榭脂、ポリアルコール 'ポリダリ コール型エポキシ樹脂、ポリオレフイン型エポキシ樹脂、脂環式ゃノヽロゲンィ匕ビスフエ ノールなどのエポキシ榭脂(いずれも屈折率が 1.55〜1.60)を使うことができる。ェポ キシ榭脂以外では天然ゴム (n=1.52)、ポリイソプレン (n=1.521)、ポリ 1, 2 ブタジェ ン(n=1.50)、ポリイソブテン(n=1.505〜1.51)、ポリブテン(n=1.5125)、ポリ 2 へ プチルー 1, 3 ブタジエン(n=1.50)、ポリ 2—t—ブチルー 1, 3 ブタジエン(n=l .506)、ポリ 1, 3 ブタジエン(n=l.515)などの(ジ)ェン類、ポリオキシエチレン(n= 1.4563)、ポリオキシプロピレン(n=l.4495)、ポリビュルェチルエーテル(n=l.454)、 ポリビュルへキシルエーテル (n=1.4591)、ポリビュルブチルエーテル(n=1.4563)な どのポリエーテル類、ポリビュルアセテート(n=l.4665)、ポリビュルプロピオネート(n= 1.4665)などのポリエステル類、ポリウレタン(n=1.5〜1.6)、ェチルセルロース(n=1.47 9)、ポリ塩化ビュル (n=1.54〜1.55)、ポリアクリロニトリル (n=1.52)、ポリメタタリ口-トリ ル(n=1.52)、ポリスルホン(n=1.633)、ポリスルフイド(n=1.6)、フヱノキシ榭脂(n=1.5 〜1.6)などを挙げることができる。 [0050] Further, in the adhesive preferably used in the present invention, the difference in the bending rate between the support and the easy-adhesion layer is 0.14 or less. By satisfying this refractive index difference, visible light transmittance The decrease in the temperature is good. Adhesive materials that meet these requirements include bisphenol A type epoxy, bisphenol A, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, and tetrahydroxyphenylmethane when the support is polyethylene terephthalate (n = 1.575; refractive index). Type epoxy resin, novolak type epoxy resin, resorcinol type epoxy resin, polyalcohol 'polydaryl alcohol type epoxy resin, polyolefin type epoxy resin, epoxy resin such as cycloaliphatic Nyanogen bisphenol (all with refractive index 1.55-1.60) can be used. Other than epoxy resin, natural rubber (n = 1.52), polyisoprene (n = 1.521), poly 1,2 butadiene (n = 1.50), polyisobutene (n = 1.505 to 1.51), polybutene (n = 1.5125) , Poly 2 heptile, 1,3 butadiene (n = 1.50), poly 2-t-butyl-1,3 butadiene (n = l .506), poly 1,3 butadiene (n = l.515), etc. (di) , Polyoxyethylene (n = 1.4563), polyoxypropylene (n = l.4495), polybutyl ether (n = l.454), polybutyl hexyl ether (n = 1.4591), polybutyl butyl ether (n = 1.4563) of which polyethers, poly Bulle acetate (n = l.4665), polyesters such as poly Bulle propionate (n = 1.4665), polyurethane (n = 1.5 to 1.6), E chill cellulose ( n = 1.47 9), polychlorinated butyl (n = 1.54 to 1.55), polyacrylonitrile (n = 1.52), polymetatalie-tolyl (n = 1.52), poly Examples include resulfone (n = 1.633), polysulfide (n = 1.6), and phenoxy resin (n = 1.5 to 1.6).
これらは、好適な可視光透過率を発現する。 These express suitable visible light transmittance.
また、経時で変色し難いものとしてアクリル榭脂がよく知られており、本発明に好まし く用いられる。例としては、ポリェチルアタリレート(n=1.4685)、ポリブチルアタリレート (n=1.466)、ポリ 2 ェチルへキシルアタリレート(n=1.463)、ポリ t-ブチルアタリ レート(n=l.4638)、ポリ 3 エトキシプロピルアタリレート(n=l.465)、ポリオキシカル ボ -ルテトラメタタリレート(n=1.465)、ポリメチルアタリレート(n=1.472〜1.480)、ポリイ ソプロピルメタタリレート(n=1.4728)、ポリドデシルメタタリレート(n=1.474)、ポリテトラ デシルメタクリレート(11=1.4746)、ポリー11ープロピルメタクリレート(11=1.484)、ポリー3 , 3, 5 トリメチルシクロへキシルメタタリレート(n=1.484)、ポリェチルメタタリレート(n =1.485)、ポリ 2 -トロー 2 メチルプロピルメタタリレート(n=l.4868)、ポリテトラ力 ルバ-ルメタタリレート(n=1.4889)、ポリ 1, 1ージェチルプロピルメタタリレート(n=l .4889)、ポリメチルメタタリレート(n=1.4893)などのポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、また 、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸が使用可能である。これらのアクリルポリマーは必要に応じ て、 2種以上共重合してもよいし、 2種類以上をブレンドして使うこともできる。分子量 の異なる複数種類のアクリルポリマーをブレンドすることにより、接着剤の粘弾性を所 望の性質に調整することが可能である。 In addition, acrylic resin is well known as one that hardly changes color over time, and is preferably used in the present invention. Examples include polyethyl acrylate (n = 1.4685), polybutyl acrylate (n = 1.466), poly butyl hexyl acrylate (n = 1.463), poly tert-butyl acrylate (n = l.4638) , Poly 3 ethoxypropyl acrylate (n = l.465), polyoxycarboxyl tetramethacrylate ( n = 1.465), polymethyl acrylate (n = 1.472 to 1.480), polyisopropyl methacrylate (n = 1.4728) ), Polydodecyl methacrylate (n = 1.474), polytetradecyl methacrylate (11 = 1.4746), poly-11-propyl methacrylate (11 = 1.484), poly-3,3,5 trimethylcyclohexyl methacrylate (n = 1.484) ), Poly (ethyl methacrylate) (n = 1.485), poly-2-troh 2 methylpropyl metatalylate (n = l.4868), polytetra-force rubale metatalylate ( n = 1.4889), poly 1, 1- Jetylpropyl Metatarire Doo (n = l .4889), poly (meth) acrylic acid esters such as polymethyl methacrylate (n = 1.4893), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid can be used. Two or more kinds of these acrylic polymers may be copolymerized as necessary, or two or more kinds may be blended and used. By blending several types of acrylic polymers with different molecular weights, it is possible to adjust the viscoelasticity of the adhesive to the desired properties.
[0052] さらにアクリル榭脂とアクリルィ匕合物以外との共重合榭脂としてはエポキシアタリレ ート、ウレタンアタリレート、ポリエーテルアタリレート、ポリエステルアタリレートなども使 うこともできる。特に接着性の点から、エポキシアタリレート、ポリエーテルアタリレート が優れており、エポキシアタリレートとしては、 1, 6—へキサンジオールジグリシジル エーテル、ネオペンチルグリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ァリルアルコールジグリシ ジルエーテル、レゾルシノールジグリシジルエーテル、アジピン酸ジグリシジルエステ ル、フタル酸ジグリシジルエステル、ポリエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ト リメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテル、グリセリントリグリシジルエーテル、ペン タエリスリトールテトラグリシジルエーテル、ソルビトールテトラグリシジルエーテル等の [0052] Further, as the copolymer resin other than acrylic resin and acrylic compound, epoxy acrylate, urethane acrylate, polyether acrylate, polyester acrylate and the like can also be used. Epoxy acrylate and polyether acrylate are particularly excellent in terms of adhesiveness. Examples of epoxy acrylate include 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and aryl alcohol diglycidyl. Ether, resorcinol diglycidyl ether, diglycidyl ester adipate, diglycidyl phthalate, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, sorbitol tetraglycidyl ether Etc.
(メタ)アクリル酸付加物が挙げられる。エポキシアタリレートは分子内に水酸基を有す るため接着性向上に有効であり、これらの共重合榭脂は必要に応じて、 2種以上併 用することができる。接着剤の主成分となるポリマーの質量平均分子量は、 1, 000以 上のものが使われる。分子量が 1, 000以下だと組成物の凝集力が低すぎるために 被着体への密着性が低下する。 (Meth) acrylic acid adduct is mentioned. Epoxy acrylate is effective in improving adhesiveness because it has a hydroxyl group in the molecule, and these copolymerized resins can be used in combination of two or more as required. The polymer that is the main component of the adhesive has a mass average molecular weight of 1,000 or more. When the molecular weight is 1,000 or less, the cohesive force of the composition is too low, and the adhesion to the adherend is reduced.
[0053] 接着剤の硬化剤としてはトリエチレンテトラミン、キシレンジァミン、ジアミノジフエ- ルメタンなどのアミン類、無水フタル酸、無水マレイン酸、無水ドデシルコハク酸、無 水ピロメリット酸、無水ベンゾフヱノンテトラカルボン酸などの酸無水物、ジアミノジフエ ニルスルホン、トリス(ジメチルアミノメチル)フエノール、ポリアミド榭脂、ジシアンジアミ ド、ェチルメチルイミダゾールなどを使うことができる。これらは単独で用いてもよいし 、 2種以上混合して用いてもよい。これらの架橋剤の添加量は上記ポリマー 100質量 部に対して 0. 1〜50質量部、好ましくは 1〜30質量部の範囲で選択するのがよい。 この添加量力 0. 1質量部未満であると硬化が不十分となり、 50質量部を越えると過 剰架橋となり、接着性に悪影響を与える場合がある。本発明で使用する接着剤の榭 脂組成物には必要に応じて、希釈剤、可塑剤、酸化防止剤、充填剤や粘着付与剤 などの添加剤を配合してもよい。そして、この接着剤の榭脂組成物は、支持体の表面 の金属銀部の一部または全面を被覆するために、塗布され、溶媒乾燥、加熱硬化工 程をへたのち、電磁波シールド性接着フィルムにする。上記で得られた電磁波シ— ルド性と透明性を有する電磁波シールド性接着フィルムは、 CRT, PDP、液晶、 EL などのディスプレイに直接貼り付け使用したり、アクリル板、ガラス板等の板やシート に貼り付けてディスプレイに使用する。また、この電磁波シールド性接着フィルムは、 電磁波を発生する測定装置、測定機器や製造装置の内部をのぞくための窓や筐体 に上記と同様にして使用する。さらに、電波塔や高圧線等により電磁波障害を受ける 恐れのある建造物の窓や自動車の窓等に設ける。そして、金属銀部にはアース線を 設けることが好ましい。 [0053] Adhesive curing agents include amines such as triethylenetetramine, xylenediamine, diaminodimethane, phthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride, anhydrous dodecylsuccinic acid, anhydrous pyromellitic acid, and anhydrous benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid. Acid anhydrides such as acids, diaminodiphenyl sulfone, tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, polyamide resin, dicyandiamide, ethylmethylimidazole and the like can be used. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The addition amount of these crosslinking agents is selected in the range of 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer. If the amount of addition is less than 0.1 parts by mass, curing may be insufficient, and if it exceeds 50 parts by mass, excessive crosslinking may occur, which may adversely affect adhesion. Glue of adhesive used in the present invention You may mix | blend additives, such as a diluent, a plasticizer, antioxidant, a filler, and a tackifier, with a fat composition as needed. Then, the resin composition of this adhesive is applied to coat a part or the whole of the metallic silver portion on the surface of the support, followed by solvent drying and heat curing processes, and then electromagnetic wave shielding adhesion. Make a film. The electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film having electromagnetic shielding properties and transparency obtained above can be directly attached to a display such as CRT, PDP, liquid crystal, EL, etc., or a plate or sheet such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate. Paste to and use for display. Further, this electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive film is used in the same manner as described above for a window or a case for looking inside a measuring apparatus, measuring apparatus or manufacturing apparatus that generates electromagnetic waves. In addition, it will be installed in the windows of buildings and automobile windows where there is a risk of electromagnetic interference from radio towers and high voltage lines. The metal silver part is preferably provided with a ground wire.
[0054] 支持体が凸凹を有していて、光を散乱するためにヘイズを有する場合でも、その凹 凸面に支持体と屈折率が近い樹脂が平滑に塗布または、榭脂シートが貼合わされる と乱反射が最小限に押さえられ、透明性が発現するようになる。また本発明の金属銀 部は、ライン幅が非常に小さいため肉眼で視認されない。またピッチも十分に大きい ため見掛け上透明性を発現すると考えられる。一方、遮蔽すべき電磁波の波長に比 ベて、ピッチは十分に小さいため、優れたシールド性を発現すると考えられる。  [0054] Even when the support has irregularities and has haze to scatter light, a resin having a refractive index close to that of the support is smoothly applied to the concave / convex surface or a resin sheet is laminated. As a result, diffuse reflection is minimized and transparency is developed. Further, the metal silver part of the present invention is not visually recognized by the naked eye because the line width is very small. In addition, the pitch is sufficiently large, so it seems that it appears to be transparent. On the other hand, since the pitch is sufficiently small compared to the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave to be shielded, it is considered that excellent shielding properties are exhibited.
[0055] 一般的には、ディスプレイの表面はガラス製であるので、接着剤を用いて貼り合わ せるのは支持体とガラス板との貼り合わせであり、その接着面に気泡が生じたり剥離 が生じたりすると画像が歪んだり、表示色がディスプレイ本来のものと異なって見える 等の問題が発生する。また、気泡および剥離の問題はいずれの場合でも接着剤が 支持体またはガラス板より剥離することにより発生する。この現象は、支持体側、ガラ ス板側ともに発生する可能性が有り、より密着力の弱い側で剥離が発生する。従って 、高温での接着剤と支持体、ガラス板との密着力が高いことが必要となる。具体的に は、支持体及びガラス板と接着剤層との密着力は 80°Cにおいて IS08225準拠の試 験方法にぉ 、て lOgZcm ( lONZm)以上であることが好まし!/、。 20g/cm (20N / )以上であることが更に好ましぐ 30g/cm (30N/m)以上であることがとくに好 ましい。ただし、 2000gZcm (2kNZm)を超えるような接着剤は貼り合わせ作業が 困難と成るために好ましくない場合がある。ただし、力かる問題点が発生しない場合 は問題なく使用できる。さらに、この接着剤の支持体と面していない部分に不必要に 他の部分に接触しな 、ように合 、紙 (セパレーター)を設けることも可能である。 [0055] In general, since the surface of the display is made of glass, bonding with the adhesive is performed by bonding the support and the glass plate, and bubbles are generated or peeled off on the bonding surface. If this happens, the image will be distorted and the display color will appear different from the original display. In any case, the problem of bubbles and peeling occurs when the adhesive peels off from the support or the glass plate. This phenomenon may occur on both the support side and the glass plate side, and peeling occurs on the side with weaker adhesion. Accordingly, it is necessary that the adhesive strength between the adhesive, the support and the glass plate at a high temperature is high. Specifically, the adhesion between the support and the glass plate and the adhesive layer is preferably at least lOgZcm (lONZm) at 80 ° C according to the test method in conformity with IS08225! /. More preferably, it is more preferably 20 g / cm (20 N / m) or more, and particularly preferably 30 g / cm (30 N / m) or more. However, adhesives that exceed 2000 gZcm (2 kNZm) can be bonded together. It may not be preferable due to difficulty. However, it can be used without problems if no significant problems occur. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a paper (separator) so that the portion not facing the support of the adhesive does not unnecessarily contact other portions.
[0056] 接着剤は透明であるものが好ましい。具体的には全光線透過率が 70%以上が好 ましぐ 80%以上が更に好ましぐ 85〜92%が最も好ましい。さらに、霞度が低いこと が好ましい。具体的には、 0〜 3%が好ましぐ 0〜1. 5%が更に好ましい。本発明で 用いる接着剤は、ディスプレイ本来の表示色を変化させないために無色であることが 好ましい。ただし、榭脂自体が有色であっても接着剤の厚みが薄い場合には実質的 には無色とみなすことが可能である。また、後述のように意図的に着色を行なう場合 も同様にこの範囲ではない。  [0056] The adhesive is preferably transparent. Specifically, the total light transmittance is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and most preferably 85 to 92%. Furthermore, it is preferable that the temperature is low. Specifically, 0 to 3% is preferable, and 0 to 1.5% is more preferable. The adhesive used in the present invention is preferably colorless so as not to change the original display color of the display. However, even if the resin itself is colored, it can be regarded as virtually colorless if the adhesive is thin. Similarly, this is not the case when intentionally coloring as described later.
[0057] 上記の特性を有する接着剤としては例えば、アクリル系榭脂、 a一才レフイン榭脂、 酢酸ビニル系榭脂、アクリル共重合物系榭脂、ウレタン系榭脂、エポキシ系榭脂、塩 化ビ -リデン系榭脂、塩ィ匕ビ二ル系榭脂、エチレン ビュルアセテート系榭脂、ポリ アミド系榭脂、ポリエステル系榭脂等が挙げられる。これらの内、アクリル系榭脂が好 ましい。同じ榭脂を用いる場合でも、接着剤を重合法により合成する際に架橋剤の添 加量を下げること、粘着性付与材を加えること、分子の末端基を変化させることなどの 方法によって、粘着性を向上させることも可能である。また、同じ接着剤を用いても、 接着剤を貼り合わせる面、すなわち、支持体またはガラス板の表面改質を行なうこと により密着性を向上させることも可能である。このような表面の改質方法としては、コロ ナ放電処理、プラズマグロ一処理等の物理的手法、密着性を向上させるための下地 層を形成するなどの方法が挙げられる。  [0057] Examples of the adhesive having the above properties include acrylic resin, a 1-year-old refin resin, vinyl acetate resin, acrylic copolymer resin, urethane resin, epoxy resin, Examples thereof include a vinyl chloride-based resin, a vinyl chloride-based resin, an ethylene butyl acetate-based resin, a polyamide-based resin, and a polyester-based resin. Of these, acrylic resin is preferred. Even in the case of using the same rosin, it is possible to reduce the amount of the adhesive by synthesizing the adhesive by a method such as lowering the amount of the crosslinking agent, adding a tackifier, or changing the end group of the molecule. It is also possible to improve the performance. Even when the same adhesive is used, it is possible to improve the adhesion by modifying the surface to which the adhesive is bonded, that is, the surface of the support or the glass plate. Examples of such surface modification methods include physical methods such as corona discharge treatment and plasma glow treatment, and methods such as forming an underlayer for improving adhesion.
[0058] 透明性、無色性、ハンドリング性の観点から、接着剤層の厚みは、 5〜50 μ m程度 であることが好ましい。接着剤層を接着剤で形成する場合は、その厚みは上記範囲 内で薄くするとよい。具体的には 1〜20 /ζ πι程度である。ただし、上記のようにデイス プレイ自体の表示色を変化させず、透明性も上記の範囲に入っている場合には、厚 みが上記範囲を超えてもょ 、。  [0058] From the viewpoint of transparency, colorlessness, and handling properties, the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably about 5 to 50 µm. When the adhesive layer is formed of an adhesive, the thickness is preferably reduced within the above range. Specifically, it is about 1-20 / ζ πι. However, if the display color of the display itself is not changed as described above and the transparency is within the above range, the thickness may exceed the above range.
[0059] (剥離強度)  [0059] (Peel strength)
本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜とガラス基板との密着強度は、以下のようなもの であることが好ましい。 The adhesion strength between the translucent electromagnetic shielding film of the present invention and the glass substrate is as follows: It is preferable that
フィルム試料をガラスに貼り付け、引つ張り速度 1 OOmm/minで接合面に対して 18 0° 方向に引っ張って剥離強度を測定した場合に、 20N/m以上の剥離強度であるこ とが好ましい。更には、 60°Cの温度で相対湿度 90%のもとで 72時間経時した後の 上記剥離強度で、 20N/m以上の剥離強度であることが好ま U、。  When the peel strength is measured by sticking a film sample on glass and pulling it at 180 ° direction with respect to the joint surface at a pulling speed of 1 OOmm / min, the peel strength is preferably 20 N / m or more. Furthermore, it is preferable that the peel strength after a lapse of 72 hours at a temperature of 60 ° C. and a relative humidity of 90% is a peel strength of 20 N / m or more.
[透光性電磁波シールド膜の作製方法] 本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜は、好 ましくは支持体上に感光性ハロゲン化銀塩を含有する乳剤層を有する感光材料を露 光し、現像処理を施すことによって露光部および未露光部に、それぞれ金属銀部お よび光透過性部を形成して得られる。さらに必要に応じて前記金属銀部に物理現像 および Zまたはめつき処理を施すことによって前記金属銀部に導電性金属を担持さ せてもよい。以下の本明細書においては、支持体上に感光性ハロゲン化銀塩を含有 する乳剤層を有する感光材料を露光し、現像処理を施すことを主体に説明するが、 フォトリソグラフィ用フォトポリマーを塗工した感光材料についてもシールド膜を作製で きる。 [Method for Producing Translucent Electromagnetic Shielding Film] The translucent electromagnetic shielding film of the present invention preferably exposes a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer containing a photosensitive silver halide salt on a support, By performing development processing, it is obtained by forming a metallic silver portion and a light transmitting portion in the exposed portion and the unexposed portion, respectively. Further, if necessary, the metallic silver portion may be supported with a conductive metal by subjecting the metallic silver portion to physical development and Z or tacking treatment. In the following description of the present invention, it is mainly explained that a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer containing a photosensitive silver halide salt is exposed on a support and subjected to a development process. However, a photopolymer for photolithography is applied. A shield film can also be produced for the processed photosensitive material.
本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜の形成方法は、感光材料と現像処理の形態に よって、次の 3通りの形態が含まれる。  The method for forming a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention includes the following three forms depending on the photosensitive material and the form of development processing.
(I)物理現像核を含まな ヽ感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀黒白感光材料を化学現像又は熱現 像して金属銀部を該感光材料上に形成させる方法  (I) A method of forming a metallic silver portion on a photosensitive material by chemically developing or thermally developing a photosensitive halogen-silver-black / white photosensitive material that does not contain physical development nuclei.
(II)物理現像核をハロゲン化銀乳剤層中に含む感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀黒白感光材 料を溶解物理現像して金属銀部を該感光材料上に形成させる方法  (II) A method in which a photosensitive silver halide silver-white photosensitive material containing physical development nuclei in a silver halide emulsion layer is dissolved and physically developed to form a metallic silver portion on the photosensitive material.
(III)物理現像核を含まな ヽ感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀黒白感光材料と、物理現像核を 含む非感光性層を有する受像シートを重ね合わせて拡散転写現像して金属銀部を 非感光性受像シート上に形成させる方法  (III) A photosensitive silver halide silver-white photosensitive material that does not contain physical development nuclei and an image-receiving sheet that has a non-photosensitive layer that contains physical development nuclei are overlaid and diffused and transferred to develop a non-photosensitive image of the metallic silver. Method of forming on a sheet
上記 (I)の態様は、一体型黒白現像タイプであり、感光材料上に金属銀が形成され る。得られる現像銀は化学現像銀又は熱現像銀であり、高比表面のフィラメントであ る点で後続するめつき又は物理現像過程で活性が高い。  The mode (I) is an integrated black-and-white development type, in which metallic silver is formed on the photosensitive material. The resulting developed silver is chemically developed silver or heat developed silver, and is highly active in the subsequent staking or physical development process in that it is a filament with a high specific surface.
上記 (Π)の態様は、露光部では、物理現像核近縁のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子が溶解され て現像核上に沈積することによって感光材料上に金属銀が形成される。これも一体 型黒白現像タイプである。現像作用が、物理現像核上への析出であるので高活性で あるが、現像銀は比表面は小さ 、球形である。 In the above aspect (ii), in the exposed portion, the silver halide grains close to the physical development nucleus are dissolved and deposited on the development nucleus, whereby metallic silver is formed on the photosensitive material. This too Type black and white development type. Since the developing action is precipitation on physical development nuclei, it is highly active, but developed silver has a small specific surface and is spherical.
上記 (ΠΙ)の態様は、未露光部にぉ 、てハロゲンィ匕銀粒子が溶解されて拡散して受 像シート上の現像核上に沈積することによって受像シート上に金属銀が形成される。 いわゆるセパレートタイプであって、受像シートを感光材料力も剥離して用いる態様 である。  In the aspect (ii), the silver halide silver particles are dissolved and diffused in the unexposed area, and are deposited on the development nuclei on the image receiving sheet to form metallic silver on the image receiving sheet. This is a so-called separate type, in which the image-receiving sheet is used with the photosensitive material force peeled off.
V、ずれの態様もネガ型現像処理および反転現像処理の ヽずれの現像を選択する こともできる (拡散転写方式の場合は、感光材料としてオートポジ型感光材料を用い ることによってネガ型現像処理が可能となる)。  V, the mode of deviation can also be selected as negative development between negative development processing and reversal development processing (in the case of the diffusion transfer method, negative development processing can be performed by using an auto positive photosensitive material as the photosensitive material. Possible).
ここでいう化学現像、熱現像、及び溶解物理現像は、当業界で通常用いられている 用語どおりの意味であり、写真化学の一般教科書、例えば菊地真一著「写真化学」 ( 共立出版社、 1955刊行)、 C. E. K. Mees編「The Theory of Photographic Process es,第 4版」(Mcmillan社、 1977刊行)に解説されている。本件は液処理であるが、そ の他の出願については現像方式として、熱現像方式も適用される。例えば、特開 20 04— 184693号、同 2004— 334077号、同 2005— 010752号、特願 2004— 244 080号、同 2004— 085655号などの各公報力 用できる。  The chemical development, thermal development, and dissolution physical development referred to here have the meanings commonly used in the art, and are general textbooks of photographic chemistry such as “Photochemistry” written by Shinichi Kikuchi (Kyoritsu Shuppansha, 1955). Published in CEK Mees, “The Theory of Photographic Processes, 4th Edition” (Mcmillan, 1977). This case is liquid processing, but for other applications, the thermal development method is also applied as the development method. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2004-184693, 2004-334077, 2005-010752, Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2004-244080, 2004-085655, and the like can be used.
以下、感光材料および上記各工程について説明する。  Hereinafter, the photosensitive material and each of the above steps will be described.
(1)感光材料 (1) Photosensitive material
(1 1)支持体 (1 1) Support
本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光材料の支持体としては、プラスチックフィルム 、プラスチック板、およびガラス板などを用いることができる。  As the support of the photosensitive material used in the production method of the present invention, a plastic film, a plastic plate, a glass plate, or the like can be used.
上記プラスチックフィルムおよびプラスチック板の原料としては、例えば、ポリエチレ ンテレフタレート(PET)、およびポリエチレンナフタレートなどのポリエステル類;ポリ エチレン(PE)、ポリプロピレン(PP)、ポリスチレン、 EVAなどのポリオレフイン類;ポリ 塩化ビニル、ポリ塩ィ匕ビユリデンなどのビュル系榭脂;その他、ポリエーテルエーテル ケトン(PEEK)、ポリサルホン(PSF)、ポリエーテルサルホン(PES)、ポリカーボネー ト(PC)、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、アクリル榭脂、トリァセチルセルロース (TAC)などを用 いることがでさる。 本発明においては、透明性、耐熱性、取り扱いやすさおよび価格の点から、上記プ ラスチックフィルムはポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム又はトリァセチルセルロース( TAC)であることが好まし!/ヽ。 Examples of the raw material for the plastic film and plastic plate include polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate; polyolefins such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polystyrene and EVA; Bulu resin such as vinyl and poly vinylidene; other polyether ether ketone (PEEK), polysulfone (PSF), polyether sulfone (PES), polycarbonate (PC), polyamide, polyimide, acrylic resin Fats, triacetyl cellulose (TAC), etc. can be used. In the present invention, the plastic film is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film or triacetyl cellulose (TAC) from the viewpoints of transparency, heat resistance, ease of handling and cost!
[0062] ディスプレイ用の電磁波シールド材では透明性が要求されるため、支持体の透明 性は高 、ことが望ま 、。この場合におけるプラスチックフィルムまたはプラスチック板 の全可視光透過率は 70〜100%が好ましぐさらに好ましくは 85〜100%であり、特 に好ましくは 90〜 100%である。また、本発明では、前記プラスチックフィルムおよび プラスチック板として本発明の目的を妨げない程度に着色したものを用いることもでき る。 [0062] Since the electromagnetic shielding material for a display requires transparency, it is desirable that the support has high transparency. In this case, the total visible light transmittance of the plastic film or plastic plate is preferably 70 to 100%, more preferably 85 to 100%, and particularly preferably 90 to 100%. In the present invention, the plastic film and the plastic plate that are colored to the extent that they do not interfere with the object of the present invention can also be used.
本発明におけるプラスチックフィルムおよびプラスチック板は、単層で用いることもで きるが、 2層以上を組み合わせた多層フィルムとして用いることも可能である。  The plastic film and plastic plate in the present invention can be used as a single layer, but can also be used as a multilayer film in which two or more layers are combined.
[0063] 本発明における支持体としてガラス板を用いる場合、その種類は特に限定されない 力 ディスプレイ用電磁波シールド膜の用途として用いる場合、表面に強化層を設け た強化ガラスを用いることが好ましい。強化ガラスは、強化処理していないガラスに比 ベて破損を防止できる可能性が高い。さらに、風冷法により得られる強化ガラスは、 万一破損してもその破 ¾片が小さぐかつ端面も鋭利になることはないため、安全 上好ましい。  [0063] When a glass plate is used as the support in the present invention, the type thereof is not particularly limited. When used as an application of an electromagnetic wave shielding film for a power display, it is preferable to use tempered glass having a tempered layer on the surface. There is a high possibility that tempered glass can prevent breakage compared to glass that has not been tempered. Further, the tempered glass obtained by the air cooling method is preferable from the viewpoint of safety because the broken piece is small and the end face is not sharp even if it is broken.
[0064] (1 2)保護層  [0064] (1 2) Protective layer
用いられる感光材料は、後述する乳剤層上に保護層を設けていてもよい。本発明 において「保護層」とは、ゼラチンや高分子材料などのバインダー力もなる層を意味し 、擦り傷防止や力学特性を改良する効果を発現するために感光性を有する乳剤層 に形成される。上記保護層はめつき処理する上では設けない方が好ましぐ設けると しても薄い方が好ましい。その厚みは 0. 2 m以下が好ましい。上記保護層の形成 方法は特に限定されず、公知の塗布方法を適宜選択することができる。  The photosensitive material used may be provided with a protective layer on the emulsion layer described later. In the present invention, the “protective layer” means a layer having a binder force such as gelatin or a polymer material, and is formed on an emulsion layer having photosensitivity in order to exhibit an effect of preventing scratches and improving mechanical properties. It is preferable that the protective layer is not provided in the case of performing the sticking treatment. The thickness is preferably 0.2 m or less. The formation method of the said protective layer is not specifically limited, A well-known coating method can be selected suitably.
[0065] (1 3)乳剤層  [0065] (1 3) Emulsion layer
本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光材料は、支持体上に、光センサーとして銀塩 を含む乳剤層(銀塩含有層)を有することが好ま ヽ。本発明における乳剤層には、 銀塩のほか、必要に応じて染料、バインダー、溶媒等を含有することができる。 <染料 > The light-sensitive material used in the production method of the present invention preferably has an emulsion layer (silver salt-containing layer) containing a silver salt as an optical sensor on a support. The emulsion layer in the present invention may contain a dye, a binder, a solvent and the like as required in addition to the silver salt. <Dye>
感光材料には、少なくとも乳剤層に染料が含まれていてもよい。該染料は、フィルタ 一染料として若しくはィラジェーシヨン防止その他種々の目的で乳剤層に含まれる。 上記染料としては、固体分散染料を含有してよい。本発明に好ましく用いられる染料 としては、特開平 9— 179243号公報記載の一般式 (FA)、一般式 (FA1)、一般式( FA2)、一般式 (FA3)で表される染料が挙げられ、具体的には同公報記載の化合 物 F1〜F34が好ましい。また、特開平 7— 152112号公報記載の(Π— 2)〜(Π— 24 )、特開平 7— 152112号公報記載の(III— 5)〜(III— 18)、特開平 7— 152112号 公報記載の(IV— 2)〜 (IV— 7)等も好ましく用いられる。  The light-sensitive material may contain a dye at least in the emulsion layer. The dye is contained in the emulsion layer as a filter dye or for various purposes such as prevention of irradiation. The dye may contain a solid disperse dye. Examples of the dye preferably used in the present invention include dyes represented by general formula (FA), general formula (FA1), general formula (FA2), and general formula (FA3) described in JP-A-9-179243. Specifically, compounds F1 to F34 described in the publication are preferable. Further, (Π-2) to (Π-24) described in JP-A-7-152112, (III-5) to (III-18) described in JP-A-7-152112, and JP-A-7-152112. (IV-2) to (IV-7) described in the publication are also preferably used.
[0066] このほか、本発明に使用することができる染料としては、現像または定着の処理時 に脱色する固体微粒子分散状の染料として、特開平 3— 138640号公報記載のシァ ニン染料、ピリリウム染料およびアミニゥム染料が挙げられる。また、処理時に脱色し ない染料として、特開平 9— 96891号公報記載のカルボキシル基を有するシァニン 染料、特開平 8— 245902号公報記載の酸性基を含まないシァニン染料および同 8 — 333519号公報記載のレーキ型シァニン染料、特開平 1— 266536号公報記載の シァニン染料、特開平 3— 136038号公報記載のホロポーラ型シァニン染料、特開 昭 62— 299959号公報記載のピリリウム染料、特開平 7— 253639号公報記載のポ リマー型シァニン染料、特開平 2— 282244号公報記載のォキソノール染料の固体 微粒子分散物、特開昭 63— 131135号公報記載の光散乱粒子、特開平 9 5913 号公報記載の Yb3 +化合物および特開平 7 - 113072号公報記載の ITO粉末等が 挙げられる。 [0066] Other dyes that can be used in the present invention include cyanine dyes and pyrylium dyes described in JP-A-3-138640 as dyes in the form of solid fine particles that are decolored during development or fixing. And Aminium dyes. Further, as dyes that do not decolorize during processing, cyanine dyes having a carboxyl group described in JP-A-9-96891, cyanine dyes not containing an acid group described in JP-A-8-245902, and JP-A-8-333519 Lake type cyanine dyes, cyanine dyes described in JP-A-1-266536, horopora-type cyanine dyes described in JP-A-3-136038, pyrylium dyes described in JP-A-62-299959, JP-A-7-253639 Polymer-type cyanine dyes described in JP-A No. 2-282244, solid fine particle dispersions of oxonol dyes described in JP-A-2-282244, light-scattering particles described in JP-A-63-131135, Yb3 described in JP-A-9 5913 + Compounds and ITO powders described in JP-A-7-113072 and the like.
[0067] また、上記染料としては、水溶性染料を含有することもできる。このような水溶性染 料としては、ォキソノール染料、ベンジリデン染料、メロシアニン染料、シァニン染料 およびァゾ染料が挙げられる。中でも本発明においては、ォキソノール染料、へミオ キソノール染料およびべンジリデン染料が有用である。本発明に用い得る水溶性染 料の具体例としては、英国特許 584, 609号明細書、同 1, 177, 429号明細書、特 開昭 48— 85130号公報、同 49— 99620号公報、同 49— 114420号公報、同 52— 20822号公報、同 59— 154439号公報、同 59— 208548号公報、米国特許 2, 27 4, 782号明細書、同 2, 533, 472号明細書、同 2, 956, 879号明細書、同 3, 148 , 187号明細書、同 3, 177, 078号明細書、同 3, 247, 127号明細書、同 3, 540, 887号明細書、同 3, 575, 704号明細書、同 3, 653, 905号明細書、同 3, 718, 4 27号明細書に記載されたものが挙げられる。 [0067] Further, the dye may contain a water-soluble dye. Such water-soluble dyes include oxonol dyes, benzylidene dyes, merocyanine dyes, cyanine dyes and azo dyes. Of these, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes and benzylidene dyes are useful in the present invention. Specific examples of water-soluble dyes that can be used in the present invention include British Patent Nos. 584, 609, 1, 177, 429, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 48-85130, 49-99620, 49-114420, 52-20822, 59-154439, 59-208548, US Patent 2, 27 No. 4, 782, No. 2, 533, 472, No. 2, 956, 879, No. 3, 148, 187, No. 3, 177, 078, No. 3, 247, 127, 3, 540, 887, 3, 575, 704, 3, 653, 905, 3, 718, 4 27 Can be mentioned.
[0068] 上記乳剤層中における染料の含有量は、ィラジェーシヨン防止などの効果と、添カロ 量増加による感度低下の観点から、全固形分に対して 0. 01〜10質量%が好ましく 、 0. 1〜5質量%がさらに好ましい。  [0068] The content of the dye in the emulsion layer is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content, from the viewpoint of preventing irradiation and the like and from the viewpoint of sensitivity reduction due to an increase in the amount of added calories. 1-5 mass% is further more preferable.
[0069] く銀塩〉  [0069] Ku silver salt>
本発明で用いられる銀塩としては、ハロゲンィ匕銀などの無機銀塩が挙げられる。本 発明にお 、ては、光センサーとしての特性に優れるハロゲンィ匕銀を用いることが好ま しい。  Examples of the silver salt used in the present invention include inorganic silver salts such as halogenated silver. In the present invention, it is preferable to use halogenated silver having excellent characteristics as an optical sensor.
[0070] 本発明で好ましく用いられるハロゲンィ匕銀について説明する。  [0070] Halogenated silver preferably used in the present invention will be described.
本発明では、光センサーとして機能させるためにハロゲンィ匕銀を使用することが好 ましぐハロゲンィ匕銀に関する銀塩写真フィルムや印画紙、印刷製版用フィルム、フォ トマスク用ェマルジヨンマスク等で用いられる技術は、本発明にお 、ても用いることが できる。  In the present invention, it is preferable to use halogenated silver for functioning as an optical sensor. It is used in silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate making film, emulsion mask for photomask, etc. relating to halogenated silver. The technique can also be used in the present invention.
[0071] 上記ハロゲン化銀に含有されるハロゲン元素は、塩素、臭素、ヨウ素およびフッ素 のいずれであってもよぐこれらを組み合わせでもよい。例えば、 AgCl、 AgBr、 Agl を主体としたハロゲンィ匕銀が好ましく用いられ、さらに AgBrや AgClを主体としたハロ ゲンィ匕銀が好ましく用いられる。塩臭化銀、沃塩臭化銀、沃臭化銀もまた好ましく用 いられる。より好ましくは、塩臭化銀、臭化銀、沃塩臭化銀、沃臭化銀であり、最も好 ましくは、塩化銀 50モル%以上を含有する塩臭化銀、沃塩臭化銀が用いられる。  [0071] The halogen element contained in the silver halide may be chlorine, bromine, iodine, or fluorine, or a combination thereof. For example, halogen silver containing mainly AgCl, AgBr and Agl is preferably used, and halogen silver containing mainly AgBr and AgCl is preferably used. Silver chlorobromide, silver iodochlorobromide and silver iodobromide are also preferably used. Silver chlorobromide, silver bromide, silver iodochlorobromide and silver iodobromide are more preferable, and silver chlorobromide and iodochlorobromide containing 50 mol% or more of silver chloride are most preferable. Silver is used.
[0072] 尚、ここで、 「AgBr (臭化銀)を主体としたハロゲンィ匕銀」とは、ハロゲン化銀組成中 に占める臭化物イオンのモル分率が 50%以上のハロゲン化銀を 、う。この AgBrを 主体としたハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、臭化物イオンのほかに沃化物イオン、塩化物イオン を含有していてもよい。  [0072] Here, "halogenated silver mainly composed of AgBr (silver bromide)" means silver halide in which the molar fraction of bromide ions in the silver halide composition is 50% or more. . The silver halide silver grains mainly composed of AgBr may contain iodide ions and chloride ions in addition to bromide ions.
[0073] ノヽロゲン化銀は固体粒子状であり、露光、現像処理後に形成されるパターン状金 属銀層の画像品質の観点からは、ハロゲンィ匕銀の平均粒子サイズは、球相当径で 0 . 1〜1000ηπι(1 /ζ πι)であることが好ましぐ 0. l〜100nmであることがより好ましく 、 l〜50nmであることがさらに好ましい。 [0073] Silver halide is in the form of a solid grain, and from the viewpoint of image quality of the patterned metal silver layer formed after exposure and development, the average grain size of silver halide silver is 0 in terms of a sphere equivalent diameter. It is preferably 1 to 1000 ηπι (1 / ζππ), more preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, and even more preferably 1 to 50 nm.
尚、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の球相当径とは、粒子形状が球形の同じ体積を有する粒子 の直径である。  The spherical equivalent diameter of a halogenated silver particle is a diameter of a particle having a spherical shape and the same volume.
[0074] ハロゲン化銀粒子の形状は特に限定されず、例えば、球状、立方体状、平板状 (6 角平板状、三角形平板状、 4角形平板状など)、八面体状、 14面体状など様々な形 状であることができ、立方体、 14面体が好ましい。  [0074] The shape of the silver halide grains is not particularly limited. For example, various shapes such as a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a flat plate shape (hexagonal flat plate shape, triangular flat plate shape, quadrangular flat plate shape, etc.), octahedral shape, tetrahedral shape, etc. The cubic shape and the tetrahedron shape are preferable.
ハロゲン化銀粒子は内部と表層が均一な相力 なって 、ても異なって 、てもよ 、。 また粒子内部或いは表面にハロゲン組成の異なる局在層を有していてもよい。  The silver halide grains can have a uniform internal and surface layer, or they can be different. Moreover, you may have the localized layer from which a halogen composition differs in a particle | grain inside or the surface.
[0075] 本発明に用いられる乳剤層用塗布液であるハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤は、 P. Glalkides著 Chimie etPhysique Photographique (Paul Montel社刊、 1967年)、 G. F. Dufin著 Pho tographic Emulsion Chemistry (The Forcal Press干、 1966年)、 V. L.Zelikman ま力著 Ma ing and Coating Photographic Emulsion (The ForcalPress刊、 1964年)などに 記載された方法を用いて調製することができる。 [0075] Halogen silver emulsion used as an emulsion layer coating solution for use in the present invention is P. Glalkides, Chimie et Physique Photographique (Paul Montel, 1967), GF Dufin, Pho tographic Emulsion Chemistry (The Forcal Press , 1966), VLZelikman MATSUKI, Managing and Coating Photographic Emulsion (published by The ForcalPress, 1964) and the like.
[0076] すなわち、上記ハロゲン化銀乳剤の調製方法としては、酸性法、中性法等のいず れでもよぐ又、可溶性銀塩と可溶性ハロゲン塩とを反応させる方法としては、片側混 合法、同時混合法、それらの組み合わせなどのいずれを用いてもよい。 That is, the silver halide emulsion may be prepared by any of an acidic method and a neutral method, and a method of reacting a soluble silver salt with a soluble halogen salt may be a one-side mixing method. Any of a simultaneous mixing method, a combination thereof, and the like may be used.
また、銀粒子の形成方法としては、粒子を銀イオン過剰の下において形成させる方 法 (いわゆる逆混合法)を用いることもできる。さらに、同時混合法の一つの形式とし てハロゲンィ匕銀の生成される液相中の pAgを一定に保つ方法、すなわち、いわゆる コントロールド.ダブルジェット法を用いることもできる。  Further, as a method for forming silver particles, a method of forming particles in the presence of excess silver ions (so-called back mixing method) can also be used. Further, as one type of the simultaneous mixing method, a method of keeping pAg constant in a liquid phase in which halogenated silver is formed, that is, a so-called controlled double jet method can be used.
またアンモニア、チォエーテル、四置換チォ尿素等のいわゆるハロゲンィ匕銀溶剤を 使用して粒子形成させることも好ましい。係る方法としてより好ましくは四置換チォ尿 素化合物であり、特開昭 53— 82408号、同 55— 77737号などの各公報に記載され ている。好ましいチォ尿素化合物としてはテトラメチルチオ尿素、 1, 3—ジメチルー 2 —イミダゾリジンチオンなどが挙げられる。ハロゲンィ匕銀溶剤の添加量は用いる化合 物の種類および目的とする粒子サイズ、ハロゲン組成により異なる力 ハロゲンィ匕銀 1 モノレあたり 10— 5〜: L0— 2モノレが好まし!/、。 [0077] 上記コントロールド ·ダブルジェット法およびハロゲンィ匕銀溶剤を使用した粒子形成 方法では、結晶型が規則的で粒子サイズ分布の狭 ヽハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤を作るのが 容易であり、本発明に好ましく用いることができる。 It is also preferable to form grains using a so-called halogenated silver solvent such as ammonia, thioether or tetrasubstituted thiourea. More preferred as such a method is a tetra-substituted thiourea compound, which is described in JP-A Nos. 53-82408 and 55-77737. Preferred thiourea compounds include tetramethylthiourea and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinethione. Type and particle size of interest of Harogeni匕銀amount of the solvent used compounds, different forces Harogeni匕銀per Monore 10- 5 ~ by halogen composition:! L0- 2 Monore is preferably /,. [0077] According to the controlled double jet method and the grain forming method using a halogenated silver solvent, it is easy to produce a halogenated silver emulsion having a regular crystal type and a narrow grain size distribution. It can be preferably used.
また、粒子サイズを均一にするためには、英国特許第 1 , 535, 016号明細書、特 公昭 48— 36890号公報、同 52— 16364号公報に記載されているように、硝酸銀や ハロゲンィ匕アルカリの添加速度を粒子成長速度に応じて変化させる方法や、英国特 許第 4, 242, 445号明細書、特開昭 55— 158124号公報に記載されているように 水溶液の濃度を変化させる方法を用いて、臨界飽和度を越えな 、範囲にぉ 、て速く 銀を成長させることが好ましい。本発明における乳剤層の形成に用いられるハロゲン 化銀乳剤は単分散乳剤が好ましぐ { (粒子サイズの標準偏差) Z (平均粒子サイズ) } X 100で表される変動係数が 20%以下、より好ましくは 15%以下、最も好ましくは 1 0%以下であることが好まし 、。  In order to make the grain size uniform, as described in British Patent No. 1,535,016, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 48-36890 and 52-16364, silver nitrate or halogenated silver is used. The method of changing the alkali addition rate according to the particle growth rate, or changing the concentration of the aqueous solution as described in British Patent No. 4,242,445, JP-A-55-158124 It is preferred that the method be used to grow silver quickly and in a range that does not exceed critical saturation. The silver halide emulsion used for the formation of the emulsion layer in the present invention is preferably a monodisperse emulsion {(standard deviation of grain size) Z (average grain size)} The coefficient of variation represented by X100 is 20% or less, More preferably, it is 15% or less, and most preferably 10% or less.
[0078] 本発明に用いられるハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤は、粒子サイズの異なる複数種類のハロゲ ン化銀乳剤を混合してもよ 、。  [0078] The silver halide silver emulsion used in the present invention may be a mixture of a plurality of types of silver halide emulsions having different grain sizes.
[0079] 本発明に用いられるハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤は、周期律表の VIII族、 VIIB族に属する金 属元素を含有してもよい。特に、高コントラストおよび低カプリを達成するために、ロジ ゥム化合物、イリジウム化合物、ルテニウム化合物、鉄化合物、オスミウム化合物など を含有することが好ましい。これら化合物は、各種の配位子を有する化合物であって よぐ配位子として例えば、シアンィ匕物イオンゃノヽロゲンイオン、チオシアナ一トイオン 、ニトロシルイオン、水、水酸化物イオンなどの擬ハロゲンリガンド、アンモニアのほか [0079] The halogen silver halide emulsion used in the present invention may contain a metal element belonging to Group VIII or VIIB of the periodic table. In particular, in order to achieve high contrast and low capri, it is preferable to contain rhodium compounds, iridium compounds, ruthenium compounds, iron compounds, osmium compounds and the like. These compounds are compounds having various ligands, and examples of such ligands include pseudohalogen ligands such as cyanide ions, cyanogen ions, thiocyanate ions, nitrosyl ions, water, hydroxide ions, Besides ammonia
、アミン類 (メチルァミン、エチレンジァミン等)、ヘテロ環化合物 (イミダゾール、チアゾ ール、 5—メチルチアゾール、メルカプトイミダゾールなど)、尿素、チォ尿素等の有機 分子を挙げることができる。 And organic molecules such as amines (methylamine, ethylenediamine, etc.), heterocyclic compounds (imidazole, thiazol, 5-methylthiazole, mercaptoimidazole, etc.), urea, and thiourea.
また、高感度化のためには K [Fe (CN) ) ^>K [Ru (CN)〕、K [Cr (CN)〕のごと  For higher sensitivity, K [Fe (CN)) ^> K [Ru (CN)], K [Cr (CN)]
4 6 4 6 3 6 き六シァノ化金属錯体のドープが有利に行われる。  4 6 4 6 3 6 Doping of a metal hexasyanide complex is advantageously performed.
[0080] 上記ロジウム化合物としては、水溶性ロジウム化合物を用いることができる。水溶性 ロジウム化合物としては、例えば、ハロゲン化ロジウム(III)化合物、へキサクロロロジ ゥム(III)錯塩、ペンタクロロアコロジウム錯塩、テトラクロロジアコロジウム錯塩、へキサ ブロモロジウム(in)錯塩、へキサァミンロジウム(III)錯塩、トリザラトロジウム(III)錯塩 、 K Rh Br等が挙げられる。 [0080] As the rhodium compound, a water-soluble rhodium compound can be used. Examples of the water-soluble rhodium compounds include rhodium (III) halide compounds, hexachlororhodium (III) complex salts, pentachloroacorodium complex salts, tetrachlorodiacolodium complex salts, hexadium salts. Examples include bromorhodium (in) complex salts, hexaminerhodium (III) complex salts, trizalatrdium (III) complex salts, and K Rh Br.
3 2 9  3 2 9
これらのロジウム化合物は、水或いは適当な溶媒に溶解して用いられるが、ロジゥ ム化合物の溶液を安定ィ匕させるために一般によく行われる方法、すなわち、ハロゲン 化水素水溶液 (例えば塩酸、臭酸、フッ酸等)、或いはハロゲンィ匕アルカリ(例えば κ These rhodium compounds are used by dissolving in water or a suitable solvent, but are generally used in order to stabilize the solution of the rhodium compound, that is, an aqueous hydrogen halide solution (for example, hydrochloric acid, odorous acid, Hydrofluoric acid, etc.) or halogenated alkali (eg κ
Cl、 NaCl、 KBr、 NaBr等)を添加する方法を用いることができる。水溶性ロジウムを 用いる代わりにハロゲンィ匕銀調製時に、あら力じめロジウムをドープしてある別のハロ ゲンィ匕銀粒子を添加して溶解させることも可能である。 Cl, NaCl, KBr, NaBr, etc.) can be used. Instead of using water-soluble rhodium, it is also possible to add other halogen silver particles doped with rhodium and dissolve it at the time of preparing the silver halide silver.
[0081] 上記イリジウム化合物としては、 K IrCl、 K IrCl等のへキサクロ口イリジウム錯塩、 [0081] Examples of the iridium compound include hexadium mouth iridium complex salts such as K IrCl and K IrCl,
2 6 3 6  2 6 3 6
へキサブロモイリジウム錯塩、へキサアンミンイリジウム錯塩、ペンタクロロ-トロシルイ リジゥム錯塩等が挙げられる。  Hexabromoiridium complex salts, hexammine iridium complex salts, pentachloro-trosyl iridium complex salts and the like.
上記ルテニウム化合物としては、へキサクロ口ルテニウム、ペンタクロロ-トロシルル テ-ゥム、 K [Ru (CN)〕等が挙げられる。  Examples of the ruthenium compound include hexaclonal ruthenium, pentachloro-trosyl ruthenium, K [Ru (CN)] and the like.
4 6  4 6
上記鉄化合物としては、へキサシァノ鉄 (π)酸カリウム、チォシアン酸第一鉄が挙 げられる。  Examples of the iron compound include potassium hexanoate (π) and ferrous thiocyanate.
[0082] 上記ルテニウム化合物、ォスミニゥム化合物は特開昭 63— 2042号公報、特開平 1 — 285941号公報、同 2— 20852号公報、同 2— 20855号公報等に記載された水 溶性錯塩の形で添加され、特に好ましいものとして、以下の式で示される六配位錯 体が挙げられる。  The above ruthenium compounds and osmium compounds are in the form of water-soluble complex salts described in JP-A 63-2042, JP-A 1-285941, JP-A 2-20852, JP-A 2-20855, and the like. Particularly preferred is a hexacoordination complex represented by the following formula.
[ML〕一11 [ML] 11
6  6
(ここで、 Mは Ru、または Osを表し、 nは 0、 1、 2、 3または 4を表す。 )  (Here, M represents Ru or Os, and n represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.)
この場合、対イオンは重要性を持たず、例えば、アンモ-ゥム若しくはアルカリ金属 イオンが用いられる。また好ましい配位子としてはハロゲン化物配位子、シアン化物 配位子、シアン酸化物配位子、ニトロシル配位子、チォニトロシル配位子等が挙げら れる。以下に本発明に用いられる具体的錯体の例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定さ れるものではない。  In this case, the counter ion has no significance, and for example, ammonium or alkali metal ions are used. Preferable ligands include a halide ligand, a cyanide ligand, a cyan oxide ligand, a nitrosyl ligand, a thionitrosyl ligand, and the like. Examples of specific complexes used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
[0083] 〔RuCl〕— 3、 [RuCl (Η Ο) Υ [RuCl (NO) ]"2, [RuBr (NS)〕— 2、 [Ru (CO) CI [0083] [RuCl] — 3 , [RuCl (Η Ο) Υ [RuCl (NO)] ” 2 , [RuBr (NS)] — 2 , [Ru (CO) CI
6 4 2 2 5 5 3 6 4 2 2 5 5 3
〕—2、〔Ru(CO) Cl〕— 2、〔Ru (CO) Br〕— 2、〔OsCl〕— 3、 [OsCl (NO) ]"2, [Os (NO) ( CN)〕— 2、 〔Os (NS) Br〕— 2、 [Os (CN)〕— 4、 〔Os (0) (CN)〕— 4] - 2, [Ru (CO) Cl] - 2, [Ru (CO) Br] - 2, [OsCl] - 3, [OsCl (NO) ] "2, [Os (NO) ( CN)] - 2, [Os (NS) Br] - 2, [Os (CN)] - 4, [Os (0) (CN)] - 4.
5 5 6 2 5  5 5 6 2 5
[0084] これらの化合物の添力卩量はハロゲン化銀 1モル当り 10— ω〜10— 2モル Zモル Agであ ることが好ましぐ 10— 9〜: L0— 3モル/モル Agであることがさらに好ましい。 [0084]添力卩量silver halide per mole of 10-omega to 10-2 mol Z mol Ag der Rukoto is preferred instrument 10 9 ~ of these compounds: L0- 3 mol / mol Ag More preferably it is.
[0085] その他、本発明では、 Pd (II)イオンおよび Zまたは Pd元素を含有するハロゲン化 銀も好ましく用いることができる。 Pdはハロゲンィ匕銀粒子内に均一に分布していても よいが、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の表層近傍に含有させることが好ましい。ここで、 Pdが「ノヽ ロゲン化銀粒子の表層近傍に含有する」とは、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の表面力も深さ方 向に 50nm以内にぉ 、て、他層よりもパラジウムの含有率が高 、層を有することを意 味する。 このようなハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子を形成する途中で Pdを 添加することにより作製することができ、銀イオンとハロゲンイオンとをそれぞれ総添 加量の 50%以上添加した後に、 Pdを添加することが好ましい。また Pd(II)イオンを 後熟時に添加するなどの方法でハロゲンィ匕銀表層に存在させることも好ま 、。  In addition, in the present invention, silver halides containing Pd (II) ions and Z or Pd elements can also be preferably used. Pd may be uniformly distributed in the halogen silver halide grains, but is preferably contained in the vicinity of the surface layer of the halogen silver halide grains. Here, Pd is “contained in the vicinity of the surface layer of the silver halide grain” when the surface force of the halogenated silver grain is within 50 nm in the depth direction, and the palladium content is higher than that of the other layers. Means to have a layer. Such halogen silver particles can be prepared by adding Pd during the formation of the halogen silver particles, and after adding silver ions and halogen ions in an amount of 50% or more of the total addition amount, Pd is preferably added. It is also preferable to add Pd (II) ions to the surface of the silver halide silver layer by a method such as addition at the time of post-ripening.
この Pd含有ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、物理現像や無電解めつきの速度を速め、所望の 電磁波シールド材の生産効率を上げ、生産コストの低減に寄与する。 Pdは、無電解 めっき触媒としてよく知られて用いられている力 本発明では、ハロゲン化銀粒子の 表層に Pdを偏在させることが可能なため、極めて高価な Pdを節約することが可能で ある。  These Pd-containing halogenated silver particles increase the speed of physical development and electroless plating, increase the production efficiency of the desired electromagnetic shielding material, and contribute to the reduction of production costs. Pd is a well-known force used as an electroless plating catalyst In the present invention, Pd can be unevenly distributed on the surface layer of silver halide grains, so that it is possible to save extremely expensive Pd. .
[0086] 本発明にお 、て、ハロゲンィ匕銀に含まれる Pdイオンおよび Zまたは Pd金属元素の 含有率は、ハロゲン化銀の、銀のモル数に対して 10— 4〜0. 5モル/モル Agであるこ と力 子ましく、 0. 01-0. 3モル Zモル Agであることがさらに好ましい。 [0086] Contact with the present invention, Te, content of Pd ions and Z or Pd metal element contained in Harogeni匕銀is 10- 4-0 of silver halide, with respect to the number of moles of silver. 5 mol / More preferably, it is mol Ag, more preferably 0.01 to 0.3 mol Z mol Ag.
使用する Pd化合物の例としては、 PdClや、 Na PdCl等が挙げられる。  Examples of the Pd compound used include PdCl and Na PdCl.
4 2 4  4 2 4
[0087] 本発明では、さらに光センサーとしての感度を向上させるため、写真乳剤で行われ る化学増感を施すこともできる。化学増感の方法としては、硫黄増感、セレン増感、テ ルル増感等のカルコゲン増感、金増感などの貴金属増感、及び還元増感等を用い ることができる。これらは、単独または組み合わせて用いられる。上記化学増感の方 法を組み合わせて使用する場合には、例えば、硫黄増感法と金増感法、硫黄増感 法とセレン増感法と金増感法、硫黄増感法とテルル増感法と金増感法などの組み合 わせが好ましい。 [0088] 上記硫黄増感は、通常、硫黄増感剤を添加して、 40°C以上の高温で乳剤を一定 時間攪拌することにより行われる。上記硫黄増感剤としては公知の化合物を使用す ることができ、例えば、ゼラチン中に含まれる硫黄ィ匕合物のほか、種々の硫黄化合物 、例えば、チォ硫酸塩、チォ尿素類、チアゾール類、ローダ-ン類等を用いることが できる。好ましい硫黄化合物は、チォ硫酸塩、チォ尿素化合物である。硫黄増感剤 の添加量は、化学熟成時の pH、温度、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の大きさなどの種々の条 件の下で変化し、ハロゲン化銀 1モル当り 10— 7〜: LO— 2モルが好ましぐより好ましくは 1 0一5〜 10— 3モノレである。 In the present invention, chemical sensitization performed with a photographic emulsion can be performed in order to further improve the sensitivity as an optical sensor. As chemical sensitization methods, sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization, chalcogen sensitization such as tellurium sensitization, noble metal sensitization such as gold sensitization, reduction sensitization and the like can be used. These are used alone or in combination. When a combination of the above chemical sensitization methods is used, for example, sulfur sensitization method and gold sensitization method, sulfur sensitization method and selenium sensitization method and gold sensitization method, sulfur sensitization method and tellurium sensitization method. A combination of a sensitizing method and a gold sensitizing method is preferable. [0088] The sulfur sensitization is usually performed by adding a sulfur sensitizer and stirring the emulsion at a high temperature of 40 ° C or higher for a predetermined time. As the sulfur sensitizer, known compounds can be used. For example, in addition to sulfur compounds contained in gelatin, various sulfur compounds such as thiosulfate, thioureas, and thiazoles can be used. , Rhodons, etc. can be used. Preferred sulfur compounds are thiosulfate and thiourea compounds. The addition amount of the sulfur sensitizer, pH during chemical ripening, temperature, changes in various conditions under such size of Harogeni匕銀particles, per mol of silver halide 10- 7 ~: LO- 2 more preferably mole preferably tool 1 0 one 5 to 10-3 Monore.
[0089] 上記セレン増感に用いられるセレン増感剤としては、公知のセレン化合物を用いる ことができる。すなわち、上記セレン増感は、通常、不安定型および Zまたは非不安 定型セレンィ匕合物を添加して 40°C以上の高温で乳剤を一定時間攪拌することにより 行われる。上記不安定型セレンィ匕合物としては特公昭 44— 15748号公報、同 43— 13489号公報、特開平 4— 109240号公報、同 4— 324855号公報等に記載の化 合物を用いることができる。特に特開平 4— 324855号公報中の一般式 (VIII)および (IX)で示される化合物を用いることが好ま 、。  [0089] As the selenium sensitizer used for the selenium sensitization, known selenium compounds can be used. That is, the selenium sensitization is usually performed by adding unstable and Z or non-unstable selenium compounds and stirring the emulsion at a high temperature of 40 ° C. or higher for a certain period of time. As the unstable selenium compound, compounds described in JP-B-44-15748, JP-A-43-13489, JP-A-4-109240, JP-A-4-324855 and the like can be used. . In particular, it is preferable to use compounds represented by the general formulas (VIII) and (IX) in JP-A-4-324855.
[0090] 上記テルル増感剤に用いられるテルル増感剤は、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子表面または内 部に、増感核になると推定されるテルル化銀を生成せしめる化合物である。ハロゲン 化銀乳剤中のテルルイ匕銀生成速度については特開平 5— 313284号公報に記載の 方法で試験することができる。具体的には、米国特許 US第 1, 623, 499号明細書、 同第 3, 320, 069号明細書、同第 3, 772, 031号明細書、英国特許第 235, 211 号明細書、同第 1, 121, 496号明細書、同第 1, 295, 462号明細書、同第 1, 396 , 696号明細書、カナダ特許第 800, 958号明細書、特開平 4 204640号公報、 同 4— 271341号公報、同 4— 333043号公報、同 5— 303157号公報、ジャーナル •ォブ ·ケミカル ·ソサイァティ^ ~ ·ケミカル 'コミュニケーション(J.Chem.So Chem.Com mun.) 635頁(1980)、同 1102頁(1979)、同 645頁(1979)、ジャーナル ·ォブ ·ケミ カル.ソサイァティ一.パーキン.トランザクション (J.Chem.So Perkin.Trans.) 1卷, 21 91頁(1980)、 S.パタイ(S. Patai)編、ザ'ケミストリ一'ォブ 'オーガニック'セレニゥ ム'アンド'テルリウム 'カンパウンズ(The Chemistry of Organic Selenium and Telluniu m Compounds)、 1卷(1986)、同 2卷(1987)に記載の化合物を用いることができる 。特に特開平 5— 313284号公報中の一般式 (IIKIIIXIV)で示される化合物が好まし い。 [0090] The tellurium sensitizer used in the tellurium sensitizer is a compound that forms silver telluride, which is presumed to be a sensitization nucleus, on the surface or inside of the silver halide silver grains. The formation rate of tellurite silver in the silver halide emulsion can be tested by the method described in JP-A-5-313284. Specifically, U.S. Pat.Nos. 1,623,499, 3,320,069, 3,772,031, British Patent 235,211, No. 1,121,496, No. 1,295,462, No. 1,396,696, Canadian Patent No. 800,958, JP-A-4 204640, 4-271341, 4-333043, and 5-303157, Journal • Chemical Society ^ ~ Chemical 'Communication (J.Chem.So Chem.Com mun.) Page 635 ( 1980), 1102 (1979), 645 (1979), Journal of Chemical Society, Perkin Transaction (J. Chem. So Perkin. Trans.) 1, 21 91 (1980) ), S. Patai, The Chemistry of Organic Selenium and Telluniu m Compounds), 1 卷 (1986), 2 卷 (1987) can be used. In particular, a compound represented by the general formula (IIKIIIXIV) in JP-A-5-313284 is preferred.
[0091] 本発明で用いることのできるセレン増感剤およびテルル増感剤の使用量は、使用 するハロゲンィ匕銀粒子、化学熟成条件等によって変わるが、一般にハロゲンィ匕銀 1モ ル当たり 10— 8〜: L0— 2モル、好ましくは 10— 7〜: L0— 3モル程度を用いる。本発明における 化学増感の条件としては特に制限はないが、 pHとしては 5〜8、 pAgとしては 6〜11 、好ましくは 7〜 10であり、温度としては 40〜95°C、好ましくは 45〜85°Cである。 [0091] The amount of the selenium sensitizer and a tellurium sensitizer that can be used in the present invention, Harogeni匕銀particles used, but the chemical ripening condition and the like and, generally Harogeni匕銀1 molar per 10- 8 ~: L0- 2 moles, preferably 10- 7 ~: L0- 3 moles is used. The conditions for chemical sensitization in the present invention are not particularly limited, but the pH is 5 to 8, pAg is 6 to 11, preferably 7 to 10, and the temperature is 40 to 95 ° C, preferably 45. ~ 85 ° C.
[0092] また、上記貴金属増感剤としては、金、白金、ノラジウム、イリジウム等が挙げられ、 特に金増感が好ましい。金増感に用いられる金増感剤としては、具体的には、塩ィ匕 金酸、カリウムクロ口オーレート、カリウムォーリチオシァネート、硫化金、チォダルコ一 ス金(1)、チォマンノース金(I)などが挙げられ、ハロゲン化銀 1モル当たり 10— 7〜ιο_2 モル程度を用いることができる。本発明に用いるハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤にはハロゲンィ匕銀 粒子の形成または物理熟成の過程においてカドミウム塩、亜硫酸塩、鉛塩、タリウム 塩などを共存させてもよい。 [0092] Examples of the noble metal sensitizer include gold, platinum, noradium, iridium and the like, and gold sensitization is particularly preferable. Specific examples of gold sensitizers used for gold sensitization include salt and gold acid, potassium chromate orate, potassium thiothiocyanate, gold sulfide, tiodarcos gold (1), tiomannose gold ( I) and the like, can be used per mole 10- 7 ~ιο_ 2 moles silver halide. A cadmium salt, a sulfite salt, a lead salt, a thallium salt, etc. may coexist in the halogen-silver emulsion used in the present invention in the process of halogen-silver particle formation or physical ripening.
[0093] また、本発明においては、還元増感を用いることができる。還元増感剤としては第 ースズ塩、アミン類、ホルムアミジンスルフィン酸、シラン化合物などを用いることがで きる。上記ハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤は、欧州公開特許 (EP) 293917号明細書に示される 方法により、チォスルホン酸化合物を添加してもよい。本発明に用いられる感光材料 の作製に用いられるハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤は、 1種だけでもよいし、 2種以上 (例えば、平 均粒子サイズの異なるもの、ハロゲン糸且成の異なるもの、晶癖の異なるもの、化学増 感の条件の異なるもの、感度の異なるもの)の併用であってもよい。中でも高コントラ ストを得るためには、特開平 6— 324426号公報に記載されているように、支持体に 近 、ほど高感度な乳剤を塗布することが好ま U、。  [0093] In the present invention, reduction sensitization can be used. As the reduction sensitizer, stannic salts, amines, formamidinesulfinic acid, silane compounds, and the like can be used. A thiosulfonic acid compound may be added to the above-described halogenated silver emulsion by the method described in European Patent Publication (EP) 293917. The silver halide emulsion used in the production of the light-sensitive material used in the present invention may be only one type, or two or more types (for example, those having different average grain sizes, those having different halogen yarn compositions, crystal habits). Different types, those with different chemical sensitization conditions, and those with different sensitivities) may be used in combination. In particular, in order to obtain a high contrast, it is preferable to apply an emulsion having a high sensitivity close to the support as described in JP-A-6-324426.
[0094] <バインダー >  [0094] <Binder>
乳剤層には、銀塩粒子を均一に分散させ、かつ乳剤層と支持体との密着を補助す る目的でバインダーを用いることができる。本発明において上記バインダーとしては、 非水溶性ポリマーおよび水溶性ポリマーのいずれもバインダーとして用いることがで きるが、水溶性ポリマーを用いることが好ましい。 A binder can be used in the emulsion layer for the purpose of uniformly dispersing silver salt grains and assisting the adhesion between the emulsion layer and the support. In the present invention, as the binder, both a water-insoluble polymer and a water-soluble polymer can be used as a binder. However, it is preferable to use a water-soluble polymer.
上記バインダーとしては、例えば、ゼラチン、ポリビュルアルコール(PVA)、ポリビ -ルピロリドン (PVP)、澱粉等の多糖類、セルロースおよびその誘導体、ポリエチレ ンオキサイド、ポリサッカライド、ポリビニルァミン、キトサン、ポリリジン、ポリアクリル酸 、ポリアルギン酸、ポリヒアルロン酸、カルボキシセルロース等が挙げられる。これらは 、官能基のイオン性によって中性、陰イオン性、陽イオン性の性質を有する。  Examples of the binder include polysaccharides such as gelatin, polybutyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), starch, cellulose and derivatives thereof, polyethylene oxide, polysaccharides, polyvinylamine, chitosan, polylysine, Examples include polyacrylic acid, polyalginic acid, polyhyaluronic acid, carboxycellulose, and the like. These have neutral, anionic, and cationic properties depending on the ionicity of the functional group.
[0095] 乳剤層中に含有されるバインダーの含有量は、特に限定されず、分散性と密着性 を発揮し得る範囲で適宜決定することができる。 [0095] The content of the binder contained in the emulsion layer is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately determined within a range in which dispersibility and adhesion can be exhibited.
本発明の製造方法における銀塩含有層中に含有されるバインダーの含有量は、分 散性と密着性とを発揮し得る範囲で適宜決定することができる。金属粒子同士が互 いに接触しやすぐ高い導電性を得るため、銀塩含有層中のノインダ一の含有量は 、 AgZバインダー体積比で 1Z2〜1Z0.1であることが好ましぐ 1Ζ1〜1Ζ0.5で あることがさらに好ましい。  The content of the binder contained in the silver salt-containing layer in the production method of the present invention can be appropriately determined within a range in which dispersibility and adhesion can be exhibited. In order to obtain high conductivity as soon as metal particles come into contact with each other, it is preferable that the content of noinda in the silver salt-containing layer is 1Z2 to 1Z0.1 in terms of AgZ binder volume ratio. More preferably, it is 1Ζ0.5.
[0096] <溶媒 >  [0096] <Solvent>
上記乳剤層の形成に用いられる溶媒は、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、 水、有機溶媒 (例えば、メタノール等アルコール類、アセトンなどケトン類、ホルムアミ ドなどのアミド類、ジメチルスルホキシドなどのスルホキシド類、酢酸ェチルなどのエス テル類、エーテル類等)、およびこれらの混合溶媒を挙げることができる。  The solvent used for forming the emulsion layer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include water, organic solvents (for example, alcohols such as methanol, ketones such as acetone, amides such as formamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, and the like. Examples thereof include sulfoxides, esters such as ethyl acetate, ethers, and the like, and mixed solvents thereof.
本発明の乳剤層に用いられる溶媒の含有量は、前記乳剤層に含まれる銀塩、バイ ンダ一等の合計の質量に対して 30〜90質量%の範囲であり、 50〜80質量%の範 囲であることが好ましい。  The content of the solvent used in the emulsion layer of the present invention is in the range of 30 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of silver salt and binder contained in the emulsion layer, and 50 to 80% by mass. A range is preferred.
[0097] <硬膜剤> [0097] <Hardener>
本発明に係る感光材料の乳剤層およびその他の親水性コロイド層は、硬膜剤によ つて硬膜されることが好まし 、。  The emulsion layer and other hydrophilic colloid layers of the light-sensitive material according to the present invention are preferably hardened with a hardener.
硬膜剤としては、無機又は有機のゼラチン硬化剤を単独又は組合せて用いること ができる。例えば活性ビュル化合物(1, 3, 5 トリアタリロイル—へキサヒドロ s ト リアジン、ビス(ビュルスルホ -ルメチル)エーテル、 Ν, N' —メチレンビス一〔 j8— ( ビュルスルホ -ル)プロピオンアミド〕など)活性ハロゲン化合物(2, 4 ジクロル 6 —ヒドロキシ一 s トリァジンなど)、ムコハロゲン酸類(ムコクロル酸など)、 N 力ルバ モイルピリジ -ゥム塩類(( 1 モルホリノカルボ-ルー 3 ピリジ-ル)メタンスルホナ ートなど)、ハロアミジ-ゥム塩類(1— (1—クロ口一 1—ピリジノメチレン)ピロリジユウ ム一 2—ナフタレンスルホナートなど)を単独または組合せて用いることができる。 な力でも、特開昭 53— 41220号、同 53— 57257号、同 59— 162546号、同 60— 80846号などの各公報に記載の活性ビニル化合物および米国特許 3, 325, 287号 明細書に記載の活性ハロゲンィ匕合物が好ま 、。以下にゼラチン硬化剤の代表的 な化合物例を示す。 As the hardener, inorganic or organic gelatin hardeners can be used alone or in combination. For example, active bur compounds such as 1, 3, 5 triatalyloyl-hexahydro s triazine, bis (bululsulfurylmethyl) ether, Ν, N'-methylenebis ([j8- (bululsulfurol) propionamide], etc.) active halogen Compound (2, 4 Dichloro 6 —Hydroxy-trisazine, etc.), mucohalic acids (eg, mucochloric acid), N-strength rubamoylpyridyl-um salt (eg, 1 morpholinocarbolu-pyridyl) methanesulfonate, haloamidi-um salt (1 — (1—Black 1-Pyridinomethylene) pyrrolidinium 2-Naphthalenesulfonate, etc.) can be used alone or in combination. However, the active vinyl compounds described in JP-A-53-41220, JP-A-53-57257, JP-A-59-162546, JP-A-60-80846, and US Pat. No. 3,325,287. The active halogen compounds described in 1. are preferred. The following are examples of typical compounds of gelatin hardeners.
[化 1] [Chemical 1]
ϋ/: εϊ9ϊ1£ ϋ /: εϊ9ϊ1 £
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000041_0001
ϋ/:/ O εϊ9ϊ1£ 968880/-0SAV H I ϋ /: / O εϊ9ϊ1 £ 968880 / -0SAV H I
s = I s = I
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
I  I
星0 S0 a 0 stars S0 a
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
H - 1 6
Figure imgf000043_0002
前述したように、乳剤層の硬膜剤の添加量等を調製することにより、乳剤層の膨潤 率を任意にコントロールすることができる。
H-1 6
Figure imgf000043_0002
As described above, the swelling ratio of the emulsion layer can be arbitrarily controlled by adjusting the addition amount of the hardener in the emulsion layer.
乳剤層へ添加する硬膜剤量の好まし 、範囲は、硬膜剤添加後の感光材料の保存 温湿度、保存期間、感光材料の膜 pHおよび感光材料に含まれるバインダー量等に よって異なるため、一概には決まらない。特に硬膜剤はバインダーと反応する前に感 光材料の同一面側に位置する全層にわたつて拡散し得るため、硬膜剤の好ま 、添 加量は乳剤層を含む感光材料の同一面側の全バインダー量に依存する。本発明の 感光材料の、好ましい硬膜剤の含有量は、乳剤層を含む感光材料の同一面側の総 バインダー量に対して 0. 2質量%〜15質量%の範囲であり、より好ましくは 0.5質量 %〜6質量%の範囲である。  The amount of hardener added to the emulsion layer is preferred and the range depends on the storage temperature and humidity of the photosensitive material after addition of the hardener, the storage period, the film pH of the photosensitive material, and the amount of binder contained in the photosensitive material. It ’s not clear. In particular, since the hardener can diffuse over all layers located on the same side of the light-sensitive material before reacting with the binder, the hardener is preferably added to the same surface of the photosensitive material including the emulsion layer. Depends on the total binder amount on the side. The preferable hardener content of the light-sensitive material of the present invention is in the range of 0.2 to 15% by weight, more preferably, based on the total binder amount on the same side of the light-sensitive material including the emulsion layer. It is in the range of 0.5 mass% to 6 mass%.
また前述のように硬膜剤は拡散し得るため、硬膜剤の添加位置は乳剤層である必 要は無ぐ乳剤層と同一面側のいずれの層にも好ましく添加でき、また複数の層に分 割して添加することも好ま 、。 Also, as mentioned above, the hardener can diffuse, so the hardener should be added to the emulsion layer. In short, it can be preferably added to any layer on the same side as the emulsion layer, and it is also preferable to add it divided into multiple layers.
[0102] (2)導電性シールド膜作製工程 [0102] (2) Conductive shield film manufacturing process
(2— 1)露光  (2-1) Exposure
本発明では、支持体上に設けられた銀塩含有層またはフォトリソグラフィー用フォト ポリマーを塗工した感光材料へのパターン形成用、すなわち照射部がパターン上ま たは非照射部がパターン状 (反転)露光を行う。露光は、電磁波を用いて行うことがで きる。電磁波としては、例えば、可視光線、紫外線などの光、 X線などの放射線等が 挙げられる。さらに露光には波長分布を有する光源を利用してもよぐ特定の波長の 光源を用いてもよい。  In the present invention, for forming a pattern on a photosensitive material coated with a silver salt-containing layer or a photopolymer for photolithography provided on a support, that is, an irradiated part is on a pattern or a non-irradiated part is patterned (inverted). ) Perform exposure. The exposure can be performed using electromagnetic waves. Examples of electromagnetic waves include light such as visible light and ultraviolet light, and radiation such as X-rays. Further, a light source having a specific wavelength may be used for exposure, or a light source having a wavelength distribution may be used.
[0103] 上記光源としては、必要に応じて可視スペクトル領域に発光を示す各種発光体が 用いられる。例えば、赤色発光体、緑色発光体、青色発光体のいずれか 1種又は 2 種以上が混合されて用いられる。スペクトル領域は、上記の赤色、緑色及び青色に 限定されず、黄色、橙色、紫色或いは赤外領域に発光する蛍光体も用いられる。特 に、これらの発光体を混合して白色に発光する陰極線管がしばしば用いられる。また 、紫外線ランプも好ましぐ水銀ランプの g線、水銀ランプの i線等も利用される。  [0103] As the light source, various light emitters that emit light in the visible spectrum region are used as necessary. For example, one or more of a red light emitter, a green light emitter, and a blue light emitter are used in combination. The spectral region is not limited to the above red, green, and blue, and a phosphor that emits light in the yellow, orange, purple, or infrared region is also used. In particular, a cathode ray tube that emits white light by mixing these light emitters is often used. In addition, mercury lamp g-line, mercury lamp i-line, etc., which are also preferred for ultraviolet lamps, are used.
[0104] また本発明では、露光は種々のレーザービームを用いて行うことが好ましい。例え ば、本発明における露光は、ガスレーザー、発光ダイオード、半導体レーザー、半導 体レーザー又は半導体レーザーを励起光源に用いた固体レーザーと非線形光学結 晶を組合わせた第二高調波発光光源 (SHG)等の単色高密度光を用いた走査露光 方式を好ましく用いることができ、さらに KrFエキシマレーザー、 ArFエキシマレーザ 一、 F2レーザー等も用いることができる。システムをコンパクトで、安価なものにする ために、露光は、半導体レーザー、半導体レーザーあるいは固体レーザーと非線形 光学結晶を組合わせた第二高調波発生光源 (SHG)を用いて行うことがより好ましい 。特にコンパクトで、安価、さらに寿命が長ぐ安定性が高い装置を設計するためには 、露光は半導体レーザーを用いて行うことが最も好まし 、。  [0104] In the present invention, exposure is preferably performed using various laser beams. For example, the exposure in the present invention is a second harmonic light source (SHG) that combines a solid-state laser using a gas laser, a light emitting diode, a semiconductor laser, a semiconductor laser, or a semiconductor laser as an excitation light source and a nonlinear optical crystal. A scanning exposure method using monochromatic high-density light such as) can be preferably used, and a KrF excimer laser, an ArF excimer laser, an F2 laser, or the like can also be used. In order to make the system compact and inexpensive, exposure is more preferably performed using a semiconductor laser, a semiconductor laser, or a second harmonic generation light source (SHG) that combines a solid-state laser and a nonlinear optical crystal. In order to design a device that is particularly compact, inexpensive, long-lived and highly stable, exposure is most preferably performed using a semiconductor laser.
露光のエネルギーとしては、ハロゲンィ匕銀を用いる場合には、照射エネルギー量は lmj/cm2以下が好ましぐ 100 j/cm2以下がより好ましぐ 50 j/cm2以下がさ らに好ましい。 When using halogen silver, the exposure energy is preferably lmj / cm 2 or less, preferably 100 j / cm 2 or less, more preferably 50 j / cm 2 or less. Further preferred.
[0105] レーザー光源としては、具体的には、波長 430〜460nmの青色半導体レーザー( 2001年 3月の第 48回応用物理学関係連合講演会で日亜化学発表)、半導体レー ザ一 (発振波長約 1060nm)を導波路状の反転ドメイン構造を有する LiNbOの SH  [0105] Specific examples of laser light sources include blue semiconductor lasers with a wavelength of 430 to 460 nm (announced by Nichia Chemical at the 48th Applied Physics-related Conference in March 2001), semiconductor lasers (oscillation) LiNbO SH with a waveguide inversion domain structure
3 Three
G結晶により波長変換して取り出した約 530nmの緑色レーザー、波長約 685nmの 赤色半導体レーザー(日立タイプ No. HL6738MG)、波長約 650nmの赤色半導 体レーザー(日立タイプ No. HL6501MG)などが好ましく用いられる。 Approx. 530nm green laser, wavelength 685nm red semiconductor laser (Hitachi type No. HL6738MG), wavelength 650nm red semiconductor laser (Hitachi type No. HL6501MG), etc., are preferably used. It is done.
[0106] 銀塩含有層をパターン状に露光する方法は、レーザービームによる走査露光が好 ま 、。特に特開 2000-39677号公報記載のキヤプスタン方式のレーザー走査露光装 置が好ましぐさらには該キヤブスタン方式においてポリゴンミラーの回転によるビー ム走査の代わりに特開 2004-1244号公報記載の DMDを光ビーム走査系に用いること も好ましい。  [0106] The method of exposing the silver salt-containing layer in a pattern is preferably scanning exposure using a laser beam. In particular, the capstan type laser scanning exposure apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-39677 is preferred. Further, in the capstan system, DMD described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-1244 is used instead of beam scanning by rotating a polygon mirror. It is also preferable to use it for a light beam scanning system.
[0107] (2— 2)現像処理  [0107] (2-2) Development processing
本発明では、乳剤層を露光した後、さらに現像処理が行われる。現像処理は、銀塩 写真フィルムや印画紙、印刷製版用フィルム、フォトマスク用ェマルジヨンマスク等に 用いられる通常の現像処理の技術を用いることができる。現像液については特に限 定はしないが、 PQ現像液、 MQ現像液、 MAA現像液等を用いることもでき、市販品 では、例えば、富士フィルム社処方の CN— 16、 CR— 56、 CP45X、 FD— 3、パピト ール、 KODAK社処方の C—41、 E— 6、 RA—4、 D—19、 D— 72などの各現像液 、またはそれらのキットに含まれる現像液を用いることができる。また、リス現像液を用 いることちでさる。  In the present invention, after the emulsion layer is exposed, further development processing is performed. The development processing can be performed by a normal development processing technique used for silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate-making film, photomask emulsion mask and the like. The developer is not particularly limited, but PQ developer, MQ developer, MAA developer, etc. can also be used, and commercially available products such as CN-16, CR-56, CP45X Each developer such as FD-3, Papitor, KODAK prescription C-41, E-6, RA-4, D-19, D-72, or the developer included in those kits should be used. it can. You can also use lith developer.
リス現像液としては、 KODAK社処方の D85などを用いることができる。本発明で は、上記の露光および現像処理を行うことにより露光部に金属銀部、好ましくはバタ ーン状金属銀部が形成されると共に、未露光部に後述する光透過性部が形成される  As the squirrel developer, D85 prescribed by KODAK can be used. In the present invention, by performing the above exposure and development treatment, a metallic silver portion, preferably a butter-shaped metallic silver portion is formed in the exposed portion, and a light transmissive portion described later is formed in the unexposed portion. Ru
[0108] 本発明の製造方法においては、上記現像液としてジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬 を用いることができる。ジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬としてはハイドロキノン、クロ口 ハイドロキノン、イソプロピルハイドロキノン、メチルハイドロキノン、ハイド口キノンモノス ルホン酸塩などが挙げられる力 特にハイドロキノンが好ましい。上記ジヒドロキシべ ンゼン系現像主薬と超加成性を示す補助現像主薬としては、 1—フエ-ル一 3—ビラ ゾリドン類や P ァミノフエノール類が挙げられる。本発明の製造方法において用いる 現像液としては、ジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬と 1 フエ二ノレ 3 ビラゾリドン類 との組合せ;またはジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬と p ァミノフエノール類との組合 せが好ましく用いられる。 [0108] In the production method of the present invention, a dihydroxybenzene developing agent can be used as the developer. Dihydroxybenzene developing agents include hydroquinone, black mouth hydroquinone, isopropyl hydroquinone, methyl hydroquinone, hide mouth quinone monos Forces such as sulfonates Particularly preferred is hydroquinone. Examples of auxiliary developing agents that exhibit superadditivity with the above-mentioned dihydroxybenzene-based developing agents include 1-phenol, 1-virazolidone, and paminophenols. As the developer used in the production method of the present invention, a combination of a dihydroxybenzene developing agent and 1-phenolino bisazolidone; or a combination of a dihydroxybenzene developing agent and p-aminophenols is preferably used.
[0109] 補助現像主薬として用いられる 1—フエ-ル一 3—ビラゾリドンまたはその誘導体と 組み合わせられる現像主薬としては、具体的に、 1—フエ-ル— 3—ビラゾリドン、 1— フエニル一 4, 4 ジメチル一 3 ピラゾリドン、 1—フエニル一 4—メチル 4 ヒドロキ シメチル一 3—ビラゾリドンなどがある。  [0109] As the developing agent used in combination with 1-phenol 3- virazolidone or its derivatives used as an auxiliary developing agent, specifically, 1-phenol 3- virazolidone, 1-phenyl 1, 4, 4 Examples include dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1-3-azolidone.
上記 P -ァミノフエノール系補助現像主薬としては、 N メチル p ァミノフエノー ル、 ρ ァミノフエノール、 N— ( j8—ヒドロキシェチル) p ァミノフエノール、 N— (4 ーヒドロキシフエ-ル)グリシン等がある力 なかでも N—メチルー p ァミノフエノール が好ましい。ジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬は、通常 0. 05〜0. 8モル/リットルの 量で用いられるのが好ましいが、本発明においては、 0. 23モル Zリットル以上で使 用するのが特に好ましい。さらに好ましくは、 0. 23〜0. 6モル Zリットルの範囲であ る。またジヒドロキシベンゼン類と 1―フエニル 3 ビラゾリドン類若しくは -アミノフ ェノール類との組合せを用いる場合には、前者を 0. 23-0. 6モル/リットル、さらに 好ましくは 0. 23〜0. 5モル Zリットル、後者を 0. 06モル Zリットル以下、さらに好ま しく ίま 0. 03モノレ/リットノレ〜 0. 003モノレ/リットノレの量で用! /、るの力好まし!/ヽ。  Examples of P-aminophenol auxiliary developing agents include N-methyl p-aminophenol, ρ-aminophenol, N— (j8-hydroxyethyl) p-aminophenol, and N— (4-hydroxyphenol) glycine. Of these, N-methyl-paminophenol is preferred. The dihydroxybenzene-based developing agent is usually preferably used in an amount of 0.05 to 0.8 mol / liter, but in the present invention, it is particularly preferably used in an amount of 0.23 mol Z liter or more. More preferably, it is in the range of 0.23 to 0.6 mol Z liter. In the case of using a combination of dihydroxybenzenes and 1-phenyl 3 bisazolidones or -aminophenols, the former is 0.23 to 0.6 mol / liter, more preferably 0.23 to 0.5 mol Z. Liters, the latter is less than 0.06 mol Z liters, more preferred ί 0.03 Monore / Lit Nore ~ 0.03 Monore / Lit Nore for use in amounts!
[0110] 本発明においては、現像開始液および現像補充液の双方力 「該液 1リットルに 0.  [0110] In the present invention, the both forces of the development starter and the development replenisher are as follows.
1モルの水酸ィ匕ナトリウムをカ卩えたときの pH上昇が 0. 5以下」である性質を有すること が好まし ヽ。使用する現像開始液な ヽし現像補充液がこの性質を有することを確か める方法としては、試験対象の現像開始液ないし現像補充液の pHを 10. 5に合わ せ、ついでこの液 1リットルに水酸化ナトリウムを 0. 1モル添カ卩し、この際の液の pH値 を測定し、 pH値の上昇が 0. 5以下であれば上記に規定した性質を有すると判定す る。本発明の製造方法では、特に、上記試験を行った時の pH値の上昇が 0. 4以下 である現像開始液および現像補充液を用いることが好まし 、。 [0111] 現像開始液および現像補充液に上記の性質を与える方法としては、緩衝剤を使用 した方法によることが好ましい。上記緩衝剤としては、炭酸塩、特開昭 62— 186259 号公報に記載のホウ酸、特開昭 60— 93433号公報に記載の糖類 (例えばサッカロ 一ス)、ォキシム類(例えばァセトォキシム)、フエノール類(例えば 5—スルホサリチル 酸)、第 3リン酸塩 (例えばナトリウム塩、カリウム塩)などを用いることができ、好ましく は炭酸塩、ホウ酸が用いられる。上記緩衝剤(特に炭酸塩)の使用量は、好ましくは、 0. 25モノレ/リットノレ以上であり、 0. 25〜: L 5モノレ/リットノレ力特に好まし!/ヽ。 It is preferable that the pH increase is 0.5 or less when 1 mol of sodium hydroxide is added. To confirm that the development replenisher to be used and the development replenisher have this property, adjust the pH of the development starter or developer replenisher to be tested to 10.5, and then add 1 liter of this solution. Add 0.1 mol of sodium hydroxide to the solution, measure the pH value of the liquid at this time, and determine that it has the properties specified above if the increase in pH value is 0.5 or less. In the production method of the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a development starting solution and a development replenisher that have an increase in pH value of 0.4 or less when the above test is performed. [0111] The method of imparting the above properties to the development initiator and the development replenisher is preferably a method using a buffer. Examples of the buffer include carbonates, boric acid described in JP-A-62-186259, saccharides (for example, saccharose), oximes (for example, acetooxime), phenols described in JP-A-60-93433. (For example, 5-sulfosalicylic acid), triphosphate (for example, sodium salt, potassium salt) and the like can be used, and carbonate and boric acid are preferably used. The amount of the above-mentioned buffering agent (particularly carbonate) is preferably 0.25 monolet / litnore or more, 0.25 ~: L5 monole / litnore power is particularly preferred! / ヽ.
[0112] 本発明においては、上記現像開始液の pHが 9. 0〜11. 0であることが好ましぐ 9 . 5〜10. 7の範囲であることが特に好ましい。上記現像補充液の pHおよび連続処 理時の現像タンク内の現像液の pHもこの範囲である。 pH設定のために用いるアル カリ剤には通常の水溶性無機アルカリ金属塩 (例えば水酸ィ匕ナトリウム、水酸化力リウ ム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム)を用いることができる。  In the present invention, it is particularly preferable that the pH of the development initiator is 9.0 to 11.0, particularly preferably 9.5 to 10.7. The pH of the developer replenisher and the developer in the developer tank during continuous processing are also in this range. As the alkali agent used for setting the pH, usual water-soluble inorganic alkali metal salts (for example, sodium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate) can be used.
[0113] 本発明の製造方法において、感光材料 1平方メートルを処理する際に、現像液中 の現像補充液の含有量は 323ミリリットル以下、好ましくは 323〜30ミリリットル、特に 225〜50ミリリットルである。現像補充液は、現像開始液と同一の組成を有していても ょ 、し、現像で消費される成分にっ 、て開始液よりも高 、濃度を有して 、てもよ 、。  In the production method of the present invention, when processing 1 square meter of the photosensitive material, the content of the developer replenisher in the developer is 323 ml or less, preferably 323 to 30 ml, particularly 225 to 50 ml. The development replenisher may have the same composition as the development starter, and the components consumed in development may have a higher concentration than the starter.
[0114] 本発明で感光材料を現像処理する際の現像液 (以下、現像開始液および現像補 充液の双方をまとめて単に「現像液」という場合がある)には、通常用いられる添加剤 (例えば、保恒剤、キレート剤)を含有することができる。上記保恒剤としては亜硫酸 ナトリウム、亜硫酸カリウム、亜硫酸リチウム、亜硫酸アンモ-ゥム、重亜硫酸ナトリウ ム、メタ重亜硫酸カリウム、ホルムアルデヒド重亜硫酸ナトリウムなどの亜硫酸塩が挙 げられる。該亜硫酸塩は、 0. 20モル Zリットル以上用いられることが好ましぐさらに 好ましくは 0. 3モル Zリットル以上用いられる力 余りに多量添加すると現像液中の 銀汚れの原因になるので、上限は 1. 2モル Zリットルとするのが望ましい。特に好ま しくは、 0. 35〜0. 7モル Zリットルである。また、ジヒドロキシべ 'BR〉塔 [ン系現像主 薬の保恒剤として、亜硫酸塩と併用してァスコルビン酸誘導体を少量使用してもょ 、 。ここでァスコルビン酸誘導体とは、ァスコルビン酸、および、その立体異性体である エリソルビン酸やそのアルカリ金属塩 (ナトリウム、カリウム塩)などを包含する。上記ァ スコルビン酸誘導体としては、エリソルビン酸ナトリウムを用いることが素材コストの点 で好まし 、。上記ァスコルビン酸誘導体の添カ卩量はジヒドロキシベンゼン系現像主薬 に対して、モノ kttで 0. 03-0. 12の範囲力好ましく、特に好ましく ίま 0. 05-0. 10 の範囲である。上記保恒剤としてァスコルビン酸誘導体を使用する場合には現像液 中にホウ素化合物を含まな 、ことが好ま 、。 [0114] Additives usually used for the developer used for developing the light-sensitive material in the present invention (hereinafter, both the development initiator and the development replenisher may be simply referred to as "developer") (For example, a preservative and a chelating agent) can be contained. Examples of the preservative include sulfites such as sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, lithium sulfite, ammonium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium metabisulfite, and sodium formaldehyde bisulfite. The sulfite is preferably used in an amount of 0.20 mol Z liters or more, more preferably 0.3 mol Z liters or more. If added too much, it causes silver stains in the developer, so the upper limit is 1. 2 mol Z liter is desirable. Particularly preferred is 0.35 to 0.7 mole Z liter. In addition, a small amount of ascorbic acid derivative may be used in combination with sulfite as a preservative for the dihydroxy base BR developer. Here, the ascorbic acid derivative includes ascorbic acid and its stereoisomer erythorbic acid and its alkali metal salts (sodium and potassium salts). Above As the scorbic acid derivative, sodium erythorbate is preferred in terms of material cost. The amount of the ascorbic acid derivative added is preferably in the range of 0.03-0.12 in terms of mono-ktt, particularly preferably in the range of 0.05-5.10 with respect to the dihydroxybenzene developing agent. When an ascorbic acid derivative is used as the preservative, it is preferable that the developer does not contain a boron compound.
[0115] 上記以外に現像剤に用いることのできる添加剤としては、臭化ナトリウム、臭化カリ ゥムの如き現像抑制剤;エチレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコ ール、ジメチルホルムアミドの如き有機溶剤;ジエタノールァミン、トリエタノールァミン 等のアルカノールァミン、イミダゾールまたはその誘導体等の現像促進剤や、メルカ プト系化合物、インダゾール系化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物、ベンゾイミダゾ ール系化合物をカプリ防止剤または黒ポッ (black pepper)防止剤として含んでもよい 。上記べンゾイミダゾール系化合物としては、具体的に、 5— -トロインダゾール、 5— p -トロベンゾィルァミノインダゾール、 1ーメチルー 5 -トロインダゾール、 6 -ト ロインダゾール、 3—メチルー 5— -トロインダゾール、 5— -トロべンズイミダゾール、 2—イソプロピル— 5 -トロべンズイミダゾール、 5 -トロべンズトリァゾール、 4—〔 (2 メルカプト 1, 3, 4ーチアジアゾールー 2 ィル)チォ〕ブタンスルホン酸ナトリ ゥム、 5 アミノー 1, 3, 4 チアジアゾールー 2 チオール、メチルベンゾトリァゾー ル、 5 メチルベンゾトリァゾール、 2 メルカプトべンゾトリアゾールなどを挙げること ができる。これらべンゾイミダゾール系化合物の含有量は、通常、現像液 1リットル当り 0. 01〜: LOmmolであり、より好ましくは、 0. l〜2mmolである。  [0115] In addition to the above, additives that can be used in the developer include development inhibitors such as sodium bromide and potassium bromide; organic solvents such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, and dimethylformamide. ; Development accelerators such as alkanolamines such as diethanolamine and triethanolamine, imidazole or derivatives thereof, and mercapto compounds, indazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, and benzoimidazole compounds as capri-protecting agents Alternatively, it may be included as a black pepper inhibitor. Specific examples of the benzoimidazole compound include 5--troindazole, 5-p-trobenzoylaminoindazole, 1-methyl-5-troindazole, 6-toluindazole, 3-methyl-5--. Troindazole, 5 --- Trobenzimidazole, 2-Isopropyl-5-Trobenzimidazole, 5-Trobenstriazole, 4-[(2 Mercapto 1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl) thio] butanesulfone Examples include sodium acid, 5 amino-1,3,4 thiadiazole-2 thiol, methylbenzotriazole, 5 methylbenzotriazole, and 2 mercaptobenzotriazole. The content of these benzoimidazole compounds is usually from 0.01 to LOmmol, more preferably from 0.1 to 2mmol per liter of developer.
[0116] さらに上記現像液中には、各種の有機 ·無機のキレート剤を併用することができる。  [0116] Further, various organic / inorganic chelating agents can be used in combination in the developer.
上記無機キレート剤としては、テトラポリリン酸ナトリウム、へキサメタリン酸ナトリウム等 を用いることができる。一方、上記有機キレート剤としては、主に有機カルボン酸、アミ ノポリカルボン酸、有機ホスホン酸、ァミノホスホン酸および有機ホスホノカルボン酸を 用!/、ることができる。  Examples of the inorganic chelating agent that can be used include sodium tetrapolyphosphate and sodium hexametaphosphate. On the other hand, as the organic chelating agent, organic carboxylic acid, aminopolycarboxylic acid, organic phosphonic acid, aminophosphonic acid and organic phosphonocarboxylic acid can be mainly used.
上記有機カルボン酸としては、アクリル酸、シユウ酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、ダルタル 酸、アジピン酸、ピメリン酸、コハク酸、ァシエライン酸、セバチン酸、ノナンジカルボン 酸、デカンジ力ノレボン酸、ゥンデカンジ力ノレボン酸、マレイン酸、ィタコン酸、リンゴ酸 、クェン酸、酒石酸等を挙げることができるがこれらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the above organic carboxylic acids include acrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, dartaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, succinic acid, ashellaic acid, sebacic acid, nonanedicarboxylic acid, decandi power norlevonic acid, undecandi power norlevonic acid. , Maleic acid, itaconic acid, malic acid , Citrate, tartaric acid, and the like, but are not limited thereto.
[0117] 上記アミノポリカルボン酸としては、イミノニ酢酸、二トリ口三酢酸、二トリ口三プロピオ ン酸、エチレンジァミンモノヒドロキシェチル三酢酸、エチレンジァミン四酢酸、グリコ ールエーテル四酢酸、 1, 2—ジァミノプロパン四酢酸、ジエチレントリアミン五酢酸、 トリエチレンテトラミン六酢酸、 1, 3—ジアミノー 2—プロパノール四酢酸、グリコール エーテルジァミン四酢酸、その他特開昭 52— 25632号、同 55— 67747号、同 57— 102624号の各公報、および特公昭 53— 40900号公報等に記載の化合物を挙げ ることがでさる。  [0117] Examples of the aminopolycarboxylic acids include iminoacetic acid, ditrimethyl triacetic acid, ditrimethyl tripropionic acid, ethylenediamine monohydroxyethyl triacetic acid, ethylenediammine tetraacetic acid, glycol ether tetraacetic acid, 1, 2-Diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, triethylenetetraminehexaacetic acid, 1,3-diamino-2-propanoltetraacetic acid, glycol etherdiaminetetraacetic acid, and other JP-A-52-25632, 55-67747, 57- The compounds described in each publication of Japanese Patent No. 102624 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 53-40900 can be mentioned.
[0118] 有機ホスホン酸としては、米国特許 US第 3214454号、同 3794591号の各明細 書、および西独特許公開 2227639号公報等に記載のヒドロキシアルキリデン—ジホ スホン酸やリサーチ 'ディスクロージャー(Research Disclosure)第 181卷、 Item 18170 (1979年 5月号)等に記載の化合物が挙げられる。  [0118] Examples of the organic phosphonic acid include hydroxyalkylidene-diphosphonic acid and research disclosure (Research Disclosure No. 1) described in US Patent Nos. 3214454 and 3794591 and West German Patent Publication 2227639. 181, Item 18170 (May 1979), and the like.
上記アミノホスホン酸としては、アミノトリス (メチレンホスホン酸)、エチレンジアミンテ トラメチレンホスホン酸、アミノトリメチレンホスホン酸等が挙げられる力 その他上記リ サーチ ·ディスクロージャー 18170号、特開昭 57— 208554号、同 54— 61125号、 同 55— 29883号の各公報および同 56 - 97347号公報等に記載の化合物を挙げる ことができる。  Examples of the aminophosphonic acid include aminotris (methylenephosphonic acid), ethylenediaminetetramethylenephosphonic acid, aminotrimethylenephosphonic acid and the like. In addition, the above-mentioned Research Disclosure No. 18170, JP-A-57-208554, The compounds described in 54-61125, 55-29883, 56-97347 and the like can be mentioned.
[0119] 有機ホスホノカノレボン酸としては、特開日召 52— 102726号、同 53— 42730号、同 5 4— 121127号、同 55— 4024号、同 55— 4025号、同 55— 126241号、同 55— 65 955号、同 55— 65956号等の各公報、および前述のリサーチ 'ディスクロージャー 1 8170号等に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。これらのキレート剤はアルカリ金属 塩やアンモニゥム塩の形で使用してもよ 、。  [0119] Examples of organic phosphonocanolevonic acids include JP-A 52-102726, 53-42730, 54-121127, 55-4024, 55-4025, 55-126241. Nos. 55-65 955, 55-65956, and the above-mentioned Research Disclosure 1 8170. These chelating agents may be used in the form of alkali metal salts or ammonium salts.
[0120] これらキレート剤の添カ卩量としては、現像液 1リットル当り好ましくは、 1 X 10— 4〜1 X [0120] As is preferably developer per liter添Ka卩量these chelating agents, 1 X 10- 4 ~1 X
10— 1モノレ、より好ましく ίま 1 X 10— 3〜1 X 10— 2モノレである。 10 1 Monore, more preferably ί or 1 X 10 3 to 1 X 10- 2 Monore.
[0121] さらに、現像液中に銀汚れ防止剤として、特開昭 56— 24347号、特公昭 56— 465 85号、特公昭 62— 2849号、特開平 4— 362942号の各公報記載の化合物を用い ることができる。また、溶解助剤として特開昭 61— 267759号公報記載の化合物を用 いることができる。さらに現像液には、必要に応じて色調剤、界面活性剤、消泡剤、 硬膜剤等を含んでもよい。現像処理温度および時間は相互に関係し、全処理時間と の関係において決定される力 一般に現像温度は約 20°C〜約 50°Cが好ましぐ 25 〜45°Cがさらに好ましい。また、現像時間は 5秒〜 2分が好ましぐ 7秒〜 1分 30秒が さらに好ましい。 [0121] Further, compounds described in JP-A-56-24347, JP-B-56-46585, JP-B-62-2849 and JP-A-4-362942 as silver stain preventing agents in the developer. Can be used. Further, compounds described in JP-A-61-267759 can be used as dissolution aids. Furthermore, in the developing solution, if necessary, a color toner, a surfactant, an antifoaming agent, A hardener or the like may be included. The development processing temperature and time are interrelated, and the force determined in relation to the total processing time. Generally, the development temperature is preferably about 20 ° C to about 50 ° C, more preferably 25 to 45 ° C. The development time is preferably 5 seconds to 2 minutes, more preferably 7 seconds to 1 minute 30 seconds.
[0122] 現像液の搬送コスト、包装材料コスト、省スペース等の目的から、現像液を濃縮化し 、使用時に希釈して用いるようにする態様も好ましい。現像液の濃縮化のためには、 現像液に含まれる塩成分をカリウム塩ィ匕することが有効である。  [0122] From the viewpoints of developer transport cost, packaging material cost, space saving, and the like, it is also preferable to concentrate the developer and dilute it before use. In order to concentrate the developer, it is effective to salt the salt component contained in the developer.
[0123] 本発明における現像処理は、未露光部分の銀塩を除去して安定化させる目的で行 われる定着処理を含むことができる。本発明における定着処理は、銀塩写真フィルム や印画紙、印刷製版用フィルム、フォトマスク用ェマルジヨンマスク等に用いられる定 着処理の技術を用いることができる。  [0123] The development processing in the present invention can include a fixing processing performed for the purpose of removing and stabilizing the silver salt in the unexposed portion. For the fixing process in the present invention, a fixing process technique used for silver salt photographic film, photographic paper, printing plate-making film, photomask emulsion mask and the like can be used.
[0124] 上記定着工程で使用する定着液の好ましい成分としては、以下が挙げられる。  [0124] Preferable components of the fixing solution used in the fixing step include the following.
すなわち、チォ硫酸ナトリウム、チォ硫酸アンモニゥム、必要により酒石酸、クェン酸 、ダルコン酸、ホウ酸、イミノジ酢酸、 5—スルホサリチル酸、ダルコヘプタン酸、タイ口 ン、エチレンジァミン四酢酸、ジエチレントリアミン五酢酸、二トリ口三酢酸これらの塩 等を含むことが好ましい。近年の環境保護の観点からは、ホウ酸は含まれない方が 好ましい。本発明に用いられる定着液の定着剤としてはチォ硫酸ナトリウム、チォ硫 酸アンモ-ゥムなどが挙げられ、定着速度の点からはチォ硫酸アンモ-ゥムが好まし いが、近年の環境保護の観点力 チォ硫酸ナトリウムが使われてもよい。これら既知 の定着剤の使用量は適宜変えることができ、一般には約 0. 1〜約 2モル Zリットルで ある。特に好ましくは、 0. 2〜1. 5モル Zリットルである。定着液には所望により、硬 膜剤 (例えば水溶性アルミニウム化合物)、保恒剤 (例えば、亜硫酸塩、重亜硫酸塩) 、 pH緩衝剤(例えば、酢酸)、 pH調整剤(例えば、アンモニア、硫酸)、キレート剤、 界面活性剤、湿潤剤、定着促進剤を含むことができる。  That is, sodium thiosulfate, ammonium thiosulfate, and if necessary, tartaric acid, citrate, darconic acid, boric acid, iminodiacetic acid, 5-sulfosalicylic acid, darcoheptanoic acid, Thai diamine, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, nitrite It is preferable to contain a salt of acetic acid. From the viewpoint of environmental protection in recent years, it is preferable not to contain boric acid. Examples of the fixing agent for the fixing solution used in the present invention include sodium thiosulfate and ammonium thiosulfate, and ammonium thiosulfate is preferred from the viewpoint of fixing speed. Viewpoint power Sodium thiosulfate may be used. The amount of these known fixing agents used can be appropriately changed, and is generally about 0.1 to about 2 mol Z liter. Particularly preferred is 0.2 to 1.5 mol Z liter. If desired, the fixer may contain a hardening agent (eg, a water-soluble aluminum compound), a preservative (eg, sulfite, bisulfite), a pH buffer (eg, acetic acid), a pH adjuster (eg, ammonia, sulfuric acid). ), Chelating agents, surfactants, wetting agents, fixing accelerators.
[0125] 上記界面活性剤としては、例えば硫酸ィ匕物、スルホンィ匕物などのァニオン界面活 性剤、ポリエチレン系界面活性剤、特開昭 57— 6740号公報記載の両性界面活性 剤などが挙げられる。また、上記定着液には、公知の消泡剤を添加してもよい。  [0125] Examples of the surfactant include anionic surfactants such as sulfates and sulfones, polyethylene surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants described in JP-A-57-6740. It is done. A known antifoaming agent may be added to the fixing solution.
上記湿潤剤としては、例えば、アルカノールァミン、アルキレングリコールなどが挙 げられる。また、上記定着促進剤としては、例えば特公昭 45— 35754号、同 58— 1 22535号、同 58— 122536号の各公報に記載のチォ尿素誘導体;分子内に 3重結 合を持つアルコール;米国特許 US第 4126459号明細書記載のチォエーテル化合 物;特開平 4— 229860号公報記載のメソイオンィ匕合物などが挙げられ、特開平 2— 44355号公報記載の化合物を用いてもよい。また、上記 pH緩衝剤としては、例えば 酢酸、リンゴ酸、こはく酸、酒石酸、クェン酸、シユウ酸、マレイン酸、グリコール酸、ァ ジピン酸などの有機酸や、ホウ酸、リン酸塩、亜硫酸塩などの無機緩衝剤が使用でき る。上記 pH緩衝剤として好ましくは、酢酸、酒石酸、亜硫酸塩が用いられる。ここで p H緩衝剤は、現像液の持ち込みによる定着剤の pH上昇を防ぐ目的で使用され、好 ましくは 0. 01〜: L 0モル Zリットル、より好ましくは 0. 02〜0. 6モル Zリットル程度 用いる。定着液の pHは 4. 0〜6. 5力好ましく、特に好ましくは 4. 5〜6. 0の範囲で ある。また、上記色素溶出促進剤として、特開昭 64— 4739号公報記載の化合物を 用いることちでさる。 Examples of the wetting agent include alkanolamine and alkylene glycol. I can get lost. Examples of the fixing accelerator include thiourea derivatives described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 45-35754, 58-122535, and 58-122536; alcohols having triple bonds in the molecule; Examples include thioether compounds described in US Pat. No. 4126459; mesoionic compounds described in JP-A-4-229860, and compounds described in JP-A-2-44355 may be used. Examples of the pH buffer include organic acids such as acetic acid, malic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, citrate, oxalic acid, maleic acid, glycolic acid and adipic acid, boric acid, phosphate and sulfite. Inorganic buffers such as can be used. As the pH buffer, acetic acid, tartaric acid, and sulfite are preferably used. Here, the pH buffer is used for the purpose of preventing the pH of the fixing agent from rising due to the introduction of the developer, and is preferably 0.01 to: L 0 mol Z liter, more preferably 0.02 to 0.6. Use about mol Z liters. The pH of the fixing solution is preferably 4.0 to 6.5, and particularly preferably 4.5 to 6.0. Further, it is possible to use a compound described in JP-A-64-4739 as the dye elution accelerator.
[0126] 本発明の定着液中の硬膜剤としては、水溶性アルミニウム塩、クロム塩が挙げられ る。上記硬膜剤として好ましい化合物は、水溶性アルミニウム塩であり、例えば塩ィ匕 アルミニウム、硫酸アルミニウム、カリ明バンなどが挙げられる。上記硬膜剤の好まし い添カロ量は 0. 01モノレ〜 0. 2モノレ/リットノレであり、さらに好ましくは 0. 03〜0. 08モ ル Zリットルである。  [0126] Examples of the hardener in the fixing solution of the present invention include water-soluble aluminum salts and chromium salts. A preferable compound as the hardener is a water-soluble aluminum salt, and examples thereof include aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfate, potash and vane. The preferred amount of added calories of the above hardener is 0.01 monole to 0.2 monole / lit nore, more preferably 0.03 to 0.08 mol Z liter.
[0127] 上記定着工程における定着温度は、約 20°C〜約 50°Cが好ましぐさらに好ましく は 25〜45°Cである。また、定着時間は 5秒〜 1分が好ましぐさらに好ましくは 7秒〜 50秒である。定着液の補充量は、感光材料の処理量に対して 600mlZm2以下が好 ましぐ 500mlZm2以下がさらに好ましぐ 300mlZm2以下が特に好ましい。 [0127] The fixing temperature in the fixing step is preferably about 20 ° C to about 50 ° C, more preferably 25 to 45 ° C. The fixing time is preferably 5 seconds to 1 minute, more preferably 7 seconds to 50 seconds. The replenishing amount of the fixing solution, 600mlZm 2 or less good Mashigu 500MlZm 2 or less and more preferably tool 300MlZm 2 or less is particularly preferred for the process of the photosensitive material.
[0128] 現像、定着処理を施した感光材料は、水洗処理や安定化処理を施されるのが好ま しい。上記水洗処理または安定化処理においては、水洗水量は通常感光材料 lm2 当り、 20リットル以下で行われ、 3リットル以下の補充量 (0も含む、すなわちため水水 洗)で行うこともできる。このため、節水処理が可能となるのみならず、自現機設置の 配管を不要とすることができる。水洗水の補充量を少なくする方法としては、古くから 多段向流方式 (例えば 2段、 3段など)が知られている。この多段向流方式を本発明 の製造方法に適用した場合、定着後の感光材料は徐々に正常な方向、即ち定着液 で汚れて!/、な ヽ処理液の方向に順次接触して処理されて!ヽくので、さらに効率のよ い水洗がなされる。また、水洗を少量の水で行う場合は、特開昭 63— 18350号、同 62— 287252号各公報などに記載のスクイズローラー、クロスオーバーローラーの洗 浄槽を設けることがより好ましい。また、少量水洗時に問題となる公害負荷低減のた めには、種々の酸化剤添加やフィルター濾過を組み合わせてもよい。さら〖こ、上記方 法においては、水洗浴または安定ィ匕浴に防黴手段を施した水を、処理に応じて補充 することによって生じた水洗浴または安定ィ匕浴力 のオーバーフロー液の一部また は全部を、特開昭 60 - 235133号公報に記載されて 、るようにその前の処理工程で ある定着能を有する処理液に利用することもできる。また、少量水洗時に発生し易い 水泡ムラ防止および Zまたはスクイズローラーに付着する処理剤成分が処理された フィルムに転写することを防止するために、水溶性界面活性剤や消泡剤を添加しても よい。 [0128] The photosensitive material that has been subjected to development and fixing processing is preferably subjected to water washing treatment or stabilization treatment. In the water washing treatment or stabilization treatment, the washing water amount is usually 20 liters or less per lm 2 of the light-sensitive material, and can be replenished in 3 liters or less (including 0, ie, rinsing with water). For this reason, not only water-saving treatment can be performed, but also the piping for installing the self-supporting machine can be eliminated. As a method for reducing the replenishment amount of flush water, a multi-stage countercurrent system (for example, two-stage, three-stage, etc.) has been known for a long time. This multi-stage countercurrent system is used in the present invention. When applied to this manufacturing method, the photosensitive material after fixing is gradually stained in the normal direction, that is, stained with the fixing solution! Good water washing is done. When washing with a small amount of water, it is more preferable to provide a squeeze roller and crossover roller washing tank as described in JP-A-63-18350 and JP-A-62-287252. In addition, various oxidizer additions and filter filtration may be combined to reduce the pollution load, which is a problem when washing with small amounts of water. Furthermore, in the above method, one of the overflows of the washing bath or the stable bathing power generated by replenishing the washing bath or the stable bath with the water subjected to the prevention means according to the treatment. As described in JP-A-60-235133, a part or all of them can be used for a processing solution having fixing ability as a previous processing step. In addition, water-soluble surfactants and antifoaming agents are added to prevent unevenness of water bubbles, which are likely to occur when washing with a small amount of water, and to prevent the processing agent component adhering to the Z or squeeze roller from being transferred to the processed film. Also good.
[0129] また、上記水洗処理または安定化処理においては、感光材料から溶出した染料に よる汚染防止に、特開昭 63— 163456号公報に記載の色素吸着剤を水洗槽に設置 してもよい。また、水洗処理に続いて安定ィ匕処理においては、特開平 2— 201357号 、同 2— 132435号、同 1 102553号、特開日召 46— 44446号の各公報に記載のィ匕 合物を含有した浴を、感光材料の最終浴として使用してもよい。この際、必要に応じ てアンモ-ゥム化合物、 Bi、 A1などの金属化合物、蛍光増白剤、各種キレート剤、膜 pH調節剤、硬膜剤、殺菌剤、防かび剤、アルカノールァミンや界面活性剤を加える こともできる。水洗工程または安定ィ匕工程に用いられる水としては水道水のほか脱ィ オン処理した水やハロゲン、紫外線殺菌灯や各種酸化剤 (オゾン、過酸化水素、塩 素酸塩など)等によって殺菌された水を使用することが好ましい。また、特開平 4— 39 652号、特開平 5— 241309号公報記載の化合物を含む水洗水を使用してもよい。 水洗処理または安定ィ匕温度における浴温度および時間は 0〜50°C、 5秒〜 2分であ ることが好ましい。  [0129] In the washing treatment or stabilization treatment, a dye adsorbent described in JP-A-63-163456 may be installed in the washing tank in order to prevent contamination with dyes eluted from the photosensitive material. . In addition, in the stable water treatment following the water washing treatment, the compounds described in JP-A-2-201357, JP-A-2-132435, JP-A-1102553, and JP-A No. 46-44446 are disclosed. May be used as the final bath of the light-sensitive material. At this time, if necessary, metal compounds such as ammonia compounds, Bi, A1, fluorescent brighteners, various chelating agents, membrane pH regulators, hardeners, bactericides, fungicides, alkanolamines, A surfactant can also be added. Water used in the water washing or stabilization process is sterilized with tap water, deionized water, halogen, UV germicidal lamps, various oxidizing agents (such as ozone, hydrogen peroxide, and chlorate). It is preferred to use fresh water. Further, washing water containing the compounds described in JP-A-4-39 652 and JP-A-5-241309 may be used. The bath temperature and time in the water washing treatment or stable temperature are preferably 0 to 50 ° C. and 5 seconds to 2 minutes.
[0130] 本発明に用いられる現像液や定着液等の処理液の保存には、特開昭 61— 73147 号公報に記載された酸素透過性の低い包材で保管することが好ましい。また、補充 量を低減する場合には処理槽の空気との接触面積を小さくすることによって液の蒸 発、空気酸ィ匕を防止することが好ましい。 [0130] For storage of processing solutions such as a developer and a fixing solution used in the present invention, it is preferable to store them in a packaging material with low oxygen permeability described in JP-A-61-73147. Also replenish When the amount is reduced, it is preferable to prevent evaporation of the liquid and air oxidation by reducing the contact area of the treatment tank with air.
本発明の電磁波シールド膜はロール状などの連絡パターンを担持した形状で得ら れることが生産性や光学フィルター作製の容易さの点で好ま 、ので、ロール用現像 機を用いることが有利であり、とくにローラー搬送型自動現像機を用いることが好まし い。  Since the electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is preferably obtained in a shape carrying a contact pattern such as a roll shape from the viewpoint of productivity and ease of production of an optical filter, it is advantageous to use a developing machine for rolls. In particular, it is preferable to use a roller conveyance type automatic developing machine.
ローラー搬送型の自動現像機については米国特許 US第 3025779号明細書、同 第 3545971号明細書などに記載されており、本明細書においては単にローラー搬 送型自動現像機として言及する。また、ローラー搬送型自動現像機は現像、定着、 水洗および乾燥の四工程力 ことが好ましぐ本発明においても、他の工程 (例えば 、停止工程)を除外しないが、この四工程を踏襲するのが最も好ましい。また、水洗ェ 程の代わりに安定工程による四工程でも構わない。  The roller-conveying type automatic developing machine is described in US Pat. Nos. 30,257,795, 3,545,971, etc., and is simply referred to as a roller-conveying type automatic developing machine in this specification. Also, in the present invention where the roller transport type automatic processor preferably has four process powers of development, fixing, washing and drying, other processes (for example, stop process) are not excluded, but these four processes are followed. Is most preferred. Further, instead of the washing step, four steps by a stable step may be used.
[0131] 上記各工程においては、現像液や定着液の組成から水を除いた成分を固形にして 供給し、使用に当たって所定量の水で溶解して現像液や定着液として使用してもよ い。このような形態の処理剤は固形処理剤と呼ばれる。固形処理剤は、粉末、錠剤、 顆粒、粉末、塊状またはペースト状のものが用いられる。上記処理剤の、好ましい形 態は、特開昭 61— 259921号公報記載の形態或いは錠剤である。該錠剤の製造方 法は、例えば特開昭 51— 61837号、同 54— 155038号、同 52— 88025号の各公 報、英国特許 1, 213, 808号明細書等に記載される一般的な方法で製造できる。さ らに顆粒の処理剤は、 f列えば特開平 2— 109042号、同 2— 109043号、同 3— 397 35号各公報および同 3— 39739号公報等に記載される一般的な方法で製造できる 。また、粉末の処理剤は、例えば特開昭 54— 133332号公報、英国特許 725, 892 号、同 729, 862号各明細書およびドイツ特許 3, 733, 861号明細書等に記載され る一般的な方法で製造できる。  [0131] In each of the above steps, a component obtained by removing water from the composition of the developer or the fixing solution may be supplied in a solid form and dissolved in a predetermined amount of water and used as a developer or a fixing solution. Yes. Such a form of treating agent is called a solid treating agent. As the solid processing agent, powder, tablet, granule, powder, lump or paste is used. A preferred form of the above-mentioned treatment agent is the form or tablet described in JP-A-61-259921. The method for producing the tablets is generally described in, for example, the publications of JP-A-51-61837, JP-A-54-155038, JP-A-52-88025, and British Patent No. 1,213,808. Can be manufactured by simple methods. Further, the granule treating agent is a general method described in JP-A-2-109042, JP-A-2-109043, JP-A-3-3935 and JP-A-3-39739. Can be manufactured. Further, powder processing agents are generally described in, for example, JP-A-54-133332, British Patents 725,892 and 729,862 and German Patent 3,733,861. Can be manufactured in a conventional manner.
[0132] 上記固形処理剤の嵩密度は、その溶解性の観点と、 0. 5〜6. Og/cm3のものが 好ましく、特に 1. 0〜5. Og/cm3のもの力好まし!/ヽ。 [0132] The bulk density of the solid processing agent, and in view of its solubility, from 0.5 to 6. Preferably having from Og / cm 3, preferably in particular from 1.0 to 5. Force those Og / cm 3 ! / ヽ.
[0133] 上記固形処理剤を調製するに当たっては、処理剤を構成する物質の中の、少なく とも 2種の相互に反応性の粒状物質を、反応性物質に対して不活性な物質による少 なくとも一つの介在分離層によって分離された層になるように層状に反応性物質を置 き、真空包装可能な袋を包材とし、袋内から排気しシールする方法を採用してもよい 。ここにおいて、「不活性」とは、物質が互いに物理的に接触されたときにパッケージ 内の通常の状態下で反応しな 、こと若しくは何らかの反応があっても著しくな 、ことを 意味する。不活性物質は、二つの相互に反応性の物質に対して不活性であることは 別にして、二つの反応性の物質が意図される使用において不活発であればよい。さ らに不活性物質は二つの反応性物質と同時に用いられる物質である。例えば、現像 液においてハイドロキノンと水酸ィ匕ナトリウムは直接接触すると反応してしまうので、真 空包装においてハイドロキノンと水酸ィ匕ナトリウムの間に分別層として亜硫酸ナトリウ ム等を使うことで、長期間ノ ッケージ中に保存できる。また、ハイド口キノン等をブリケ ットイ匕して水酸ィ匕ナトリウムとの接触面積を減らす事により保存性が向上し混合して用 V、ることもできる。これらの真空包装材料の包材として用いられるのは不活性なプラス チックフィルム、プラスチック物質と金属箔のラミネートから作られたバッグである。 [0133] In the preparation of the solid processing agent, at least two kinds of mutually reactive particulate materials among the materials constituting the processing agent are reduced by a material inert to the reactive material. A method may be employed in which reactive substances are placed in layers so as to form a layer separated by at least one intervening separation layer, a bag that can be vacuum packaged is used as a packaging material, and the bag is evacuated and sealed. As used herein, “inert” means that the substances do not react under normal conditions in the package when they are in physical contact with each other, or even if there is any reaction. The inert material may be inert in the intended use of the two reactive materials, apart from being inert to the two mutually reactive materials. Furthermore, an inert substance is a substance that is used simultaneously with two reactive substances. For example, hydroquinone and sodium hydroxide in a developer react when they come into direct contact with each other. Therefore, by using sodium sulfite or the like as a separation layer between hydroquinone and sodium hydroxide in vacuum packaging, Can be stored in a knockout. In addition, by reducing the contact area with sodium hydroxide by briquetting a quinone or the like from the mouth, it is possible to improve the preservability and mix it. The packaging material for these vacuum packaging materials is an inert plastic film, a bag made from a laminate of plastic material and metal foil.
[0134] 現像処理後の露光部に含まれる金属銀の質量は、露光前の露光部に含まれてい た銀の質量に対して 50質量%以上の含有率であることが好ましぐ 80質量%以上で あることがさらに好ま 、。露光部に含まれる銀の質量が露光前の露光部に含まれて V、た銀の質量に対して 50質量%以上であれば、高 、導電性を得ることができるため 好ましい。  [0134] The mass of the metallic silver contained in the exposed area after the development treatment is preferably 80% by mass or more based on the mass of silver contained in the exposed area before the exposure. It is even more preferable that it is at least%. If the mass of silver contained in the exposed part is 50% by mass or more with respect to the mass of V and silver contained in the exposed part before exposure, high conductivity can be obtained.
[0135] 本発明における現像処理後の階調は、特に限定されるものではないが、 4. 0を超 えることが好ましい。現像処理後の階調が 4. 0を超えると、光透過性部の透明性を高 く保ったまま、導電性金属部の導電性を高めることができる。階調を 4. 0以上にする 手段としては、例えば、前述のロジウムイオン、イリジウムイオンの感光性ハロゲンィ匕 銀粒子へのドープが挙げられる。  [0135] The gradation after development processing in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably more than 4.0. When the gradation after development processing exceeds 4.0, the conductivity of the conductive metal portion can be increased while keeping the transparency of the light transmissive portion high. As a means for setting the gradation to 4.0 or more, for example, doping of the above-mentioned rhodium ions and iridium ions into the photosensitive halogen silver halide particles can be mentioned.
[0136] 尚、このようにして得られる現像銀に対して、還元剤や銀イオン配位子による処理を 行ったり、加熱やカレンダーロールによる処理を行うことが好ましい。これらの処理に より、現像銀の導電性を高めることができる。これらの処理は、定着処理を行う前の現 像処理後に行ってもよぐ現像処理と定着処理を行ったあとに行ってもよぐまた、こ れらの両方の時期に行ってもよい。 [0137] 本発明で好ましく用いられる還元剤又は銀イオン配位子による処理について説明 する。 [0136] The developed silver thus obtained is preferably treated with a reducing agent or a silver ion ligand, or heated or calendered. By these treatments, the conductivity of developed silver can be increased. These processes may be performed after the development process and the fixing process after the current image process before the fixing process, or may be performed at both times. [0137] The treatment with a reducing agent or silver ion ligand preferably used in the present invention will be described.
本発明にお ヽては、還元剤又は銀イオン配位子による処理を行うことが好ま Uヽ。 還元剤としては、銀イオンを金属銀に還元可能であればよぐ例えば、二酸化チォ 尿素、ロンガリット、塩ィ匕錫(11)、水素化ホウ素ナトリウム、ソジゥムトリァセトキシボロノ、 イドライド、トリメチルァミンボラン、トリェチルァミンボラン、ピリジンボラン、ボランなど が挙げられる。これらの中でも、アルカリが好ましぐソジゥム トリァセトキシボロノ、イド ライド、ジメチルァミンボラン又は水素化ホウ素ナトリウムであることが特に好まし 、。 銀イオン配位子としては、塩素イオン、臭素イオン、沃素イオン等のハロゲンイオン 、チオシァネートイオンなどの擬ハロゲンイオン、ピリジン、ビビリジン等の含窒素へテ 口環化合物、亜硫酸イオン、また、 1, 2, 4—トリアゾリゥム— 3—チォラート類 (例えば 、 1, 2, 4-トリメチル -1, 2, 4-トリアゾリゥム- 3-チォラート)などのメソイオンィ匕合物、 3 , 6-ジチアオクタン- 1, 8-ジオールなどのチォエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。  In the present invention, it is preferable to perform treatment with a reducing agent or a silver ion ligand. As the reducing agent, it is sufficient if the silver ion can be reduced to metallic silver, for example, thiourea dioxide, Rongalite, sodium chloride (11), sodium borohydride, sodium triacetoxyborono, idide, Examples thereof include trimethylamine borane, triethylamine borane, pyridine borane, and borane. Among these, particularly preferred is sodium triacetoxyborono, idide, dimethylamine borane or sodium borohydride, which is preferred for alkali. Silver ion ligands include chlorine ions, bromine ions, halogen ions such as iodine ions, pseudohalogen ions such as thiocyanate ions, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds such as pyridine and biviridine, sulfite ions, and 1 , 2, 4-Triazolium-3-thiolates (eg, 1, 2, 4-trimethyl-1, 2, 4-triazolium-3-thiolate), 3, 6-dithiaoctane-1, 8 -Thiol ether compounds such as diols.
[0138] 本発明で好ましく用いられるカレンダー処理、すなわちカレンダーロールを用いた 処理について説明する。 [0138] A calendar process preferably used in the present invention, that is, a process using a calendar roll will be described.
本発明にお 、ては、メッシュ状の金属銀部はカレンダーロールで処理されることが 好ましい。これによりメッシュ状の金属銀部の導電性を向上させることが可能であり、 電磁波シールド性能を高めることが可能である。  In the present invention, the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is preferably treated with a calender roll. As a result, the conductivity of the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion can be improved, and the electromagnetic shielding performance can be improved.
カレンダーロールは、通常 1対以上のロールから成る。カレンダー処理に用いられ るロールとしては、エポキシ、ポリイミド、ポリアミド、ポリイミドアミドなどのプラスチック口 ールまたは金属ロールが用いられる。特に金属ロール同士で処理することが好ましい 。線圧力は好ましくは、 1960N/cm(200kgf/cm)以上、更に好ましくは、 2940N/c m (300kgf/cm)以上である。  A calendar roll usually consists of one or more pairs of rolls. As a roll used for the calendering process, a plastic roll such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyimide amide or a metal roll is used. It is particularly preferable to treat with metal rolls. The linear pressure is preferably 1960 N / cm (200 kgf / cm) or more, more preferably 2940 N / cm (300 kgf / cm) or more.
カレンダーロール処理の温度は、 10°C〜100°Cが好ましぐより好ましくは 10°C〜5 0°Cである。  The temperature of the calender roll treatment is preferably 10 ° C to 100 ° C, more preferably 10 ° C to 50 ° C.
このカレンダー処理は、ロール状の長 、フィルムを連続処理できる。  This calendar process can continuously process a roll-like film.
[0139] 本発明で好ましく用いられる前記加熱処理は、好ましくは 40°C〜250°C、より好ま しくは 60°C〜200°C、更に好ましくは 70°C〜150°Cで行うことが好ましぐその時間 は 10秒〜 1時間がこのましぐより好ましくは 30秒〜 30分、さらに好ましくは、 1分〜 1 0分間加熱処理することが好ましい。 現像後、電解めつきの前に行うのがよい。 [0139] The heat treatment preferably used in the present invention is preferably performed at 40 ° C to 250 ° C, more preferably 60 ° C to 200 ° C, and even more preferably 70 ° C to 150 ° C. The time you like It is preferable to heat-treat for 10 seconds to 1 hour, more preferably for 30 seconds to 30 minutes, and even more preferably for 1 minute to 10 minutes. It is good to carry out after development and before electrolytic plating.
[0140] (2— 3)物理現像およびめつき処理 [0140] (2-3) Physical development and tacking
本発明では、前記露光および現像処理により形成された金属銀部に導電性を付与 する目的で、前記金属銀部に導電性金属粒子を担持させるための物理現像および In the present invention, for the purpose of imparting conductivity to the metal silver portion formed by the exposure and development processing, physical development for supporting the conductive metal particles on the metal silver portion and
Zまたはめつき処理を行うこともできる。本発明では物理現像またはめつき処理の ヽ ずれか一方のみで導電性金属粒子を金属銀部に担持させることが可能であるが、さ らに物理現像とめっき処理とを組み合わせて導電性金属粒子を金属銀部に担持さ せることもできる。尚、金属銀部に物理現像および Zまたはめつき処理を施したもの を「導電性金属部」と称する。 Z or mating can also be performed. In the present invention, the conductive metal particles can be supported on the metal silver portion by only one of physical development or staking treatment. Further, the conductive metal particles can be combined by combining physical development and plating treatment. Can also be supported on the metallic silver part. A metal silver part that has been subjected to physical development and Z or staking treatment is referred to as a “conductive metal part”.
本発明における「物理現像」とは、金属や金属化合物の核上に、銀イオンなどの金 属イオンを還元剤で還元して金属粒子を析出させることをいう。この物理現象は、ィ ンスタント B&Wフィルム、インスタントスライドフィルムや、印刷版製造等に利用され ており、本発明ではその技術を用いることができる。  “Physical development” in the present invention means that metal particles such as silver ions are reduced with a reducing agent on metal or metal compound nuclei to precipitate metal particles. This physical phenomenon is used in the manufacture of instant B & W films, instant slide films, printing plates, etc., and the technology can be used in the present invention.
また、物理現像は、露光後の現像処理と同時に行っても、現像処理後に別途行つ てもよい。  The physical development may be performed simultaneously with the development processing after exposure or may be performed separately after the development processing.
[0141] 本発明にお!/、て、めっき処理は、無電解めつき(ィ匕学還元めつきや置換めつき)、電 解めつき、または無電解めつきと電解めつきの両方を用いることができる。  [0141] In the present invention, the plating process uses electroless plating (reduction plating or substitution plating), electrolysis plating, or both electroless plating and electrolytic plating. be able to.
[0142] く無電解めつき >  [0142] Non-electrolytic plating>
本発明では、露光および現像処理後の金属銀部を、さらに無電解めつき用溶液で 処理することもできる。無電解めつきには、パラジウム化合物水溶液で処理する方法 、還元剤又は銀イオン配位子あるいはその両方で処理する方法が好ま 、。  In the present invention, the metallic silver portion after the exposure and development treatment can be further treated with an electroless plating solution. For electroless plating, a method of treating with an aqueous palladium compound solution or a method of treating with a reducing agent and / or a silver ion ligand is preferred.
前者については、露光および現像処理後の金属銀部を、 Pdを含有する溶液で処 理することによって行われる。 Pdは、 2価のパラジウムイオンであっても金属パラジゥ ムであってもよい。この処理により無電解めつきまたは物理現像速度を促進させること ができる。ノラジウムによる無電解めつきは、日本科学会編、化学便覧応用化学編の 「無電解めつき」の章に詳記されている。  The former is carried out by treating the metallic silver part after exposure and development with a solution containing Pd. Pd may be divalent palladium ion or metal palladium. This treatment can accelerate electroless plating or physical development speed. Electroless plating with noradium is described in detail in the “Electroless plating” section of the Japan Society for the Science and Chemistry Handbook Applied Chemistry.
[0143] く電解めつき > 以下に電解めつき処理方法の好ましい態様について図面を参照して具体的に説 明する。上記の電解めつき処理を好適に実施するためのめっき装置は、乳剤層を露 光し、現像処理したフィルムが巻き付けられた繰り出し用リール(図示せず)から、順 次繰り出されたフィルムを電気めつき槽に送り込み、めっき後のフィルムを卷取り用リ ール(図示せず)に順次巻き取る構成となっている。 [0143] Electrolytic plating> Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the electrolytic plating process will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. A plating apparatus for suitably carrying out the above-described electroplating treatment exposes the emulsion layer and electrically feeds the sequentially fed film from a feeding reel (not shown) around which the developed film is wound. The film is fed into a plating tank and the film after plating is sequentially wound around a reel for reeling (not shown).
[0144] 図 1に上記電解めつき処理に好適に用いられる電解めつき槽の一例を示す。この 図 1に示す電解めつき槽 10は、長尺のフィルム 16 (上記の露光、現像処理を施した もの)に連続してめっき処理を施すことができるものである。矢印はフィルム 16の搬送 方向を示している。電解めつき槽 10は、めっき液 15を貯留するめつき浴 11を備えて いる。めっき浴 11内には、一対のアノード板 13が平行に配設され、アノード板 13の 内側には、一対のガイドローラ 14がアノード板 13と平行に回動可能に配設されてい る。ガイドローラ 14は垂直方向に移動可能で、これによりフィルム 16のめつき処理時 間を調整できる。  [0144] Fig. 1 shows an example of an electroplating bath suitably used for the electroplating treatment. The electrolytic plating bath 10 shown in FIG. 1 is capable of continuously plating a long film 16 (the one subjected to the above exposure and development processing). The arrow indicates the transport direction of the film 16. The electrolytic plating bath 10 includes a plating bath 11 for storing a plating solution 15. A pair of anode plates 13 are disposed in parallel in the plating bath 11, and a pair of guide rollers 14 are disposed inside the anode plate 13 so as to be rotatable in parallel with the anode plate 13. The guide roller 14 can be moved in the vertical direction, so that the processing time of the film 16 can be adjusted.
[0145] めっき浴 11の上方には、フィルム 16をめつき浴 11に案内するとともにフィルム 16に 電流を供給する給電ローラ (力ソード) 12a, 12bがそれぞれ一対回転自在に配設さ れている。また、めっき浴 11の上方には、出口側の給電ローラ 12bの下方に液切り口 ーラ 17が回動可能に配設されており、この液切りローラ 17と出口側の給電ローラ 12 bとの間には、フィルムからめっき液を除去するための水洗用スプレー(図示せず)が 設置されている。  [0145] Above the plating bath 11, a pair of feed rollers (force swords) 12a and 12b for guiding the film 16 to the plating bath 11 and supplying current to the film 16 are rotatably arranged. . In addition, above the plating bath 11, a liquid draining roller 17 is rotatably disposed below the outlet-side power supply roller 12b. The liquid draining roller 17 and the outlet-side power supply roller 12b are connected to each other. In the meantime, a water spray (not shown) is installed to remove the plating solution from the film.
アノード板 13は、電線(図示せず)を介して電源装置(図示せず)のプラス端子に接 続され、給電ローラ 12a, 12bは、電源装置(図示せず)のマイナス端子に接続されて いる。  The anode plate 13 is connected to a positive terminal of a power supply device (not shown) via an electric wire (not shown), and the power supply rollers 12a and 12b are connected to a negative terminal of the power supply device (not shown). Yes.
[0146] 上記の電解めつき槽 10において、例えば、電解めつき槽のサイズが 10 X 10 X 10c m〜 100 X 200 X 300cmである場合は、入り口側の給電ローラ 12aとフィルム 16とが 接している面の最下部とめっき液面との距離(図 1に示す距離 La)は、 0. 5〜15cm とすることが好ましぐ l〜10cmとすることがより好ましぐ l〜7cmとすることがさらに 好ましい。また、出口側の給電ローラ 12bとフィルム 16とが接している面の最下部とめ つき液面との距離(図 1に示す距離 Lb)は、 0. 5〜 15cmとすることが好ましい。 [0147] 次に、上記電解めつき槽 10を備えためっき装置を使用して、フィルムのメッシュ状 銀細線パターンに銅めつき層を形成させて導電性を強化する方法を説明する。 まずめつき浴 11にめつき液 15を貯留する。めっき液としては、銅めつきの場合は、 硫酸銅 5水塩を 30gZL〜300gZL、硫酸を 30gZL〜300gZLを含むものを用い ることができる。なお、ニッケルめっきの場合は、硫酸ニッケル、塩酸ニッケル等、鉄 銀めつきの場合は、シアンィ匕銀等を含むものを用いることができる。また、めっき液に は、界面活性剤、硫黄化合物、窒素化合物等の添加剤を添加してもよい。 [0146] In the electrolytic bath 10 described above, for example, when the size of the electrolytic bath is 10 X 10 X 10cm to 100 X 200 X 300cm, the feeding roller 12a on the entrance side and the film 16 are in contact with each other. The distance between the bottom of the surface and the plating solution surface (distance La shown in FIG. 1) is preferably 0.5 to 15 cm, more preferably l to 10 cm, and l to 7 cm. More preferably. Further, it is preferable that the distance (distance Lb shown in FIG. 1) between the lowermost part of the surface where the power supply roller 12b on the outlet side and the film 16 are in contact with each other and the liquid surface is 0.5 to 15 cm. [0147] Next, a method for strengthening conductivity by forming a copper plating layer on a mesh-like silver fine wire pattern of a film using the plating apparatus including the electrolytic plating tank 10 will be described. First, the solution 15 is stored in the bath 11. In the case of copper plating, a plating solution containing 30 gZL to 300 gZL of copper sulfate pentahydrate and 30 gZL to 300 gZL of sulfuric acid can be used. In the case of nickel plating, nickel sulfate, nickel hydrochloride, or the like can be used. Moreover, you may add additives, such as surfactant, a sulfur compound, and a nitrogen compound, to a plating solution.
[0148] フィルム 16を繰り出しリール(図示せず)に巻かれた状態でセットして、フィルム 16 のめつきを形成すべき側の面が給電ローラ 12a, 12bと接触するように、フィルム 16を 搬送ローラ(図示せず)に巻き掛ける。なお、電解めつき直前のフィルムの表面抵抗 は、 1〜: LOOO Q Zsqであることが好ましぐ 5〜500 Q Zsqであることがより好ましぐ さらに好まし 、範囲は 10〜100 Ω Zsqである。 [0148] The film 16 is set in a state where it is wound on a supply reel (not shown), and the film 16 is placed so that the surface on which the film 16 is to be formed comes into contact with the feeding rollers 12a and 12b. It is wound around a conveyance roller (not shown). In addition, the surface resistance of the film immediately before electroplating is 1 to: LOOO Q Zsq is preferred 5 to 500 Q Zsq is more preferred Further, the range is 10 to 100 Ω Zsq It is.
アノード板 13および給電ローラ 12a, 12bに電圧を印加し、フィルム 16を給電ロー ラ 12a, 12bに接触させながら搬送する。フィルム 16をめつき浴 11に導入し、めっき 液 15に浸せきして銅めつきを形成する。液切りローラ 17間を通過する際に、フィルム 16に付着しためっき液 15を拭い取り、めっき浴 11に回収する。これを複数の電解め つき槽で繰り返し、最後に水洗した後、卷取りリール(図示せず)に巻き取る。  A voltage is applied to the anode plate 13 and the feed rollers 12a and 12b, and the film 16 is conveyed while being in contact with the feed rollers 12a and 12b. Film 16 is introduced into plating bath 11 and dipped in plating solution 15 to form copper plating. When passing between the liquid draining rollers 17, the plating solution 15 adhering to the film 16 is wiped off and collected in the plating bath 11. This is repeated in a plurality of electrolytic baths, and finally washed with water, and then wound up on a reeling reel (not shown).
フィルム 16の搬送速度は、 l〜30mZ分の範囲で設定される。フィルム 16の搬送 速度は、好ましくは、 1〜: LOmZ分の範囲であり、より好ましくは、 2〜5mZ分の範囲 である。  The conveyance speed of the film 16 is set in the range of 1 to 30 mZ. The conveying speed of the film 16 is preferably in the range of 1 to: LOmZ, and more preferably in the range of 2 to 5 mZ.
[0149] 電解めつき槽の数は、特に限定されないが、 10段以下、すなわち 10槽以下が好ま しぐ 2〜10槽が好ましぐ 3〜6槽がより好ましい。 印加電圧は、 1〜: L00Vの範囲 であることが好ましぐ 2〜60Vの範囲であることがより好ましい。電解めつき槽が複数 設置されている場合は、電解めつき槽の印加電圧を段階的に下げることが好ましい。 また、第 1槽目の入り口側の電流量としては、 1〜30Aが好ましぐ 2〜: L0Aがより好ま しい。  [0149] The number of electrolytic plating tanks is not particularly limited, but 10 or less, that is, 10 or less is preferable, 2 to 10 is preferable, and 3 to 6 is more preferable. The applied voltage is preferably in the range of 1 to: L00V, and more preferably in the range of 2 to 60V. When a plurality of electrolytic plating tanks are installed, it is preferable to lower the applied voltage of the electrolytic plating tank stepwise. In addition, the amount of current on the inlet side of the first tank is preferably 1 to 30 A. 2 to: L0A is more preferable.
給電ローラ 12a, 12bはフィルム全面 (接触している面積のうちの実質的に電気的 に接触して ヽる部分が 80%以上)と接触して ヽることが好ま ヽ。 [0150] なお、上記電解めつき槽においてめっき処理を行う前に、水洗および酸洗浄を行う ことが好ましい。酸洗浄の際に用いる処理液には、硫酸等が含まれるものを用いるこ とがでさる。 It is preferable that the feeding rollers 12a and 12b be in contact with the entire surface of the film (80% or more of the contact area is substantially in electrical contact). [0150] It is preferable to perform water washing and acid washing before the plating treatment in the electrolytic bath. The treatment solution used for the acid cleaning can be one containing sulfuric acid or the like.
[0151] 上記電解めつき処理によりめつきされる導電性金属部の厚さは、ディスプレイの電 磁波シールド材の用途としては、薄 、ほどディスプレイの視野角が広がるため好まし い。さら〖こ、導電性配線材料の用途としては、高密度化の要請から薄膜化が要求さ れる。このような観点から、導電性金属部の厚さは、 9 m未満であることが好ましぐ 0. 1 m以上 5 μ m未満であることがより好ましぐ 0. 1 m以上 3 μ m未満であるこ とがさらに好ましい。  [0151] The thickness of the conductive metal part to be attached by the electrolytic plating process is preferable because the viewing angle of the display becomes wider as the electromagnetic wave shielding material of the display is thinner. Furthermore, as a use for conductive wiring materials, thinning is required because of the demand for higher density. From this point of view, the thickness of the conductive metal part is preferably less than 9 m, more preferably 0.1 m or more and less than 5 μm, 0.1 m or more and 3 μm. More preferably, it is less than.
[0152] また、本発明のめっき処理においては、上記の電解めつき処理を行う直前のフィル ムの表面抵抗が l〜1000 Q Zsqのフィルムであれば、その前に無電解めつき処理を 行ってもよい。  [0152] In the plating treatment of the present invention, if the film has a surface resistance of l to 1000 Q Zsq immediately before the electrolytic plating treatment, an electroless plating treatment is performed before that. May be.
無電解めつきを行う場合は、公知の無電解めつき技術を用いることができ、例えば、 プリント配線板などで用いられて 、る無電解めつき技術を用いることができ、無電解 めっきは無電解銅めつきであることが好ましい。  When performing electroless plating, a known electroless plating technique can be used. For example, it can be used for a printed wiring board and the like, and the electroless plating technique can be used. Electrolytic copper plating is preferable.
無電解銅めつき液に含まれる化学種としては、硫酸銅や塩化銅、還元剤として、ホ ルマリンゃグリオキシル酸、銅の配位子として、 EDTA,トリエタノールアミン等、その 他、浴の安定ィ匕やめつき皮膜の平滑性向上の為の添加剤としてポリエチレングリコー ル、黄血塩、ビビリジン等が挙げられる。  Chemical species contained in the electroless copper plating solution include copper sulfate and copper chloride, as a reducing agent, formalin glyoxylic acid, as a copper ligand, EDTA, triethanolamine, etc. Polyethylene glycol, yellow blood salt, biviridine and the like can be mentioned as additives for improving the smoothness of wrinkles and glazing films.
[0153] また、フィルム上の導電性パターンは連続している(電気的に途切れていない)こと が好ましい。一部でも繋がっていればよぐ導電性パターンが途切れると第 1槽目の 電解めつき槽でめつきがつかない部分ができたり、ムラになったりするおそれがある。 [0153] The conductive pattern on the film is preferably continuous (not electrically interrupted). If even a part of the pattern is connected, the conductive pattern may break, and there is a risk that a non-sticky part may be formed in the first electrolytic plating tank or it may become uneven.
[0154] めっき処理時のめっき速度は、緩やかな条件で行うことができる力 5 μ mZhr以上 の高速めつきも可能である。めっき処理において、めっき液の安定性を高める観点か らは、例えば、 EDTAなどの配位子など種々の添加剤をめつき液中に添カ卩して用い ることがでさる。 [0154] The plating speed during the plating process can be high-speed plating with a force of 5 μmZhr or more that can be performed under moderate conditions. In the plating process, from the viewpoint of improving the stability of the plating solution, for example, various additives such as a ligand such as EDTA can be added to the plating solution and used.
[0155] (2— 4)酸化処理 [0155] (2-4) Oxidation treatment
本発明では、現像処理後の金属銀部、並びに、物理現像および Zまたはめつき処 理によって形成された導電性金属部には、酸化処理を施すことが好ましい。酸化処 理を行うことにより、例えば、光透過性部に金属が僅かに沈着していた場合に、該金 属を除去し、光透過性部の透過性をほぼ 100%にすることができる。 In the present invention, the metallic silver portion after the development processing, the physical development and the Z or mating treatment. It is preferable to subject the conductive metal part formed by treatment to an oxidation treatment. By performing the oxidation treatment, for example, when a metal is slightly deposited on the light transmitting portion, the metal can be removed, and the light transmitting portion can be made almost 100% transparent.
酸化処理としては、例えば、 Fe (III)イオン処理など、種々の酸化剤を用いた公知 の方法が挙げられる。上述の通り、酸化処理は、乳剤層の露光および現像処理後、 或いは物理現像またはめつき処理後に行うことができ、さらに現像処理後と物理現像 またはめつき処理後のそれぞれで行ってもょ 、。  Examples of the oxidation treatment include known methods using various oxidizing agents such as Fe (III) ion treatment. As described above, the oxidation treatment can be carried out after the emulsion layer exposure and development treatment, or after physical development or staking treatment, and further after the development treatment and after physical development or staking treatment, .
[0156] (3)導電性金属部  [0156] (3) Conductive metal part
本発明において、導電性金属部は、透光性電磁波シールド材料としての用途であ る場合、正三角形、二等辺三角形、直角三角形などの三角形、正方形、長方形、菱 形、平行四辺形、台形などの四角形、(正)六角形、(正)八角形などの (正) n角形、 円、楕円、星形などを組み合わせた幾何学図形であることが好ましぐこれらの幾何 学図形からなるメッシュ状であることがさらに好まし 、。 EMIシールド性の観点からは 三角形の形状が最も有効である力 可視光透過性の観点からは同一のライン幅なら (正) n角形の n数が大き 、ほど開口率が上がり可視光透過性が大きくなるので有利 である。モアレを生じに《する観点ではこれらの幾何学模様をランダムに配置したり 、ライン幅を周期性なしに変化させることも好ましい。  In the present invention, when the conductive metal part is used as a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding material, a triangle such as a regular triangle, an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a square, a rectangle, a rhombus, a parallelogram, a trapezoid, etc. A mesh consisting of these geometric shapes, which is preferably a combination of (positive) hexagons, (positive) n-gons such as (positive) hexagons, circles, ellipses, stars, etc. It is even better to be in the shape. From the viewpoint of EMI shielding properties, the triangular shape is the most effective force. From the viewpoint of visible light transmission, if the line width is the same (positive), the n-number of n-gons increases, so the aperture ratio increases and the visible light transmission increases. It is advantageous because it becomes larger. From the viewpoint of generating moiré, it is also preferable to arrange these geometric patterns at random or change the line width without periodicity.
なお、導電性配線材料の用途である場合、前記導電性金属部の形状は特に限定 されず、目的に応じて任意の形状を適宜決定することができる。  In addition, when it is a use of an electroconductive wiring material, the shape of the said electroconductive metal part is not specifically limited, Arbitrary shapes can be suitably determined according to the objective.
[0157] 透光性電磁波シールド材料の用途において、上記導電性金属部の金属細線の線 幅は導電性確保のために 18 μ m以下であることが必要である。線幅が 18 μ mを超え ると開口率とメッシュサイズをともに満足なレベルとするのに制約となるので好ましくな い。線幅は、 5〜18 μ mであることが好ましぐ 8〜16 μ mであることがさらに好ましい 。線間隔は 50 μ m以上 500 μ m以下であることが好ましぐ更に好ましくは 200 μ m以 上 400 μ m以下、最も好ましくは 250 μ m以上 350 μ m以下である。  [0157] In the application of the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding material, the line width of the thin metal wire of the conductive metal portion needs to be 18 μm or less in order to ensure conductivity. If the line width exceeds 18 μm, it is not preferable because both the aperture ratio and mesh size are constrained to a satisfactory level. The line width is preferably 5 to 18 μm, more preferably 8 to 16 μm. The line spacing is preferably 50 μm or more and 500 μm or less, more preferably 200 μm or more and 400 μm or less, and most preferably 250 μm or more and 350 μm or less.
[0158] 本発明における上記導電性金属部は、可視光透過率の点から開口率は 85%以上 であることが好ましぐ 90%以上であることがさらに好ましぐ 95%以上であることが最 も好ましい。開口率とは、メッシュをなす細線のない部分が全体に占める割合であり、 例えば、線幅 15 /z m、ピッチ 300 mの正方形の格子状メッシュの開口率は、 90%で ある。 [0158] The conductive metal part in the present invention has an aperture ratio of preferably 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more, and more preferably 95% or more from the viewpoint of visible light transmittance. Is most preferable. The open area ratio is the ratio of the portion without fine lines that make up the mesh to the whole, For example, the aperture ratio of a square grid mesh with a line width of 15 / zm and a pitch of 300 m is 90%.
[0159] (4)光透過性部  [0159] (4) Light transmissive part
本発明における「光透過性部」とは、透光性電磁波シールド膜のうち導電性金属部 以外の透明性を有する部分を意味する。光透過性部における透過率は、前述のとお り、支持体の光吸収及び反射の寄与を除いた 380〜780nmの波長領域における透 過率の最小値で示される透過率が 90%以上、好ましくは 95%以上、さらに好ましく は 97%以上であり、さらにより好ましくは 98%以上であり、最も好ましくは 99%以上 である。  The “light transmitting part” in the present invention means a part having transparency other than the conductive metal part in the light transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film. As described above, the transmittance of the light transmissive portion is 90% or more, preferably the transmittance indicated by the minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength region of 380 to 780 nm excluding the contribution of light absorption and reflection of the support. Is 95% or more, more preferably 97% or more, even more preferably 98% or more, and most preferably 99% or more.
[0160] 本発明における導電性金属部のメッシュのパターンは、透光性電磁波シールド膜 の長手方向に 3m以上連続して 、ることが好ましく、メッシュパターンの連続長が長!ヽ ほど、前記光学フィルター材料を生産する場合のロスが低減できるためより好ま ヽ 態様であるといえる。一方、連続長が長いとロール状にした場合にロール径が大きく なる、ロールの質量が重くなる、ロールの中心部の圧力が強くなり接着や変形などの 問題を生じ安くなる等の理由で 2000m以下であることが好ましい。好ましくは 100m 以上 1000m以下、更に好ましくは 200m以上 800m以下、最も好ましくは 300m以 上 500m以下である。  [0160] The mesh pattern of the conductive metal portion in the present invention is preferably continuous for 3 m or more in the longitudinal direction of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and the longer the continuous length of the mesh pattern, the more the optical pattern becomes. It can be said that this is a more preferable mode because the loss in producing the filter material can be reduced. On the other hand, if the continuous length is long, the roll diameter becomes large when the roll is formed, the roll mass becomes heavy, the pressure at the center of the roll becomes strong, causing problems such as adhesion and deformation, and cheapness. The following is preferable. It is preferably 100 m or more and 1000 m or less, more preferably 200 m or more and 800 m or less, and most preferably 300 m or more and 500 m or less.
同様の理由により支持体の厚みは 200 μ m以下が好ましぐ更に好ましくは 20 μ m 以上 180 μ m以下、最も好ましくは 50 μ m以上 120 μ m以下である。  For the same reason, the thickness of the support is preferably 200 μm or less, more preferably 20 μm or more and 180 μm or less, and most preferably 50 μm or more and 120 μm or less.
[0161] 該光ビームの走査方法としては、搬送方向に対して実質的に垂直な方向に配列し たライン状の光源または回転ポリゴンミラーによって露光する方法が好ましい。この場 合、光ビームは 2値以上の強度変調を行う必要があり、直線はドットの連続としてバタ 一ユングされる。ドットの連続であるため一ドットの細線の縁は階段状になるが、細線 の太さはくびれた部分の一番狭い長さを意味する。  [0161] The scanning method of the light beam is preferably a method of exposing with a linear light source or a rotating polygon mirror arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the transport direction. In this case, the light beam needs to be intensity-modulated by two or more values, and the straight line is battered as a series of dots. Since the dots are continuous, the edge of the fine line of one dot is stepped, but the thickness of the fine line means the narrowest length of the constricted part.
[0162] 該光ビームの走査方法のもう一つの方式として、格子パターンの傾きに合わせて搬 送方向に対して走査方向を傾力せたビームを走査することも好ましい。この場合、 2 つの走査光ビームを直交するように配列することが好ましく。光ビームは露光面状で は実質的に 1値の強度をとる。 [0163] 本発明にお 、てメッシュパターンは透光性電磁波シールド膜の長手方向に対して 3 0° から 60° 傾力せることが好ましい。より好ましくは 40° から 50° であり、最も好まし くは 43° から 47° である。これはメッシュパターンが枠に対して 45° 程度の傾きとなる マスクの作成が一般的に難しく、ムラが出やす 、或いは価格が高 、などの問題を生 じゃすいのに対して、本方式はむしろ 45° 付近にてムラが出にくいため、本発明の 効果がマスク密着露光方式のフォトリソグラフィーゃスクリーン印刷によるパターニン グに対してより顕著な効果がある。 [0162] As another method of scanning the light beam, it is also preferable to scan a beam whose scanning direction is inclined with respect to the carrying direction in accordance with the inclination of the grating pattern. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the two scanning light beams so as to be orthogonal to each other. The light beam has a substantially single intensity on the exposed surface. [0163] In the present invention, the mesh pattern is preferably inclined by 30 ° to 60 ° with respect to the longitudinal direction of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film. More preferably, it is 40 ° to 50 °, and most preferably 43 ° to 47 °. This is because it is generally difficult to create a mask whose mesh pattern is inclined at about 45 ° with respect to the frame, and it is difficult to create unevenness or the price is high. Rather, unevenness hardly occurs at around 45 °, so that the effect of the present invention is more remarkable for patterning by screen printing using mask contact exposure.
[0164] 本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜の表面抵抗値は、 5 Q Zsq以下であることが必 要である。好ましい表面抵抗値は、 Ι Ω /sq以下であり、さらに好ましくは 0.7〜0.03 Ω Zsqである。  [0164] The surface resistance value of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention is required to be 5 Q Zsq or less. A preferable surface resistance value is 以下 Ω / sq or less, and more preferably 0.7 to 0.03Ω Zsq.
また、本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜の金属銀部の断線は、 10箇所/ m2以下 であることが必要である。これにより、導電性が確保されて電磁波シールド機能が発 揮される。好ましくは、 4箇所/ m2以下であり、さらに好ましくは 1箇所/ m2以下である。 Further, the disconnection of the metallic silver portion of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention needs to be 10 locations / m 2 or less. Thereby, conductivity is ensured and an electromagnetic wave shielding function is exhibited. Preferably, it is 4 sites / m 2 or less, more preferably 1 site / m 2 or less.
[0165] (5)剥離可能な保護フィルム  [0165] (5) Peelable protective film
本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜は、剥離可能な保護フィルムを設けることができ る。保護フィルムは、透光性電磁波シールド膜の両面に設ける必要はなぐ導電性金 属部上のみ、あるいはその逆側のみに設けることもできる。保護フィルムは、導電性 金属部上に設けた場合は、 V、わゆる剥離可能であることが望ま U、。  The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention can be provided with a peelable protective film. The protective film need not be provided on both surfaces of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and can be provided only on the conductive metal portion or on the opposite side. When the protective film is provided on a conductive metal part, V, it is desirable that it can be peeled off.
[0166] 保護フィルムの剥離強度は、前記の試験条件で 5mNZ25mm幅〜 5NZ25mm 幅であることが好ましぐより好ましくは 10mNZ25mm幅〜 100mNZ25mm幅であ る。下限未満では、剥離が容易過ぎ、取扱い中や不用意な接触により保護フィルム が剥離する恐れがあり、好ましくなぐまた上限を超えると、剥離のために大きな力を 要する上、剥離の際に、導電性金属部が支持体から剥離する恐れがあり、やはり好 ましくない。  [0166] The peel strength of the protective film is preferably 5mNZ25mm width to 5NZ25mm width, more preferably 10mNZ25mm width to 100mNZ25mm width under the above test conditions. If it is less than the lower limit, peeling is too easy and the protective film may be peeled off during handling or inadvertent contact. If the upper limit is exceeded, a large force is required for peeling, and a conductive film is required for peeling. There is a risk that the conductive metal part may peel off from the support, which is not preferable.
[0167] 保護フィルムを構成するフィルムとしては、ポリオレフイン系榭脂であるポリエチレン 榭脂ゃポリプロピレン榭脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート榭脂等のポリエステル榭脂、 ポリカーボネート榭脂、もしくはアクリル榭脂等の榭脂フィルムを用いることが好ましく 、また、保護フィルムの接着される面にはコロナ放電処理を施しておくことが好ましい [0168] また、保護フィルムを構成する接着剤としては、アクリル酸エステル系、ゴム系、もし くはシリコーン系のものを使用することができる。 [0167] As the film constituting the protective film, polyethylene resin, which is a polyolefin resin, polyester resin such as polypropylene resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, or resin film such as acrylic resin It is preferable to use, and the surface to which the protective film is bonded is preferably subjected to corona discharge treatment. [0168] As the adhesive constituting the protective film, an acrylic ester-based, rubber-based, or silicone-based adhesive can be used.
[0169] (6)黒化層 [0169] (6) Blackening layer
本発明のロール状透光性電磁波シールド膜や、それを組み込んだ光学フィルムは 、黒ィ匕処理を施したものであってもよい。  The rolled translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention and the optical film incorporating the same may be subjected to blackening treatment.
黒ィ匕処理については、例えば特開 2003— 188576号公報に開示されている。黒 化処理により形成さえた黒化層は、防鲭効果に加え、反射防止性を付与することが できる。黒ィ匕層は、例えば、 Co— Cu合金めつきによって形成され得るものであり、金 属箔の表面の反射を防止することができる。さらにその上に防鲭処理としてクロメート 処理をしてもよい。クロメート処理は、クロム酸もしくは重クロム酸塩を主成分とする溶 液中に浸漬し、乾燥させて防鲭被膜を形成するもので、必要に応じ、金属箔の片面 もしくは両面に行なうことができる力 市販のクロメート処理された銅箔等を利用しても よい。なお、予め黒ィ匕処理された金属箔を用いることもできるが、後の適宜な工程に おいて、黒化処理してもよい。黒ィ匕層の形成は、レジスト層となり得る感光性榭脂層 を、黒色に着色した組成物を用いて形成し、エッチングが終了した後に、レジスト層を 除去せずに残留させることによつても形成できるし、黒色系の被膜を与えるめっき法 によってもよい。  The black wrinkle process is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-188576. The blackened layer formed even by the blackening treatment can impart antireflection properties in addition to the antifungal effect. The black layer can be formed by, for example, Co—Cu alloy plating, and can prevent reflection of the surface of the metal foil. Further, a chromate treatment may be performed thereon as a fouling treatment. The chromate treatment is performed by immersing in a solution containing chromic acid or dichromate as a main component and drying to form an anti-fouling coating, which can be performed on one or both sides of the metal foil as required. Force Commercially available chromate-treated copper foil or the like may be used. Although a metal foil that has been blackened in advance can be used, it may be blackened in an appropriate later step. Formation of the black wrinkle layer is accomplished by forming a photosensitive resin layer that can be a resist layer using a black colored composition, and leaving the resist layer without removal after etching is completed. Alternatively, a plating method that gives a black film may be used.
[0170] また、黒ィ匕層を含む構成の別の例としては、特開平 11— 266095号公報に示した 構成であってもよい。すなわち、導電性金属部上に第 1の黒ィ匕層を設け、この第 1の 黒ィ匕層上に上記の電解めつきを施した後、さらにこのめつき上に第 2の黒ィ匕層を有す る構成である。第 1の黒ィ匕層上に電解めつきを行うには、少なくとも第 1の黒ィ匕層が導 電性である必要がある。上記の導電性黒ィ匕層は、一般に、導電性金属化合物、例え ば、ニッケル (Ni)、亜鉛 (Zn)、銅 (Cu)等の化合物を使用して形成することができ、 あるいは、電着性イオン性高分子材料、例えば、電着塗装材料等を使用して形成す ることがでさる。  [0170] Further, as another example of the configuration including the blackish white layer, the configuration shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-266095 may be used. That is, after the first black layer is provided on the conductive metal portion and the electrolytic plating is performed on the first black layer, the second black layer is further formed on the plating. It is a configuration with layers. In order to perform electroplating on the first black layer, at least the first black layer must be conductive. In general, the conductive black layer can be formed using a conductive metal compound, for example, a compound such as nickel (Ni), zinc (Zn), copper (Cu), or the like. It can be formed using an electrodepositing ionic polymer material such as an electrodeposition coating material.
[0171] 本発明において、上記の黒化材料を含有する電解液の浴 (黒色めつき浴)は、硫酸 ニッケル塩を主成分とする黒色めつき浴を使用することができ、更に、市販の黒色め つき浴も同様に使用することができ、具体的には、例えば、株式会社シミズ製の黒色 めっき浴 (商品名、ノ―ブロイ SNC、 Sn— Ni合金系)、 日本化学産業株式会社製の 黒色めつき浴 (商品名、ニツカブラック、 Sn— Ni合金系)、株式会社金属化学工業製 の黒色めつき浴(商品名、ェボ-—クロム 85シリ— 85シリ—ズ、 Cr系)等を使用する ことができる。また、本発明においては、上記の黒色めつき浴としては、 Zn系、 Cu系、 その他等の種々の黒色めつき浴を使用することができる。次に、前記の導電性めつき を施し、導電性メッシュパターンを形成した後、この上に第 2の黒ィ匕層を形成する。例 えば、電界めつきの金属が Cuの場合、硫化水素(H S)液処理して、 Cuの表面を硫 [0171] In the present invention, the electrolyte bath containing the blackening material (black tanning bath) can be a black tanning bath containing nickel sulfate as a main component, and is also commercially available. Blackish Attached bath can be used in the same way. Specifically, for example, a black plating bath manufactured by Shimizu Corporation (trade name, Novroy SNC, Sn—Ni alloy system), black manufactured by Nippon Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Metal bath (trade name, Nitsuka black, Sn—Ni alloy), black bath bath (trade name, Evo-Chromium 85 series, 85 series, Cr series) manufactured by Metal Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Can be used. In the present invention, various black tanning baths such as Zn-based, Cu-based, and others can be used as the black tanning bath. Next, the conductive mesh is applied to form a conductive mesh pattern, and then a second black layer is formed thereon. For example, if the metal with an electric field is Cu, treat the surface of Cu with hydrogen sulfide (HS) solution treatment.
2  2
ィ匕銅 (CuS)として黒ィ匕し、第 2の黒ィ匕層が形成される。メッシュ状の導電性バタ—ン を構成する材料としては、前述の良導電性物質としての金属が最も有利な材料として 使用することがでる。而して、上記の金属電着層を形成する場合には、汎用金属の 電解液を使用することができるので、多種類の、安価な金属電解液が存在し、 目的 に適った選択を自由に行うことができるという利点がある。一般に、安価な良導電性 金属としては、 Cuが多用されており、本発明においても、 Cuを使用することが、その 目的にも合致して有用なものであり、勿論、その他の金属も同様に用いることができ るものである。次にまた、本発明において、メッシュ状の導電性パターン 4は、単一金 属層のみで構成する必要はなぐ例えば、図示しないが、上記の例の Cuからなるメッ シュ状の導電性バタ一ンは、比較的に柔らかく傷がつき易いので、その保護層として 、 Niや Cr等の汎用の硬質金属を用いて 2層からなる金属電着層とすることもできる。 なお、第 2の黒ィ匕層のための黒ィ匕処理剤としては、硫化物系化合物を用いて容易に 製造でき、更にまた、市販品も多種類の処理剤があり、例えば、商品名 'コパーブラッ ク CuO、同 CuS、セレン系のコパ一ブラック No. 65等(アイソレ一ト化学研究所製)、 商品名'ェボノール Cスペシャル (メルテックス株式会社製)等を使用することができる [透光性電磁波シールド膜の電磁波シールド以外の機能層] As a result, the second black layer is formed. As a material constituting the mesh-like conductive pattern, the metal as the above-mentioned good conductive substance can be used as the most advantageous material. Therefore, when forming the above-mentioned metal electrodeposition layer, it is possible to use general-purpose metal electrolytes, so there are many types of inexpensive metal electrolytes, and it is free to choose the one that suits the purpose. There is an advantage that can be done. In general, Cu is frequently used as an inexpensive and highly conductive metal, and in the present invention, it is useful to use Cu in accordance with the purpose. Of course, other metals are similarly used. It can be used for Next, in the present invention, the mesh-like conductive pattern 4 does not need to be composed of only a single metal layer. For example, although not shown, the mesh-like conductive pattern 4 made of Cu in the above example is used. Since it is relatively soft and easily scratched, the protective layer can be a two-layer metal electrodeposition layer using a general-purpose hard metal such as Ni or Cr. In addition, as the blackening agent for the second blackening layer, it can be easily manufactured using a sulfide-based compound, and there are many types of treating agents on the market. 'Copper black CuO, CuS, selenium-based Copa Black No. 65, etc. (made by Isolate Chemical Laboratories), trade name' Ebonol C Special (made by Meltex Co., Ltd.), etc. can be used. Functional layers other than electromagnetic shielding of optical electromagnetic shielding film]
(7)その他の機能層 (7) Other functional layers
本発明では、必要に応じて、別途、機能性を有する機能層を設けていてもよい。こ の機能層は、用途ごとに種々の仕様とすることができる。例えば、ディスプレイ用電磁 波シールド材用途としては、屈折率や膜厚を調整した反射防止機能を付与した反射 防止層や、ノングレアー層またはアンチグレア層(共にぎらつき防止機能を有する)、 近赤外線を吸収する化合物や金属からなる近赤外線吸収層、特定の波長域の可視 光を吸収する色調調節機能をもった層、指紋などの汚れを除去しやすい機能を有し た防汚層、傷のつき難いハードコート層、衝撃吸収機能を有する層、ガラス破損時の ガラス飛散防止機能を有する層などを設けることができる。これらの機能層は、導電 性金属部と支持体とを挟んで反対側の面に設けてもよぐさらに同一面側に設けても よい。 In the present invention, a functional layer having functionality may be separately provided as necessary. This functional layer can have various specifications for each application. For example, display electromagnetic Wave shield materials include anti-reflective layers with anti-reflective functions that adjust the refractive index and film thickness, non-glare layers or anti-glare layers (both have anti-glare functions), and compounds and metals that absorb near-infrared rays. Near-infrared absorption layer, layer with a color tone adjustment function that absorbs visible light in a specific wavelength range, antifouling layer with a function that easily removes dirt such as fingerprints, hard-coat layer that is hard to scratch, impact A layer having an absorption function, a layer having a function of preventing glass scattering when the glass is broken, and the like can be provided. These functional layers may be provided on the opposite side of the conductive metal part and the support, or may be provided on the same side.
これらの機能層を設けた材料を光学フィルター(または単にフィルター)と呼ぶ。  A material provided with these functional layers is called an optical filter (or simply a filter).
[0173] <機能性フィルム >  [0173] <Functional film>
透光性電磁波シールド膜をディスプレイ (特にプラズマディスプレイ)に用いる場合 には、以下に説明する機能層 (機能性フィルム)を貼付することにより、各機能性を付 与することが好ま Uヽ。機能性フィルムは接着剤等を介して透光性電磁波シールド膜 に直接または間接的に貼付することができる。機能性フィルムは、適当な透明基材上 に反射防止性 ·防眩性を有する機能層を設けることにより形成することができる。 (反射防止性'防眩性)  When using a translucent electromagnetic shielding film for a display (especially a plasma display), it is preferable to attach each functional layer by attaching a functional layer (functional film) described below. The functional film can be directly or indirectly attached to the translucent electromagnetic shielding film via an adhesive or the like. The functional film can be formed by providing a functional layer having antireflection properties and antiglare properties on a suitable transparent substrate. (Anti-reflective 'Anti-glare)
透光性電磁波シールド膜には、外光反射を抑制するための反射防止 (AR:アンチ リフレクション)性、または、鏡像の映り込みを防止する防眩 (AG :アンチグレア)性、 またはその両特性を備えた反射防止防眩 (ARAG)性の 、ずれかの機能性を付与 することが好ましい。  The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film has anti-reflection (AR: anti-reflection) properties to suppress external light reflection, anti-glare properties (AG: anti-glare) properties to prevent reflection of mirror images, or both. It is preferable to provide any anti-glare and anti-glare (ARAG) function provided.
これらの性能により、照明器具等の映り込みによって表示画面が見づらくなつてしま うのを防止できる。また、膜表面の可視光線反射率が低くすることにより、映り込み防 止だけではなぐコントラスト等を向上させることができる。反射防止性 ·防眩性を有す る機能性フィルムを透光性電磁波シールド膜に貼付した場合の可視光線反射率は、 2%以下であることが好ましぐより好ましくは 1. 3%以下、さらに好ましくは 0. 8%以 下である。  With these performances, it is possible to prevent the display screen from becoming difficult to see due to the reflection of lighting equipment. In addition, by reducing the visible light reflectance on the film surface, it is possible to improve contrast and the like that can be achieved only by preventing reflection. Anti-glare property ・ When a functional film having anti-glare properties is applied to a translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, the visible light reflectance is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 1.3% or less. More preferably, it is 0.8% or less.
[0174] 反射防止層としては、例えば、フッ素系透明高分子榭脂ゃフッ化マグネシウム、シリ コン系榭脂ゃ酸化珪素の薄膜等を例えば 1Z4波長の光学膜厚で単層形成したもの 、屈折率の異なる、金属酸化物、フッ化物、ケィ化物、窒化物、硫化物等の無機化合 物またはシリコン系榭脂ゃアクリル榭脂、フッ素系榭脂等の有機化合物の薄膜を 2層 以上多層積層したもの等で形成することができる。 [0174] As the antireflection layer, for example, a thin film of a fluorine-based transparent polymer resin, magnesium fluoride, a silicon-based resin, silicon oxide, or the like is formed as a single layer with an optical film thickness of 1Z4 wavelength, for example. Two or more thin films of inorganic compounds such as metal oxides, fluorides, halides, nitrides and sulfides, or organic compounds such as silicon-based resins, acrylic resins, and fluorine-based resins with different refractive indexes. It can be formed of a multi-layered laminate.
[0175] 防眩性層としては、 0. 1 π!〜 10 m程度の微少な凹凸の表面状態を有する層 力 形成することができる。具体的には、アクリル系榭脂、シリコン系榭脂、メラミン系 榭脂、ウレタン系榭脂、アルキド系榭脂、フッ素系榭脂等の熱硬化型または光硬化型 榭脂に、シリカ、有機珪素化合物、メラミン、アクリル等の無機化合物または有機化合 物の粒子を分散させインキ化したものを塗布、硬化することにより形成することが可能 である。 [0175] As an antiglare layer, 0.1 π! It is possible to form a laminar force having a surface state with minute irregularities of about 10 m. Specifically, acrylic or silicone resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, fluorinated resin, or other thermosetting or photocurable resin, silica, organic It can be formed by coating and curing an ink obtained by dispersing particles of an inorganic compound or organic compound such as a silicon compound, melamine, or acrylic.
粒子の平均粒径は、 1〜40 /ζ πι程度が好ましい。  The average particle size of the particles is preferably about 1 to 40 / ζ πι.
また、防眩性層としては、上記の熱硬化型または光硬化型榭脂を塗布した後、所望 のダロス値または表面状態を有する型を押しつけ硬化することによつても形成するこ とがでさる。  The antiglare layer can also be formed by applying the thermosetting or photocurable resin as described above and then pressing and curing a mold having a desired dalos value or surface state. Monkey.
防眩性層を設けた場合の透光性電磁波シールド膜の光透過の際に生じるヘイズは 0. 5%以上 20%以下であることが好ましぐより好ましくは 10%以下であり、例えば 1 %以上 10%以下である。ヘイズが小さすぎると防眩性が不十分であり、ヘイズが大き すぎると透過像鮮明度が低くなる傾向がある。  When the antiglare layer is provided, the haze generated during light transmission of the translucent electromagnetic shielding film is preferably 0.5% or more and 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less. % To 10%. If the haze is too small, the antiglare property is insufficient, and if the haze is too large, the transmitted image sharpness tends to be low.
[0176] (ハードコート性)  [0176] (Hard coat)
透光性電磁波シールド膜に耐擦傷性を付加するために、機能性フィルムがハード コート性を有していることも好適である。ハードコート層としてはアクリル系榭脂、シリコ ン系榭脂、メラミン系榭脂、ウレタン系榭脂、アルキド系榭脂、フッ素系榭脂等の熱硬 化型または光硬化型榭脂等が挙げられるが、その種類も形成方法も特に限定されな い。ハードコート層の厚さは、 1〜50 /ζ πι程度であることが好ましい。ハードコート層 上に上記の反射防止層および Ζまたは防眩層を形成すると、耐擦傷性 ·反射防止性 および Ζまたは防眩性を有する機能性フィルムが得られ好適である。  In order to add scratch resistance to the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, it is also preferable that the functional film has a hard coat property. Examples of the hard coat layer include thermosetting type or photosetting type resin such as acrylic resin, silicone resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, and fluorine resin. However, the type and formation method are not particularly limited. The thickness of the hard coat layer is preferably about 1 to 50 / ζ πι. When the above-mentioned antireflection layer and wrinkle or antiglare layer are formed on the hard coat layer, a functional film having scratch resistance / antireflection and wrinkle or antiglare property is preferably obtained.
ハードコート性が付与された透光性電磁波シールド膜の表面硬度は、 JIS (κ— 54 The surface hardness of the translucent electromagnetic shielding film with hard coat properties is JIS (κ-54
00)に従った鉛筆硬度が少なくとも Hであることが好ましぐより好ましくは 2H、さらに 好ましくは 3H以上である。 [0177] (帯電防止性) The pencil hardness according to (00) is preferably at least H, more preferably 2H, even more preferably 3H or more. [0177] (Antistatic property)
静電気帯電によるホコリの付着や、人体との接触による静電気放電を防止するため 、透過性電磁波シールド膜には、帯電防止性が付与されることが好ましい。  In order to prevent dust adhesion due to electrostatic charging and electrostatic discharge due to contact with the human body, it is preferable that the transmissive electromagnetic wave shielding film has antistatic properties.
帯電防止性を有する機能性フィルムとしては、導電性の高 、フィルムを用いることが でき、例えば導電性が面抵抗で 1011 Ω Zsq程度以下であればょ 、。 As the functional film having antistatic properties, a film having high conductivity can be used. For example, if the conductivity is about 10 11 ΩZsq or less in terms of surface resistance,
導電性の高いフィルムは、透明基材上に帯電防止層を設けることにより形成するこ とができる。帯電防止層に用いる帯電防止剤としては、具体的には、商品名ペレスタ ット (三洋化成社製)、商品名エレクトロスリッパー (花王社製)等が挙げられる。他に、 ITOをはじめとする公知の透明導電膜や ITO超微粒子や酸化スズ超微粒子をはじ めとする導電性超微粒子を分散させた導電膜で帯電防止層を形成してもよい。上述 のハードコート層、反射防止層、防眩層等に、導電性微粒子を含有させる等して帯 電防止性を付与してもよい。  A highly conductive film can be formed by providing an antistatic layer on a transparent substrate. Specific examples of the antistatic agent used in the antistatic layer include a trade name Pelestat (manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd.), a trade name electroslipper (manufactured by Kao Corporation), and the like. In addition, the antistatic layer may be formed of a known transparent conductive film such as ITO, or a conductive film in which conductive ultrafine particles such as ITO ultrafine particles and tin oxide ultrafine particles are dispersed. The above hard coat layer, antireflection layer, antiglare layer and the like may be provided with antistatic properties by containing conductive fine particles.
[0178] (防汚性) [0178] (Anti-fouling property)
透光性電磁波シールド膜が防汚性を有して 、ると、指紋等の汚れ防止や汚れが付 いたときに簡単に取り除くことができるので好適である。  If the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film has antifouling property, it is preferable because it can be easily removed when it is prevented from being smudged or smudged.
防汚性を有する機能性フィルムは、例えば透明基材上に防汚性を有する化合物を 付与することにより得られる。防汚性を有する化合物としては、水および Zまたは油 脂に対して非濡性を有する化合物であればよぐ例えばフッ素化合物やケィ素化合 物が挙げられる。フッ素化合物として具体的には商品名ォプツール (ダイキン社製) 等が挙げられ、ケィ素化合物としては、商品名タカタクオンタム(日本油脂社製)等が 挙げられる。  A functional film having antifouling properties can be obtained, for example, by applying a compound having antifouling properties on a transparent substrate. As the compound having antifouling property, for example, a fluorine compound or a key compound may be used as long as the compound has non-wetting property with respect to water and Z or oil. Specific examples of the fluorine compound include trade name OPTOOL (manufactured by Daikin) and the like, and examples of the key compound include trade name Takata Quantum (manufactured by NOF Corporation).
[0179] (紫外線カット性) [0179] (UV cut off)
透光性電磁波シールド膜には、後述する色素や透明基材の劣化等を防ぐ目的で 紫外線カット性を付与することが好ま Uヽ。紫外線カット性を有する機能性フィルムは 、透明基材自体に紫外線吸収剤を含有させる方法や透明基材上に紫外線吸収層を 設けることにより形成することができる。  It is preferable to give the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film an ultraviolet ray-cutting property for the purpose of preventing the deterioration of the dye and transparent substrate described later. The functional film having ultraviolet cut-off property can be formed by a method in which an ultraviolet absorber is contained in the transparent substrate itself or by providing an ultraviolet absorbing layer on the transparent substrate.
色素を保護するのに必要な紫外線カット能としては、波長 380nmより短い紫外線 領域の透過率が、 20%以下、好ましくは 10%以下、更に好ましくは 5%以下である。 紫外線カット性を有する機能性フィルムは、紫外線吸収剤や紫外線を反射または吸 収する無機化合物を含有する層を透明基材上に形成することにより得られる。紫外 線吸収剤は、ベンゾトリアゾール系やべンゾフエノン系等、従来公知のものを使用で き、その種類'濃度は、分散または溶解させる媒体への分散性'溶解性、吸収波長- 吸収係数、媒体の厚さ等から決まり、特に限定されるものではない。 As the ultraviolet ray cutting ability necessary for protecting the dye, the transmittance in the ultraviolet region shorter than the wavelength of 380 nm is 20% or less, preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less. A functional film having an ultraviolet cutting property can be obtained by forming a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber or an inorganic compound that reflects or absorbs ultraviolet rays on a transparent substrate. Conventionally known UV absorbers such as benzotriazoles and benzophenones can be used, and their type 'concentration is dispersibility in the medium to be dispersed or dissolved' solubility, absorption wavelength-absorption coefficient, medium It is determined by the thickness of the material and is not particularly limited.
[0180] なお、紫外線カット性を有する機能性フィルムは、可視光線領域の吸収が少なぐ 著しく可視光線透過率が低下したり黄色等の色を呈することがないことが好ましい。 また、機能性フィルムに後述する色素を含有する層が形成されている場合は、その 層よりも外側に紫外線カット性を有する層が存在することが望ましい。  [0180] It is preferable that the functional film having ultraviolet cut-off property has little absorption in the visible light region and does not significantly reduce visible light transmittance or exhibit a color such as yellow. Moreover, when the layer containing the pigment | dye mentioned later is formed in the functional film, it is desirable that the layer which has ultraviolet-cutting property exists outside the layer.
[0181] (ガスバリア性) [0181] (Gas barrier properties)
透光性電磁波シールド膜を常温常湿よりも高い温度,湿度環境化で使用すると、水 分により後述する色素が劣化したり、貼り合せに用いる接着剤中や貼合界面に水分 が凝集して曇ったり、水分による影響で接着剤が相分離して析出して曇ったりするこ とがあるので、透光性電磁波シールド膜はガスバリア性を有して ヽることが好ま 、。 このような色素劣化や曇りを防ぐためには、色素を含有する層や接着剤層への水 分の侵入を防ぐことが肝要であり、機能性フィルムの水蒸気透過度が lOgZm2 · day 以下、好ましくは 5gZm2 · day以下であることが好適である。 If a translucent electromagnetic shielding film is used in a temperature and humidity environment higher than normal temperature and humidity, the dye described later deteriorates due to moisture, or moisture aggregates in the adhesive used for bonding and the bonding interface. It is preferable that the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film has a gas barrier property because it may be clouded or the adhesive may be phase-separated and deposited due to the influence of moisture. In order to prevent such deterioration and fogging of the pigment, it is important to prevent the penetration of water into the pigment-containing layer and the adhesive layer, and the water vapor permeability of the functional film is preferably lOgZm 2 · day or less, preferably Is preferably 5 gZm 2 · day or less.
[0182] (その他の光学特性) [0182] (Other optical properties)
プラズマディスプレイは強度の近赤外線を発生するため、透光性電磁波シールド膜 を特にプラズマディスプレイに用いる場合は、近赤外線カット性を付与することが好ま しい。  Since a plasma display generates intense near-infrared rays, it is preferable to provide a near-infrared cut-off property, particularly when a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film is used for a plasma display.
近赤外線カット性を有する機能性フィルムとしては、波長領域 800〜 1 OOOnmにお ける透過率を 25%以下であるものが好ましぐより好ましくは 15%以下、さらに好まし くは 10%以下である。  As a functional film having near-infrared cutting properties, a film having a transmittance of 25% or less in a wavelength region of 800 to 1 OOOnm is preferably less than 15%, more preferably less than 10%. is there.
[0183] また、透光性電磁波シールド膜をプラズマディスプレイに用いる場合、その透過色 が-ユートラルグレーまたはブルーグレーであることが好ましい。これは、プラズマディ スプレイの発光特性およびコントラストを維持または向上させるためであり、また、標 準白色より若干高めの色温度の白色が好まれる場合がある力もである。 [0184] さらに、カラープラズマディスプレイはその色再現性が不十分と言われており、特に 、赤色表示の発光スペクトルは、波長 580nmから 700nm程度までにわたる数本の 発光ピークを示しており、比較的強い短波長側の発光ピークにより赤色発光がオレン ジに近い色純度の良くないものとなってしまう問題がある。そこで、機能性フィルムは その原因である蛍光体または放電ガス力 の不要発光を選択的に低減させる機能を 有することが好ましい。 [0183] Further, when the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film is used for a plasma display, it is preferable that the transmitted color is-neutral gray or blue gray. This is to maintain or improve the light emission characteristics and contrast of the plasma display, and is also a force that may prefer a white color temperature slightly higher than the standard white color. [0184] Furthermore, color plasma displays are said to have insufficient color reproducibility. In particular, the emission spectrum of red display shows several emission peaks ranging from about 580 nm to about 700 nm. There is a problem that red emission becomes poor in color purity close to orange due to a strong emission peak on the short wavelength side. Therefore, it is preferable that the functional film has a function of selectively reducing unnecessary light emission of the phosphor or discharge gas force that is the cause thereof.
[0185] これら光学特性は、色素を用いることによって制御できる。つまり、近赤外線カットに は近赤外線吸収剤を用い、また、不要発光の低減には不要発光を選択的に吸収す る色素を用いて、所望の光学特性とすることができ、また、光学フィルターの色調も可 視領域に適当な吸収のある色素を用いて好適なものとすることができる。  [0185] These optical properties can be controlled by using a dye. In other words, near-infrared absorbers can be used for near-infrared cut, and dyes that selectively absorb unwanted luminescence can be used to reduce unwanted luminescence. The color tone can also be made suitable by using a dye having an appropriate absorption in the visible region.
[0186] 色素としては、可視領域に所望の吸収波長を有する一般の染料または顔料や、近 赤外線吸収剤として知られている化合物を用いることができ、その種類は特に限定さ れるものではないが、例えばアントラキノン系、フタロシアニン系、メチン系、ァゾメチ ン系、ォキサジン系、ィモニゥム系、ァゾ系、スチリル系、クマリン系、ポルフィリン系、 ジベンゾフラノン系、ジケトピロロピロール系、ローダミン系、キサンテン系、ピロメテン 系、ジチオール系化合物、ジイミ-ゥム系化合物等の一般に市販もされている有機 色素が挙げられる。  [0186] The dye may be a general dye or pigment having a desired absorption wavelength in the visible region, or a compound known as a near-infrared absorber, and the type thereof is not particularly limited. For example, anthraquinone, phthalocyanine, methine, azomethine, oxazine, imonium, azo, styryl, coumarin, porphyrin, dibenzofuranone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, rhodamine, xanthene, Examples thereof include organic dyes that are generally commercially available, such as pyromethene-based compounds, dithiol-based compounds, and diiminium-based compounds.
[0187] プラズマディスプレイはパネル表面の温度が高ぐ環境の温度が高いときは透光性 電磁波シールド膜の温度も上がるため、色素は、例えば 80°C程度で劣化しない耐熱 '性を有して ヽることが好適である。  [0187] The plasma display has a heat resistance that does not deteriorate at about 80 ° C, for example, because the temperature of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film increases when the temperature of the environment where the panel surface temperature is high is high. It is preferable to speak.
また、色素によっては耐光性に乏しいものもある力 このような色素を用いることでプ ラズマディスプレイの発光や外光の紫外線 ·可視光線による劣化が問題になる場合 は、前述のように機能性フィルムに紫外線吸収剤を含有させたり、紫外線を透過しな い層を設けることによって、紫外線や可視光線による色素の劣化を防止することが好 ましい。  In addition, some dyes have poor light resistance. If such dyes cause problems with the light emission of plasma displays and the deterioration of UV light and visible light from outside light, functional films as described above. It is preferable to prevent the dye from being deteriorated by ultraviolet rays or visible rays by adding an ultraviolet absorber to the layer or providing a layer that does not transmit ultraviolet rays.
熱、光に加えて、湿度や、これらの複合した環境においても同様である。劣化すると 光学フィルターの透過特性が変わってしま 、、色調が変化したり近赤外線カット能が 低下する場合がある。 また、透明基材を形成するための榭脂組成物や、塗布層を形成するための塗布組 成物中に溶解又は分散させるために、色素は溶媒への溶解性や分散性も高 、こと が好ましい。 The same applies to humidity and a combined environment in addition to heat and light. When it deteriorates, the transmission characteristics of the optical filter change, and the color tone may change or the near-infrared cutting ability may decrease. In addition, the dye is highly soluble and dispersible in the solvent in order to dissolve or disperse it in the resin composition for forming the transparent substrate and the coating composition for forming the coating layer. Is preferred.
[0188] また、色素の濃度は、色素の吸収波長'吸収係数、透光性電磁波シールド膜に要 求される透過特性'透過率、そして分散させる媒体または塗膜の種類'厚さから適宜 設定することができる。  [0188] The concentration of the dye is appropriately set based on the absorption wavelength of the dye, the absorption coefficient, the transmission characteristics required for the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, the transmittance, and the type of the medium or coating film to be dispersed. can do.
機能性フィルムに色素を含有させる場合、透明基材の内部に含有していてもよいし 、基材表面に色素を含有する層をコーティングしてもよい。また、異なる吸収波長を 有する色素 2種類以上を混合して一つの層中に含有させてもよ ヽし、色素を含有す る層を 2層以上有して 、てもよ 、。  When the functional film contains a pigment, it may be contained inside the transparent substrate, or a layer containing the pigment may be coated on the surface of the substrate. Further, two or more kinds of dyes having different absorption wavelengths may be mixed and contained in one layer, or two or more layers containing dyes may be provided.
[0189] また、色素は金属との接触によっても劣化する場合があるため、このような色素を用 いる場合、色素を含有する機能性フィルムは、色素を含有する層が透光性電磁波シ 一ルド膜上の導電性金属部と接触しな 、ように配置することが更に好ま 、。  [0189] In addition, since the dye may be deteriorated by contact with a metal, when such a dye is used, the functional film containing the dye has a layer containing the light transmitting electromagnetic wave shield. More preferably, it is arranged so that it does not come into contact with the conductive metal part on the metal film.
[0190] 機能性フィルムを貼付した透光性電磁波シールド膜をディスプレイに装着する際に は、通常、機能性フィルムが外側、接着剤層がディスプレイ側となるように装着する。 ここで、透光性電磁波シールド膜の電磁波シールド能が低下させないために、導電 性金属部にアースをとることが望ましい。このため、透光性電磁波シールド膜上にァ ースをとるための導通部を形成し、この導通部がディスプレイ本体のアース部に電気 的に接触するようにすることが望ましい。導通部は、透光性電磁波シールド膜の周縁 部に沿って導電性金属部の周りに設けられて ヽることが好適である。  [0190] When the translucent electromagnetic shielding film with the functional film attached is attached to the display, it is usually attached so that the functional film is on the outside and the adhesive layer is on the display side. Here, it is desirable to ground the conductive metal part so that the electromagnetic wave shielding ability of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film does not deteriorate. For this reason, it is desirable to form a conductive portion for grounding on the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and to make the conductive portion electrically contact the ground portion of the display body. The conducting part is preferably provided around the conductive metal part along the peripheral edge of the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film.
導通部はメッシュパターンにより形成されて 、てもよ 、し、パターユングされて!/、な い、例えば金属箔ベタにより形成されていてもよいが、ディスプレイ本体のアース部と の電気的接触を良好とする為には、金属箔ベタのようにパターユングされていないこ とが好ましい。  The conductive portion may be formed of a mesh pattern, or may be patterned! /, For example, may be formed of a solid metal foil, but may be in electrical contact with the ground portion of the display body. In order to improve the quality, it is preferable that the metal foil is not patterned like a solid metal foil.
[0191] 導通部はメッシュパターン層であっても、パターユングされていない、例えば金属箔 ベタの層であってもよ 、が、ディスプレイ本体のアース部との電気的接触を良好とす る為には、金属箔ベタ層のようにパターユングされて ヽな 、導通部であることが好まし い。 [0192] 導通部が、例えば金属箔ベタのようにパターユングされていない場合、および Zま たは、導通部の機械的強度が十分強い場合は、導通部そのままを電極として使用で きて好適である。 [0191] Although the conductive part may be a mesh pattern layer or not patterned, for example, a solid layer of metal foil, the electrical connection with the ground part of the display body is good. For this, it is preferable that the conductive portion be patterned like a metal foil solid layer. [0192] For example, when the conductive part is not patterned like a solid metal foil, and when Z or the mechanical strength of the conductive part is sufficiently strong, the conductive part itself can be used as an electrode. It is.
[0193] 導通部の保護のため、および Zまたは、導通部がメッシュパターン層である場合に アース部との電気的接触を良好とするために、導通部に電極を形成することが好まし い場合がある。電極形状は特に限定しないが、導通部をすベて覆うように形成されて いる事が好適である。  [0193] It is preferable to form an electrode on the conducting part to protect the conducting part and to make good electrical contact with the grounding part when Z or the conducting part is a mesh pattern layer. There is a case. The shape of the electrode is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the electrode is formed so as to cover all the conductive portions.
電極に用いる材料は、導電性、耐触性および透明導電膜との密着性等の点から、 銀、銅、ニッケル、アルミニウム、クロム、鉄、亜鉛、カーボン等の単体もしくは 2種以 上からなる合金や、合成樹脂とこれら単体または合金の混合物、もしくは、ホウケィ酸 ガラスとこれら単体または合金の混合物力もなるペーストを使用できる。ペーストの印 刷、塗工には従来公知の方法を採用できる。また市販の導電性テープも好適に使用 できる。導電性テープは両面ともに導電性を有するものであって、カーボン分散の導 電性接着剤を用いた片面接着タイプ、両面接着タイプが好適に使用できる。電極の 厚さは、これもまた特に限定されるものではないが、数/ z m〜数 mm程度である。  The material used for the electrode is composed of a single substance or two or more of silver, copper, nickel, aluminum, chromium, iron, zinc, carbon, etc. in terms of conductivity, contact resistance and adhesion to the transparent conductive film. An alloy, a synthetic resin and a single substance or a mixture of these alloys, or a paste that also has a mixture force between a borosilicate glass and these single substances or an alloy can be used. Conventionally known methods can be employed for printing and coating the paste. Commercially available conductive tape can also be suitably used. The conductive tape is conductive on both sides, and a single-sided adhesive type and a double-sided adhesive type using a carbon-dispersed conductive adhesive can be suitably used. The thickness of the electrode is also not particularly limited, but is about several / zm to several mm.
[0194] 本発明によれば、プラズマディスプレイの輝度を著しく損なわずに、その画質を維 持または向上させることができる、光学特性に優れた光学フィルターを得ることが出 来る。また、プラズマディスプレイ力も発生する健康に害をなす可能性があることを指 摘されている電磁波を遮断する電磁波シールド能に優れ、さらに、プラズマディスプ レイカも放射される 800〜1000nm付近の近赤外線線を効率よくカットするため、周 辺電子機器のリモコン、伝送系光通信等が使用する波長に悪影響を与えず、それら の誤動作を防ぐことができる光学フィルターを得ることができる。さらにまた、耐候性に も優れた光学フィルターを低コストで提供することが出来る。  [0194] According to the present invention, it is possible to obtain an optical filter having excellent optical characteristics that can maintain or improve the image quality without significantly impairing the luminance of the plasma display. In addition, it has excellent electromagnetic shielding ability to block electromagnetic waves that have been pointed out to be harmful to the health of the plasma display, and near infrared rays near 800 to 1000 nm are also emitted from the plasma display. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an optical filter that does not adversely affect the wavelengths used by the remote control of peripheral electronic devices, transmission optical communication, etc., and can prevent malfunctions thereof. Furthermore, an optical filter having excellent weather resistance can be provided at a low cost.
実施例  Example
[0195] 以下に実施例と比較例を挙げて本発明の特徴をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の 実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸 脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具 体例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。 [0196] 〔実施例 1〕 [0195] The features of the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples and comparative examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as being limited by the following specific examples. [Example 1]
(乳剤 Aの調整)  (Emulsion A adjustment)
•1液  • 1 liquid
水 750ml  750ml of water
ゼラチン 20g  Gelatin 20g
塩化ナトリウム 1. 6g  Sodium chloride 1.6 g
1, 3 ジメチルイミダゾリジン 2 チオン 20mg  1,3 Dimethylimidazolidine 2 Thion 20mg
ベンゼンチォスルホン酸ナトリウム lOmg  Sodium benzenethiosulfonate lOmg
クェン酸 0. 7g  Chenic acid 0.7 g
•2液  • 2 liquids
水 300ml  300ml water
硝酸銀 150g  Silver nitrate 150g
•3液  • 3 liquids
水 300ml  300ml water
塩化ナトリウム 38g  Sodium chloride 38g
臭化カリウム 32g  Potassium bromide 32g
へキサクロ口イリジウム (III)酸カリウム (0.005% KC1 20%水溶液) 5ml  Hexaclomouth Iridium Potassium (III) (0.005% KC1 20% aqueous solution) 5ml
へキサクロ口ロジウム酸アンモ-ゥム (0.001% NaCl 20%水溶液) 7ml 3液に用いるへキサクロ口イリジウム (III)酸カリウム (0.005% KC1 20%水溶液)および へキサクロ口ロジウム酸アンモ-ゥム (0.001% NaC120%水溶液)は、粉末をそれぞれ K C1 20%水溶液、 NaC120%水溶液に溶解し、 40°Cで 120分間加熱して調製した。  Hexaclo oral rhodate ammonium (0.001% NaCl 20% aqueous solution) 7ml Potassium hexaloiridium (III) (0.005% KC1 20% aqueous solution) and hexachloro oral rhodate ammonium 0.001% NaC120% aqueous solution) was prepared by dissolving the powder in KC1 20% aqueous solution and NaC120% aqueous solution, respectively, and heating at 40 ° C. for 120 minutes.
[0197] 38°C、 pH4. 5に保たれた 1液に、 2液と 3液の各々 90%に相当する量を攪拌しな 力 Sら同時に 20分間にわたってカロえ、 0. 15 mの核粒子を形成した。続いて下記 4 液、 5液を 8分間にわたって加え、さらに、 2液と 3液の残りの 10%の量を 2分間にわ たって加え、 0. 18 mまで粒子を成長させた。さら〖こ、ヨウィ匕カリウム 0. 15gを加え 5 分間熟成し粒子形成を終了した。 [0197] In 1 liquid kept at 38 ° C and pH 4.5, the amount corresponding to 90% of 2 and 3 liquids was not stirred. Nuclear particles were formed. Subsequently, the following 4 and 5 solutions were added over 8 minutes, and the remaining 10% of the 2 and 3 solutions were added over 2 minutes to grow particles to 0.18 m. Then, 0.15 g of Sarako and Yowi Potassium was added and ripened for 5 minutes to complete the grain formation.
[0198] ·4液 [0198] · 4 liquids
水 100ml 硝酸銀 50g 100ml water Silver nitrate 50g
•5液  • 5 liquids
水 100ml  100ml water
塩化ナトリウム 13g  Sodium chloride 13g
臭化カリウム l lg  Potassium bromide l lg
黄血 5mg  Yellow blood 5mg
[0199] その後、常法にしたがってフロキユレーシヨン法によって水洗した。具体的には、温 度を 35°Cに下げ、下記に示すァ-オン性沈降剤 1を 3g加え、硫酸を用いてハロゲ ン化銀が沈降するまで pHを下げた (pH3. 2±0. 2の範囲であった)。次に上澄み液 を約 3リットル除去した (第一水洗)。さらに 3リットルの蒸留水を加えてから、ハロゲン 化銀が沈降するまで硫酸を加えた。再度上澄み液を 3リットル除去した (第二水洗)。 第二水洗と同じ操作をさらに 1回繰り返し (第三水洗)て水洗'脱塩行程を終了した。 水洗'脱塩後の乳剤にゼラチン 8gをカ卩え、 pH5. 6、 pAg7. 5に調整し、ベンゼンチ ォスルホン酸ナトリウム 10mg、ベンゼンチォスルフィン酸ナトリウム 3mg、チォ硫酸ナ トリウム 15mgと塩ィ匕金酸 10mgをカ卩ぇ 55°Cにて最適感度を得るように化学増感を施 し、安定剤として l,3,3a,7-テトラァザインデン 100mg、防腐剤としてプロキセル (商品 名、 ICI Co. , Ltd.製) lOOmgを加えた。最終的に塩化銀を 70モル%、沃化銀を 0. 08モル%含む平均粒子径 0. 18 ^ m,変動係数 9%のヨウ塩臭化銀立方体粒子乳 剤を得た (最終的に乳剤として、 pH = 5. 7、 pAg = 7. 5、電導度 = 60 /ζ 3/πι、密度 = 1. 28 X 103kg/m3、粘度 = 60mPa' sとなった。 )。 [0199] After that, it was washed with water by a floating method according to a conventional method. Specifically, the temperature was lowered to 35 ° C, 3 g of the ionic precipitation agent 1 shown below was added, and the pH was lowered using sulfuric acid until silver halide precipitated (pH 3.2 ± 0). Range of 2). Next, about 3 liters of the supernatant was removed (first water washing). After adding 3 liters of distilled water, sulfuric acid was added until the silver halide settled. Again 3 liters of the supernatant was removed (second water wash). The same operation as the second washing was repeated once more (third washing) to complete the washing and desalting process. After washing and desalting, 8g of gelatin was added to the emulsion, adjusted to pH 5.6, pAg 7.5, sodium benzenethiosulfonate 10mg, sodium benzenethiosulfinate 3mg, sodium thiosulfate 15mg Chemical sensitization to obtain optimum sensitivity at 10 ° C at 55 ° C, l, 3,3a, 7-tetraazaindene as a stabilizer, 100 mg, and proxel as a preservative (trade name, ICI Co , Ltd.) lOOmg was added. Finally, a silver iodochlorobromide cubic emulsion containing 70 mol% silver chloride and 0.08 mol% silver iodide with an average grain size of 0.18 ^ m and a coefficient of variation of 9% was obtained (finally) As an emulsion, pH = 5.7, pAg = 7.5, conductivity = 60 / ζ 3 / πι, density = 1.28 × 10 3 kg / m 3 , and viscosity = 60 mPa ′s.
[0200] [化 4] ァニオン性沈降剤— 1  [0200] [Chemical 4] Anionic precipitant— 1
Figure imgf000073_0001
¥均分子量 1 2万
Figure imgf000073_0001
¥ Molecular weight 1 20,000
[0201] (試料 1—1の作製) 下記に示す両面が塩ィ匕ビ二リデンを含む防湿層下塗りからなるポリエチレンテレフ タレートフィルム支持体上に、 UL層 Z乳剤層の構成となるように塗布して試料 1—1 を作製した。以下に各層の調製方法、塗布量および塗布方法を示す。 [0201] (Preparation of Sample 1-1) Sample 1-1 was prepared by coating on a polyethylene terephthalate film support consisting of a moisture-proof undercoat containing both sides of the polyvinylidene chloride shown below so as to form the UL layer Z emulsion layer. The preparation method, coating amount and coating method of each layer are shown below.
<乳剤層 >  <Emulsion layer>
乳剤 Aに増感色素(sd-1) 5.7 X 10— 4モル Zモル Agを加えて分光増感を施した。さら に KBr3.4 X 10— 4モル Zモル Ag、化合物(Cpd- 3) 8.0 X 10— 4モル Zモル Agをカロえ、 良く混合した。 It was subjected to spectral sensitization by adding the sensitizing dye (sd-1) 5.7 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag to the emulsion A. Further to KBr3.4 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag, the compound (Cpd- 3) 8.0 X 10- 4 mole Z mol Ag Karoe, and mixed well.
次いで 1,3,3a, 7-テトラァザインデン 1.2 X 10— 4モル/モル Ag、ノヽイドロキノン 1.2 X 10 2モル Zモル Ag、クェン酸 3.0 X 10— 4モル/モル Ag、界面活性剤 (Sa-1)、(Sa- 2)、 (Sa - 3)を各々塗布量が 60mg/m2、 40mg/m2、 2mg/m2になるように添カ卩し、クェン酸を用い て塗布液 pHを 5.6に調整した。このようにして調製した乳剤層塗布液を下記支持体上 にに AAgg77.. 66gg/m2、ゼラチン 1. lg/m2になるように塗布した Then 1,3,3a, 7- tetra § tetrazaindene 1.2 X 10- 4 mol / mol Ag, Nono Idorokinon 1.2 X 10 2 moles Z mol Ag, Kuen acid 3.0 X 10- 4 mol / mol Ag, surfactants ( Add Sa-1), (Sa-2), and (Sa-3) to 60mg / m 2 , 40mg / m 2 , 2mg / m 2 respectively and apply with citrate. Solution pH was adjusted to 5.6. AAgg77 this way the emulsion layer coating liquid prepared by the on following support .. 66gg / m 2, was coated to a gelatin 1. lg / m 2
[0202] <UL層 > [0202] <UL layer>
ゼラチン 0. 23g/m  Gelatin 0.23g / m
化合物 (Cpd-7) 40mg/m2 Compound (Cpd-7) 40mg / m 2
化合物 (Cpd- 14) 10mg/m2 Compound (Cpd-14) 10mg / m 2
防腐剤(プロキセル) 1. 5mg/m2 Preservative (Proxel) 1.5mg / m 2
[0203] なお、各層の塗布液は、下記構造 (Z)で表される増粘剤を加え、粘度調整した [0204] [化 5] [0203] The coating solution for each layer was adjusted for viscosity by adding a thickener represented by the following structure (Z). [0204]
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
[0205] <支持体 > [0205] <Support>
三酸ィ匕アンチモンを主触媒として重縮合した固有粘度 0. 66のポリエチレンテレフタ レート榭脂を含水率 50ppm以下に乾燥させ、ヒーター温度が 280〜300°C設定の 押し出し機内で溶融させた。 溶融させた PET榭脂をダイ部より静電印加されたチルロール上に吐出させ、非結 晶ベースを得る。得られた非結晶ベースをベース進行方向に 3. 1倍に延伸後、巾方 向に 3. 9倍に延伸し、厚さ 96 mの支持体をロール形態で製造した。 Polyethylene terephthalate resin having an inherent viscosity of 0.66, which was polycondensed using antimony trioxide and antimony as the main catalyst, was dried to a water content of 50 ppm or less and melted in an extruder set at a heater temperature of 280 to 300 ° C. The molten PET resin is discharged from a die part onto a chill roll that is electrostatically applied to obtain a non-crystalline base. The obtained amorphous base was stretched 3.1 times in the direction of base travel and then 3.9 times in the width direction to produce a 96 m thick support in roll form.
[0206] <バック層(乳剤層と支持体をはさんで逆側に位置する易接着層) > [0206] <Back layer (easy-adhesive layer located on the opposite side of the emulsion layer and support)>
本発明で使用した試料は下記組成の塗布液を下記塗布条件にて、逐次、塗工、乾 燥し、下記バック層(易接着層)を形成した。  In the sample used in the present invention, a coating solution having the following composition was successively applied and dried under the following coating conditions to form the following back layer (easy adhesion layer).
二軸延伸した上記ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体を、搬送速度 105mZ分条件 で搬送した状態で、該支持体表面を印加工ネルギー 727jZm2条件でコロナ放電処 理を行ったのち、下記組成力もなる帯電防止層用塗布液を塗布量、 7. lccZm2で バーコート法により塗布した。続いてエアー浮上乾燥ゾーンで 180°C1分乾燥するこ とで帯電防止層を得た。 After the biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate support was transported at a transport speed of 105 mZ, the surface of the support was subjected to corona discharge treatment under printing energy 727 jZm 2 conditions, and then the antistatic layer having the following compositional power. the use coating liquid application amount was applied by bar coating method at 7. lccZm 2. Subsequently, an antistatic layer was obtained by drying at 180 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
[0207] (1層目塗布液 (帯電防止層用)) [0207] (First-layer coating solution (for antistatic layer))
蒸留水 781.7質量部  Distilled water 781.7 parts by mass
ポリアクリル榭脂(ジユリマー ET- 410:日本純薬製、固形分 30%) 30.9質量部 針状構造酸化スズ粒子 (FS-10D :石原産業製、固形分 20%) 131.1質量部 カルポジイミドィ匕合物 (カルポジライト V-02- L2:日清紡製、固形分 40%) 6.4質量部 界面活性剤 (サンデット BL:三洋化成工業製 固形分 44.6%) 1.4質量部 界面活性剤けロアクティー HN-100 :三洋化成工業製 固形分 100%) 0.7質量部 シリカ微粒子分散液 (シーホスター KE-W30:日本触媒製 0.3 μ m固形分 20%) 5.0質 量部  Polyacrylic resin (Jiurimer ET-410: Nippon Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., solid content 30%) 30.9 parts by mass Needle-shaped tin oxide particles (FS-10D: Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., solid content 20%) 131.1 parts by mass Carposiimide compound (Carpolite V-02- L2: Nisshinbo, solid content 40%) 6.4 parts by mass Surfactant (Sandet BL: Sanyo Chemical Industries solid content 44.6%) 1.4 parts by mass Surfactant surfactant HN-100: Sanyo Chemical Industrial solids 100%) 0.7 parts by weight Silica fine particle dispersion (Seahoster KE-W30: Nippon Shokubai 0.3 μm solids 20%) 5.0 parts by weight
[0208] 搬送速度 105mZ分を保ったまま、上記帯電防止層上に、引き続き、下記組成から なる表面層用塗布液をバーコート法により塗布量 5. 05ccZm2で塗布した。続いて エアー浮上乾燥ゾーンで 160°C1分乾燥することで 2層構成のバック層を得た。 [0208] While maintaining the conveyance speed of 105 mZ, a coating solution for the surface layer having the following composition was applied on the antistatic layer at a coating amount of 5.05 ccZm 2 by the bar coating method. Subsequently, a back layer having a two-layer structure was obtained by drying at 160 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
[0209] (2層目塗布液 (表面層用))  [0209] (Second-layer coating solution (for surface layer))
蒸留水 941.0質量部  941.0 parts by mass of distilled water
ポリアクリル榭脂(ジユリマー ET- 410:日本純薬製、固形分 30%) 57.3質量部 エポキシィ匕合物 (デナコール EX-521:ナガセ化成工業製、固形分 100%) 1.2質 界面活性剤 (サンデット BL:三洋化成工業製 固形分 44.6%) 0.5質量部 Polyacrylic resin (Julimer ET-410: Nippon Pure Chemicals, solid content 30%) 57.3 parts by weight Epoxy compound (Denacol EX-521: Nagase Chemicals, solid content 100%) 1.2 quality Surfactant (Sandet BL: Sanyo Chemical Industries solids 44.6%) 0.5 parts by mass
[0210] <下塗層 >  [0210] <Undercoat layer>
上記ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体のバック層を形成する面とは反対面に、下記 組成の下塗塗布液を、バック層塗工時に同時塗工することで、乳剤層用の下塗り層 とした。 即ち、搬送速度 105mZ分条件で搬送した状態で、該支持体の反対面表 面を 467jZm2条件でコロナ放電処理を行い、下記組成からなる下塗層 1層目用塗 布液をバーコート法により塗布した。塗布量は、 5.05ccZm2とし、バック層帯電防止 層乾燥ゾーンと同じ、エアー浮上乾燥ゾーンで 180°C1分乾燥することで下塗り層 1 層目を得た。 An undercoat coating solution having the following composition was simultaneously applied to the surface of the polyethylene terephthalate support opposite to the surface on which the back layer was formed, thereby forming an undercoat layer for the emulsion layer. That is, in the state where the substrate was conveyed at a conveyance speed of 105 mZ, the opposite surface of the support was subjected to corona discharge treatment under 467 jZm 2 conditions, and the coating solution for the first subbing layer having the following composition was applied by the bar coating method. It applied by. The coating amount was 5.05 ccZm 2, and the first undercoat layer was obtained by drying at 180 ° C. for 1 minute in the air flotation drying zone, the same as the back layer antistatic layer drying zone.
[0211] <下塗層 1層目 > [0211] <Undercoat layer 1st layer>
蒸留水 823.0質量部  Distilled water 823.0 parts by mass
スチレン ブタジエン共重合体ラテックス  Styrene Butadiene copolymer latex
(Nipol Latex LX407C5 :日本ゼオン製 固形分 40%) 151.5質量部 2,4—ジクロロ一 6 ヒドロキシ一 s トリァジンナトリウム塩  (Nipol Latex LX407C5: ZEON Corporation solid content 40%) 151.5 parts by mass 2,4-dichloro-6-hydroxy-1-s-triazine sodium salt
(H-232 :三協化学製 固形分 8%) 25.0質量部  (H-232: Sankyo Chemical, solid content 8%) 25.0 parts by mass
ポリスチレン微粒子(平均粒径 2 μ )  Polystyrene fine particles (average particle size 2μ)
(Nipol UFN1008 :日本ゼオン製 固形分 10%) 0.5質量部  (Nipol UFN1008: Nippon Zeon solid content 10%) 0.5 parts by mass
[0212] 搬送速度 105mZ分を保ったまま、上記下塗層 1層目上に、引き続き、下記組成か らなる塗布液をバーコート法により塗布した。塗布量は、 8.7cc/m2とし、エアー浮 上乾燥ゾーンで 160°C1分乾燥することで下塗り層 2層目を得た。 [0212] With the conveying speed maintained at 105 mZ, a coating solution having the following composition was subsequently applied onto the first undercoat layer by the bar coating method. The coating amount was 8.7 cc / m 2, and a second undercoat layer was obtained by drying at 160 ° C. for 1 minute in an air flotation drying zone.
[0213] <下塗層第 2層 > [0213] <2nd subbing layer>
蒸留水 980.5質量部  980.5 parts by weight of distilled water
ゼラチン (アルカリ処理) 14.8質量部  Gelatin (alkali treatment) 14.8 parts by mass
メチルセルロース (TC-5:信越化学工業製) 0.46質量部  Methylcellulose (TC-5: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) 0.46 parts by mass
化合物(Cpd-21) 0.33質量部  Compound (Cpd-21) 0.33 parts by mass
プロキセル (Cpd-22固形分 3.5%) 2.0質量部  Proxel (Cpd-22 solid content 3.5%) 2.0 parts by mass
[0214] [化 6] (Sa-1)
Figure imgf000077_0001
[0214] [Chemical 6] (Sa-1)
Figure imgf000077_0001
(Sa-2) c2H5 (Sa-2) c 2 H 5
CH2—CO— O- CH2— CH— C4H9 CH 2 —CO— O- CH 2 — CH— C 4 H 9
Na · HO3S-CH— CO-0-CH2-CH-C4H9 Na · HO3S-CH— CO-0-CH 2 -CH-C 4 H 9
40m g/m2 40 mg / m 2
(Sa-3)  (Sa-3)
F3C^CF2^CH2)-0-CO-CH2-CH-CO-0-{CH2 r- CF2-}-CF3 F 3 C ^ CF 2 ^ CH 2 ) -0-CO-CH2-CH-CO-0- {CH 2 r- CF 2 -}-CF3
CH2 CH 2
2mg/m2 S03H ■ Na 2mg / m 2 S0 3 H ■ Na
[0215] [化 7] [0215] [Chemical 7]
5D-1 5D-1
0^ έ H [ 0 ^ έ H
¾d'3
Figure imgf000077_0002
¾d'3
Figure imgf000077_0002
Figure imgf000077_0003
Figure imgf000077_0003
[0216] [化 8] [0216] [Chemical 8]
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
[0217] [化 9] 化合物 (Cpd- 21) [0217] [Chemical 9] Compound (Cpd-21)
Figure imgf000078_0002
Figure imgf000078_0002
[0218] [化 10] 化合物 ( Cpd-22 ) [0218] [Chemical 10] Compound (Cpd-22)
Figure imgf000078_0003
Figure imgf000078_0003
[0219] <塗布方法 > [0219] <Application method>
上記下塗層を施した支持体上に、まず乳剤面側として支持体に近い側より UL層、 乳剤層の順に 2層を、 35°Cに保ちながらスライドビードコーター方式により同時重層 塗布し、冷風セットゾーン(5°C)を通過させた。ここで、硬膜剤である Cpd-7は塗布直 前に UL層へ前述の量添加し、 UL層から拡散させることにより乳剤層へ含有させた。 そして、乳剤面とは反対側には、上記のようにバック層を形成し、最後に冷風セットゾ ーン(5°C)を通過させた。各々のセットゾーンを通過した時点では、塗布液は充分な セット性を示した。引き続き乾燥ゾーンにて両面を同時に乾燥した。 On the support with the above subbing layer, first apply two layers in the order of the emulsion layer side, the UL layer and the emulsion layer, from the side close to the support, in the order of simultaneous overlay using the slide bead coater method while maintaining the temperature at 35 ° C. A cold air set zone (5 ° C) was passed. Here, Cpd-7 as a hardener was added to the UL layer immediately before coating, and was added to the emulsion layer by diffusing from the UL layer. A back layer was formed on the side opposite to the emulsion surface as described above, and finally a cold air set zone (5 ° C) was passed. When passing through each set zone, the coating solution is sufficient The set property was shown. Subsequently, both sides were simultaneously dried in the drying zone.
[0220] 得られた試料 1 1は、塗布銀量が 7.6g/m2、乳剤層の Ag/ゼラチン質量比が 6.9、 膨潤率が 209%、 Ag/ゼラチン質量比と膨潤率の積が 13.2である乳剤層を、最上層 に有する感光材料であった。ここで乳剤層の膨潤率は以下のように求めた。すなわち 、乾燥時の試料の切片を走査型電子顕微鏡で観察することにより乾燥時の乳剤層の 膜厚 (a)を求め、 25°Cの蒸留水に 1分間浸潰した後液体窒素により凍結乾燥した試 料の切片を走査型電子顕微鏡で観察することにより膨潤時の乳剤層の膜厚 (b)を求 め、膨潤率を次式で算出した。 [0220] The obtained Sample 11 had an applied silver amount of 7.6 g / m 2 , an Ag / gelatin mass ratio of the emulsion layer of 6.9, a swelling ratio of 209%, and a product of Ag / gelatin mass ratio and swelling ratio of 13.2. It was a photosensitive material having an emulsion layer as the uppermost layer. Here, the swelling ratio of the emulsion layer was determined as follows. That is, by observing a section of the dried sample with a scanning electron microscope, the thickness (a) of the emulsion layer at the time of drying is obtained, immersed in distilled water at 25 ° C for 1 minute, and then freeze-dried with liquid nitrogen. By observing the slice of the sample with a scanning electron microscope, the film thickness (b) of the emulsion layer during swelling was determined, and the swelling ratio was calculated by the following equation.
膨潤率 (%) = 100 X ( (b)—(a) ) / (a)  Swell rate (%) = 100 X ((b) — (a)) / (a)
[0221] (露光'現像処理)  [0221] (Exposure 'development process)
乾燥させた試料の乳剤層上にライン Zスペース = 15 μ m/285 m (ピッチ 300 μ m)の現像銀像を与えうる格子状のパターンを、大日本スクリーン (株)製のイメージ セッター FT-R5055を使用して露光した。このとき露光量は各試料に合わせて最適と なるよう調節した。  A grid-like pattern that can give a developed silver image of line Z space = 15 μm / 285 m (pitch 300 μm) on the emulsion layer of the dried sample is an image setter FT- manufactured by Dainippon Screen Co., Ltd. Exposed using R5055. At this time, the exposure amount was adjusted to be optimal for each sample.
露光後の試料に対し、続いて現像処理を施し、金属銀部を作成した。  The exposed sample was subsequently subjected to development processing to create a metallic silver part.
[0222] ·現像処理  [0222] · Development processing
処理工程 温 度 時 間  Treatment process Temperature Time
黒白現像 20°C 60秒  Black and white development 20 ° C 60 seconds
定着 35°C 40秒  Fixing 35 ° C 40 seconds
リンス 1* 35°C 60秒  Rinse 1 * 35 ° C 60 seconds
リンス 2* 35°C 60秒  Rinse 2 * 35 ° C 60 seconds
乾 燥 50°C 60秒  Drying 50 ° C 60 seconds
[0223] また、試料の 1つには、電解めつき処理を施した c [0223] In addition, one of the samples was subjected to electroplating c
'めっき処理  'Plating treatment
酸洗浄 35°C 30秒  Acid cleaning 35 ° C 30 seconds
電解めつき 1 35°C 30秒  Electrolytic plating 1 35 ° C 30 seconds
電解めつき 2 35°C 30秒  Electrolytic plating 2 35 ° C 30 seconds
電解めつき 3 35°C 30秒 電解めつき 4 35°C 30秒 Electrolytic plating 3 35 ° C 30 seconds Electrolytic plating 4 35 ° C 30 seconds
リンス 3* 35°C 10秒  Rinse 3 * 35 ° C 10 seconds
リンス 4* 35°C 10秒  Rinse 4 * 35 ° C 10 seconds
防鲭液 35°C 30秒  Antifungal liquid 35 ° C 30 seconds
リンス 5* 25°C 60秒  Rinse 5 * 25 ° C 60 seconds
リンス 6* 25°C 60秒  Rinse 6 * 25 ° C 60 seconds
乾 燥 50°C 60秒  Drying 50 ° C 60 seconds
* 水洗過程は、リンス 2力ら 1、リンス 4力ら 3、リンス 6から 5への 2タンク向流方式と した。  * The water washing process was a two-tank counter-flow system with two rinses, 1, four rinses, and three rinses from 6 to 5.
[0224] 各処理液の組成は以下の通りである。  [0224] The composition of each treatment solution is as follows.
〔黒白現像液 1L処方〕  [Black and white developer 1L prescription]
ハイドロキノン 20 g  Hydroquinone 20 g
亜硫酸ナトリウム 50 g  Sodium sulfite 50 g
炭酸カリウム 40 g  Potassium carbonate 40 g
エチレンジァミン'四酢酸 2 g  Ethylenediamine 'tetraacetic acid 2 g
臭化カリウム 3 g  Potassium bromide 3 g
ポジエチレング IJn—ノレ 2000 1 g  Posiethylene IJn—Nore 2000 1 g
水酸化カリウム 4 g  Potassium hydroxide 4 g
pH 10. 3に調整  Adjust to pH 10.3
[0225] 〔定着液 1L処方〕  [0225] Fixer 1L prescription
ATS 1. 2 モル  ATS 1.2 mol
沃化アンモニゥム 5 g  Ammonium iodide 5 g
亜硫酸アンモ-ゥム · 1水塩 25 g  Ammonium sulfite monohydrate 25 g
酢酸 5 g  Acetic acid 5 g
アンモニア水(27%) 1 g  Ammonia water (27%) 1 g
pH 6. 2に調整  Adjust to pH 6.2
[0226] 〔酸洗浄液 1L処方〕  [0226] [Acid cleaning solution 1L formulation]
硫酸 190 g 塩酸(35%) 0. 06 mL 190 g of sulfuric acid Hydrochloric acid (35%) 0.06 mL
力バーグリーム PCM 5 mL  Power Bergream PCM 5 mL
(ローム.アンド.ハース電子材料 (株)製)  (Rohm and Haas Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.)
純水を加えて 1 L  1 L with pure water
[0227] 〔電解めつき液 1L処方〕  [0227] [Electrolytic plating solution 1L prescription]
•電解銅めつき液組成 (補充液も同組成)  • Electrolytic copper plating solution composition (same replenisher composition)
硫酸銅五水塩 75 g  Copper sulfate pentahydrate 75 g
硫酸 190 g  190 g of sulfuric acid
塩酸(35%) 0. 06 mL  Hydrochloric acid (35%) 0.06 mL
力バーグリーム PCM 5 mL  Power Bergream PCM 5 mL
(ローム.アンド.ハース電子材料 (株)製)  (Rohm and Haas Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.)
純水を加えて 1 L  1 L with pure water
[0228] 〔防鲭液〕  [0228] Antifungal Liquid
ベンゾトリアゾールの 0.01モル/ L水溶液を用いた。  A 0.01 mol / L aqueous solution of benzotriazole was used.
[0229] 〔リンス液 1L処方(リンス 1〜6は共通)〕 [0229] [Rinse 1L prescription (Rinse 1-6 are common)]
脱イオン水(導電率 5 SZcm以下) 1000 mL  Deionized water (conductivity 5 SZcm or less) 1000 mL
pH 6. 5に調製  Adjust to pH 6.5
[0230] なお、黒白現像液の酸化還元電位は、回転白金電極を現像液中に浸漬して求め た浸浴電位で表示すると— 340mVvsSCEであった。  [0230] The oxidation-reduction potential of the black-and-white developer was 340 mVvs SCE, expressed as the bath potential obtained by immersing the rotating platinum electrode in the developer.
[0231] (他の試料の作成) [0231] (Preparation of other samples)
表 1に示すように、乳剤のバインダーに使用するゼラチン (Gel)量を変更することで 表 1に示す試料を作成した。また、めっき処理を行わない試料、現像処理後に還元 処理を行った試料、カレンダー処理を行った試料を作成した。  As shown in Table 1, samples shown in Table 1 were prepared by changing the amount of gelatin (Gel) used in the binder of the emulsion. Samples that were not plated, samples that were reduced after development, and samples that were calendered were prepared.
還元処理は、ソジゥム トリァセトキシボロハイドライドの 0.01モル/ L水溶液で 5分間 処理することで行った。またカレンダー処理は、カレンダーロールにて線圧力 2940N /cm (300kg/cm)をかけて、 2対の金属製ロール力も成るカレンダーローラー間に試 料を通すことで行った。  The reduction treatment was performed by treatment with a 0.01 mol / L aqueous solution of sodium triacetoxyborohydride for 5 minutes. The calendering process was performed by applying a linear pressure of 2940 N / cm (300 kg / cm) with a calender roll and passing the sample between calender rollers with two pairs of metal roll forces.
[0232] 各試料に上記の露光、現像処理を行い、導電性金属部および金属が実質的に存 在しな 、光透過部カゝらなる透光性電磁波シールド膜が形成された。ここで導電性金 属部は露光パターンに応じたメッシュ状パターンを呈しており、ライン Zスペース幅は いずれの試料においても 15 μ m/285 μ mであった。またいずれの試料においても 、光透過部の開口率は約 90%であった。 [0232] Each sample was subjected to the exposure and development processes described above, so that the conductive metal portion and the metal were substantially present. However, a light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film was formed as a light transmitting part. Here, the conductive metal part exhibited a mesh pattern corresponding to the exposure pattern, and the line Z space width was 15 μm / 285 μm in all samples. In all samples, the aperture ratio of the light transmission part was about 90%.
[0233] (評価) [0233] (Evaluation)
(表面抵抗)  (Surface resistance)
三菱化学 (株)低抵抗率計ロレスター GPZASPプローブを用いて表面抵抗率を測 し 7こ。  Low resistivity meter Lorestar, Mitsubishi Chemical Corp. Measuring surface resistivity using GPZASP probe 7 pieces.
(カプリの評価)  (Evaluation of Capri)
各試料を未露光のまま現像処理を行!ヽ、 目視により各試料上を観察して黒色でス ポット状または線状の現像銀が形成されている力否かを評価した。なお、評価基準は 以下の通りとした。  Each sample is developed without being exposed!ヽ The surface of each sample was visually observed to evaluate whether or not a black spot-like or linear developed silver was formed. The evaluation criteria were as follows.
<カプリの発生頻度の評価基準 (現像後の試料 lm2を観察) > <Evaluation criteria for occurrence frequency of capri (observation of sample lm 2 after development)>
レベル A:黒色スポットまたは線状の現像銀の個数 0〜3個。  Level A: 0 to 3 black spots or linear developed silver.
レベル B:黒色スポットまたは線状の現像銀の個数 4個〜 10個。  Level B: 4 to 10 black spots or linear developed silver.
レベル C:黒色スポットまたは線状の現像銀の個数 10個以上。  Level C: Number of black spots or linear developed silver is 10 or more.
[0234] (断線レベルの評価) [0234] (Evaluation of disconnection level)
各試料を現像処理し、 目視により各試料上を観察してメッシュの断線を評価した。 なお、評価基準は以下の通りとした。  Each sample was developed and visually observed on each sample to evaluate the disconnection of the mesh. The evaluation criteria were as follows.
<かぶりの発生頻度の評価基準 (現像後の試料 lm2を観察) > <Evaluation criteria for occurrence frequency of fog (observed sample lm 2 after development)>
レべノレ A:断線の個数 0〜: LO個。  Revenore A: Number of breaks 0 to: LO.
レベル B :断線の個数 11個以上。  Level B: Number of breaks 11 or more.
レベル C :断線の個数 20個以上。  Level C: Number of disconnections 20 or more.
得られた評価結果を表 1に示す。  The obtained evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
[0235] [表 1] 試料 Ag/Gel 現像処理 めっき 表面抵抗値 断線 カプリ 備 [0235] [Table 1] Sample Ag / Gel Development Plating Surface resistance value Disconnection Capri
NO. 鍾 後の処理 Ω / s q レベル 考  NO. 処理 Processing after Ω / s q level
比)  Ratio)
1-1 1/0. 2 なし なし 0. 8 C B 比較  1-1 1/0. 2 None None 0.8 C B Comparison
 Example
1-2 1/ 1 なし なし 1 3 A A 比較  1-2 1/1 None None 1 3 A A Comparison
 Example
1-3 1/0. 8 なし なし 5 . 2 B A 比較  1-3 1/0. 8 None None 5.2 B A Comparison
 Example
1-4 1/0. 8 還元処理 なし 1 . 6 A A 本 ¾  1-4 1/0. 8 No reduction treatment 1.6 A A ¾
 Light
1-5 1/0. 8 力レンダ なし 1 . 3 A A  1-5 1/0. 8 No power render 1.3 A A
一 参考  One reference
処理 例  Processing example
1-6 1/0. 8 還元処理 なし 0 . 8 A A 本発  1-6 1/0. 8 No reduction treatment 0.8 A A
+カレン 明 ダー処理  + Karen Akira processing
1-7 1/0. 8 還元処理 あり 0 . 3 A A 本発  1-7 1 / 0.8.8 Reduction treatment 0.3 A A
+力レン 明 ダー処理  + Power range
[0236] 実施例 1一 4のソジゥム トリァセトキシボロハイドライド (NaHB (OCOCH ) )に代え [0236] In place of the sodium triacetoxyborohydride (NaHB (OCOCH)) in Example 1-14
3 3 て、ジメチルァミンボラン((CH ) NH BH )又は水素化ホウ素ナトリウム (NaBH )を使  3 3 Using dimethylamine borane ((CH) NH BH) or sodium borohydride (NaBH)
3 2 3 4 用して透光性電磁波シールド膜を製造した。得られた実施例を表 2に示す。  3 2 3 4 was used to produce a translucent electromagnetic shielding film. Examples obtained are shown in Table 2.
[0237] [表 2] [0237] [Table 2]
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
[0238] 表 1、 2の結果から、従来技術に相当する比較例 (試料 1一 1, 1一 3)では、表面抵 抗率の低い即ち電磁波シールド性の高レヽメッシュを得られるものの、断線が激しく力 プリも散見され不十分なものであった。また試料 1—2では、断線およびカプリは良好 であったものの、表面抵抗値が高ぐ電磁波シールド能が不足するという不具合が発 生する。これらに対し、本発明の透光性電磁波シールド膜は表面抵抗率が低ぐしか も断線およびカブリも少な 、ものであった。  [0238] From the results of Tables 1 and 2, in the comparative example corresponding to the prior art (Samples 1-1, 1, 1-3), a high surface mesh with a low surface resistivity, that is, an electromagnetic wave shielding property, can be obtained. However, it was inadequate due to intense power pre-spots. In Samples 1-2, disconnection and capri were good, but there was a problem that the electromagnetic wave shielding ability was insufficient due to high surface resistance. On the other hand, the translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of the present invention had a low surface resistivity and a low disconnection and fogging.
[0239] (光学フィルターの作製)  [0239] (Production of optical filter)
上記実施例 1 (試料 1-7)で得た透光性電磁波シールド能を有するフィルムを用い 外縁部 20mmを除いた内側の透光性電磁波シールド膜上に、厚さ 25 mのアクリル 系透光性粘着材を介して、ガラス板を貼り合わせた。該アクリル系透光性粘着材層中 には光学フィルターの透過特性を調整する調色色素(三井ィ匕学製 PS— Red— G、 P S— Violet— RC)を含有させた。さらに、該ガラス板の反対の主面には、粘着材を介 して近赤外線カット能を有する反射防止フィルム(日本油脂 (株)製商品名リアルック 7 72UV)を貼り合わせ、光学フィルターを作製した。 Using the film having translucent electromagnetic wave shielding ability obtained in Example 1 (Sample 1-7) A glass plate was bonded to the inner light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film excluding the outer edge portion of 20 mm through an acrylic light-transmitting adhesive material having a thickness of 25 m. The acrylic light-transmitting pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contained a toning dye (PS-Red-G, PS-Violet-RC manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) that adjusts the transmission characteristics of the optical filter. Further, an anti-reflection film having a near-infrared cutting ability (trade name Realic 7 72UV manufactured by Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd.) was bonded to the opposite main surface of the glass plate via an adhesive material to produce an optical filter. .
[0240] 得られた光学フィルターをプラズマディスプレイパネルに用いたところ、ディスプレイ 画像が金属色を帯びることがなぐまた、実用上問題ない電磁波遮蔽能及び近赤外 線カット能を有し、反射防止フィルムにより視認性に優れていた。また、色素を含有さ せること〖こよって、調色機能を付与できており、プラズマディスプレイ等の光学フィル ターとして好適に使用できることが分力つた。  [0240] When the obtained optical filter is used in a plasma display panel, the display image does not take on a metallic color, and has an electromagnetic wave shielding ability and a near infrared ray cutting ability that are not problematic in practice, and an antireflection film. It was excellent in visibility. In addition, by adding a pigment, it has been possible to impart a color-adjusting function, and it can be suitably used as an optical filter for plasma displays and the like.
[0241] 本発明を詳細にまた特定の実施態様を参照して説明したが、本発明の精神と範囲 を逸脱することなく様々な変更や修正を加えることができることは当業者にとって明ら かである。  [0241] Although the present invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. is there.
本出願は 2006年 1月 31日出願の日本特許出願(特願 2006— 022948)、 2007 年 1月 30日出願の日本特許出願 (特願 2007— 019747)に基づくものであり、その 内容はここに参照として取り込まれる。  This application is based on a Japanese patent application filed on January 31, 2006 (Japanese Patent Application 2006—0222948) and a Japanese patent application filed on January 30, 2007 (Japanese Patent Application 2007—019747). Incorporated by reference.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 支持体上に銀塩を含有する銀塩乳剤層を有する感光フィルムを露光して現像処理 する現像工程を含む導電性膜の製造方法であって、  [1] A method for producing a conductive film comprising a development step of exposing and developing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support,
さらに、前記感光フィルムの表面に還元剤を接触させる還元処理工程と、 前記感光フィルムを平滑化する平滑化処理工程と、  Furthermore, a reduction treatment step for bringing a reducing agent into contact with the surface of the photosensitive film, a smoothing treatment step for smoothing the photosensitive film,
を有することを特徴とする導電性膜の製造方法。  A method for producing a conductive film, comprising:
[2] 支持体上に銀塩を含有する銀塩乳剤層を有する感光フィルムを露光して現像処理 することにより金属銀部を形成する現像工程と、  [2] A development step of forming a metallic silver portion by exposing and developing a photosensitive film having a silver salt emulsion layer containing a silver salt on a support;
前記金属銀部の表面に還元剤を接触させる還元処理工程と、  A reduction treatment step of bringing a reducing agent into contact with the surface of the metallic silver part;
前記還元処理が施された感光フィルムを平滑化する平滑化処理工程と、 を有することを特徴とする導電性膜の製造方法。  And a smoothing treatment step of smoothing the photosensitive film subjected to the reduction treatment. A method for producing a conductive film, comprising:
[3] 前記平滑ィ匕処理がカレンダー処理であることを特徴とする請求項 1または 2に記載の 導電性膜の製造方法。 [3] The method for producing a conductive film according to [1] or [2], wherein the smoothing treatment is a calendar treatment.
[4] 前記カレンダー処理力 線圧力 1960N/cm (200kgf/cm)以上で行われることを特 徴とする請求項 3に記載の導電性膜の製造方法。  4. The method for producing a conductive film according to claim 3, wherein the calendering force is performed at a line pressure of 1960 N / cm (200 kgf / cm) or more.
[5] 前記還元剤がアルカリであることを特徴とする請求項 1または 2に記載の導電性膜 の製造方法。 [5] The method for producing a conductive film according to [1] or [2], wherein the reducing agent is an alkali.
[6] 前記還元剤がソジゥム トリァセトキシボロノ、イドライド、ジメチルァミンボラン又は水 素化ホウ素ナトリウムであることを特徴とする請求項 1または 2に記載の導電性膜の製 造方法。  6. The method for producing a conductive film according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the reducing agent is sodium triacetoxyborono, idride, dimethylamine borane, or sodium borohydride.
[7] 前記金属銀部が Agを 50〜100質量%含有することを特徴とする請求項 2に記載 の導電性膜の製造方法。  [7] The method for producing a conductive film according to [2], wherein the metallic silver part contains 50 to 100% by mass of Ag.
[8] 前記金属銀部には、物理現像および/またはめつき処理が実質的に施されていな いことを特徴とする請求項 2に記載の導電性膜の製造方法。 8. The method for producing a conductive film according to claim 2, wherein the metallic silver portion is not substantially subjected to physical development and / or staking treatment.
[9] 前記金属銀部に電気めつき処理が施される電解メツキ処理工程をさらに有すること を特徴とする請求項 2に記載の導電性膜の製造方法。 [9] The method for producing a conductive film according to [2], further comprising an electrolytic plating treatment step in which an electroplating treatment is performed on the metallic silver portion.
[10] 前記電解めつき処理力 10段以下のめっき浴での処理であることを特徴とする請 求項 9に記載の導電性膜の製造方法。 [10] The method for producing a conductive film according to claim 9, wherein the electroplating treatment power is treatment in a plating bath having 10 or less steps.
[11] 前記金属銀部が銀イオン配位子で処理されていることを特徴とする請求項 2に記載 の導電性膜の製造方法。 [11] The method for producing a conductive film according to [2], wherein the metallic silver portion is treated with a silver ion ligand.
[12] 支持体上にメッシュ状の金属銀部を形成してなる透光性電磁波シールド膜であつ て、前記メッシュ状の金属銀部が Agを 50〜: LOO質量%含有する線幅が 18 m以下 の金属銀細線が開口率 85%以上のメッシュ状に組み合わされてなる金属銀部であり 、かつ、前記シールド膜が表面抵抗値が 5 Ω /sq以下で、長手方向に前記メッシュ 状の金属銀部が 3m以上連続し、かつ前記メッシュ状の金属銀部の断線が 10箇所/ m2以下であるシールド膜であることを特徴とする透光性電磁波シールド膜。 [12] A translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film in which a mesh-shaped metallic silver portion is formed on a support, wherein the mesh-shaped metallic silver portion has a line width of 18 to 50% Ag containing LOO mass%. a metal silver portion formed by combining fine metal silver wires of m or less in a mesh shape with an aperture ratio of 85% or more, and the shield film has a surface resistance value of 5 Ω / sq or less, and the mesh shape in the longitudinal direction. A translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, wherein the metallic silver part is a shielding film having a continuous length of 3 m or more, and the mesh-shaped metallic silver part has a break of 10 locations / m 2 or less.
[13] 光の透過によって生じるヘイズが 10%以下であることを特徴とする請求項 12に記 載の透光性電磁波シールド膜。  [13] The translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film according to [12], wherein a haze generated by light transmission is 10% or less.
[14] 請求項 12または 13に記載の透光性電磁波シールド膜を用いて製造された、ブラ ズマディスプレイパネル用透光性電磁波シールド膜、光学フィルター、またはプラズ マディスプレイパネノレ。  [14] A light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film for a plasma display panel, an optical filter, or a plasma display panel manufactured using the light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film according to claim 12 or 13.
PCT/JP2007/051613 2006-01-31 2007-01-31 Method for producing conductive film, light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel WO2007088896A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006022948 2006-01-31
JP2006-022948 2006-01-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007088896A1 true WO2007088896A1 (en) 2007-08-09

Family

ID=38327467

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2007/051613 WO2007088896A1 (en) 2006-01-31 2007-01-31 Method for producing conductive film, light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2007088896A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008123437A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2008-10-16 Fujifilm Corporation Conductive film and method for producing the same

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11145676A (en) * 1997-11-11 1999-05-28 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive tape electromagnetic wave shielding structure and display employing it
JP2004039981A (en) * 2002-07-05 2004-02-05 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Emi shield film and manufacturing method therefor
JP2004221565A (en) * 2002-12-27 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film and manufacturing method therefor
JP2004296990A (en) * 2003-03-28 2004-10-21 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Electromagnetic wave shield material and manufacturing method therefor
WO2005115070A1 (en) * 2004-05-24 2005-12-01 Gunze Limited Electromagnetic wave shielding material and process for producing the same
JP2006012935A (en) * 2004-06-23 2006-01-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Transparent electromagnetic wave shield film and method of manufacturing the same

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11145676A (en) * 1997-11-11 1999-05-28 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Electromagnetic wave shielding adhesive tape electromagnetic wave shielding structure and display employing it
JP2004039981A (en) * 2002-07-05 2004-02-05 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Emi shield film and manufacturing method therefor
JP2004221565A (en) * 2002-12-27 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film and manufacturing method therefor
JP2004296990A (en) * 2003-03-28 2004-10-21 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Electromagnetic wave shield material and manufacturing method therefor
WO2005115070A1 (en) * 2004-05-24 2005-12-01 Gunze Limited Electromagnetic wave shielding material and process for producing the same
JP2006012935A (en) * 2004-06-23 2006-01-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Transparent electromagnetic wave shield film and method of manufacturing the same

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008123437A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2008-10-16 Fujifilm Corporation Conductive film and method for producing the same
JP2008251417A (en) * 2007-03-30 2008-10-16 Fujifilm Corp Conductive film and its manufacturing method
US8071271B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2011-12-06 Fujifilm Corporation Conductive film and method for producing the same

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5207816B2 (en) Electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter, and mesh-like conductive metal thin film
JP5588597B2 (en) Manufacturing method and manufacturing apparatus of conductive material
US8097143B2 (en) Plating method, light-transmitting electrically-conductive film and light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shield film
JP4961220B2 (en) Manufacturing method of conductive film, translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, optical filter, and plasma display panel
WO2006098334A1 (en) Light-transmitting electromagnetic shielding film, optical filter and plasma television
WO2006098336A1 (en) Plating method, light-transmitting conductive film and electromagnetic shielding film
WO2006088026A1 (en) Photosensitive material for electrically conductive film formation, electrically conductive film, light-transparent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and process for producing the same
JP2006332459A (en) Conductive metal film, photosensitive material for forming the same, method of manufacturing the same and transparent electromagnetic shield film used for plasma display panel
JP4832322B2 (en) Conductive metal film, translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel, and method for producing conductive metal film
JP2006228836A (en) Translucent conductive film and its manufacturing method, and optical filter using translucent conductive film
JP2007207987A (en) Translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, optical filter and plasma display panel
JP4500715B2 (en) Method for producing translucent conductive film, translucent conductive film, translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, and optical filter
JP2007009326A (en) Plating method, electrically conductive film, and light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shield film
KR20080011644A (en) Plating method, electrically conductive film and light-transmitting electromagnetic wave shielding film
JP2007149760A (en) Rolled optical film and its manufacturing method
JP2007200922A (en) Optical filter translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film of plasma display and optical filter
JP2007335729A (en) Conductive metal film and translucent electromagnetic shield film
JP2007310091A (en) Plasma display panel
JP2007208133A (en) Translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, translucent electromagnetic wave shielding laminate, optical filter and plasma display panel
US8034542B2 (en) Conductive film and manufacturing method thereof, and transparent electromagnetic shielding film
JP2007201378A (en) Translucent electromagnetic wave shielding film, optical filter, and plasma display panel
JP2007162118A (en) Plating apparatus, plating method, translucent conductive film, and translucent electromagnetic wave shield film
JP2007311646A (en) Light transparency electromagnetic wave shielding film, and optical filter and plasma display panel using shielding film
JP4911459B2 (en) Conductive film, method for producing the same, electromagnetic shielding film, method for producing the same, and plasma display panel
JP2008282924A (en) Translucent electromagnetic wave shield film, and optical filter

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 07707799

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1